Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi
Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi
Wake Up Kiwi
 
Wake Up Kiwi
 
Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi
Wake Up Kiwi

· Home / Introduction

CURRENT AFFAIRS

· Current Events & Breaking News

· Cabal / Illuminati / NWO Watch

· Mainstream Media Manipulation

· Banking Crimes & Criminals

· Political Crimes & Criminals

· Feature Articles

· Positive Developments

ILLUMINATI / NWO

· NWO Globalist Agenda

· Secret Societies & The Illuminati

· Conspiracy To Rule The World

· What / Who Is "The Crown"?

· Agenda 21/2030 In New Zealand

· Surveillance Society/Police State

· 'Terrorism' & Engineered Wars

· Eugenics / Depopulation Agenda

· Religion As A Tool For Control

· Common Law Vs Statute Law

SCIENCE / TECHNOLOGY

· The Climate Change Scam

· Chemtrails & Geoengineering

· Suppressed Science

· Positive New Technologies

· Cures, Health & Wellbeing

· Dangerous & Dirty Technology

· Spiritual Aspects & Metaphysics

· The Extra-Terrestrial Presence

HISTORY

· Suppressed / Hidden History

· Real New Zealand History

· The Opal File: NZ / AUS History

· 150+ NWO Globalist Quotes

MISCELLANEOUS

· Political Commentary

· Positive Resources

· Resistance, Resources & Links

· Contact



Newsletter archive - click here

Site Search:































Wake Up Kiwi
Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi

Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi
News Archives



 

Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi

Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi

The Climate Change Industry And The Hoax Of Global Warming
August 5 2023 | From: FreedomOutpost / Various

If you ask the environmentalists, it is global warming. If it snows, it is global warming. If it's hot, it is global warming. Everything is global warming and must be redressed immediately or the earth will perish.



This is not just Amerika - but worldwide. Hundreds of billions have already been spent around the globe on a deliberately manufactured panic.

Related: Green Gestapo Says You're Mentally Ill If You Challenge Climate Change + Over 30,000 Scientists Say 'Catastrophic Man-Made Global Warming' Is A Complete Hoax And Science Lie

I am not sure who coined the term "climate change industry," but it is an apt description of the snake oil salesmen who have become billionaires on the unfounded and irrational fear of debunked global warming and of climate change based on manufactured consensus science.

The climate has been changing for millennia in cyclical periods dominated by either unusually cold or unusually hot temperatures.

It is convenient to the promoters of the climate change industry to purposefully confound weather events with climate.

Having declared that the "science is settled," the global warming scaremongering environmentalists are moving on to the next target of limiting our property rights and freedoms via carbon footprint and draconian, coal-industry destructive EPA regulations.

After all, the number one threat to national security has been declared to be climate change.



Related: Discovery Of Massive Volcanic CO2 Emissions Puts Damper On Global Warming Theory & Climate Change Hoax Collapses As New Science Finds Human Activity Has Virtually Zero Impact On Global Temperatures

It is not the crushing, out-of-control debt; it is not the planned and unchecked flood of immigrants into countries around the world, changing the demographics and eliminating sovereignty to the benefit of global elitist control; it is not ISIS beheading Christians and occupying the formerly liberated towns and provinces in Iraq; and it is not Iran, with its nuclear bomb program, threatening to wipe Israel off the map - Israel, our ally, and the only sane patch of reality in the Middle East.

The climate change industry has admitted through a Freudian slip that their agenda of climate change is "disrupting national economies, costing us dearly today and even more tomorrow."

Of course, climate has been changing, and we are in a cooling period now, but truth cannot impede the liberal political advocates' agenda of taxing rich countries more, spreading the wealth, and destroying our economy in the name of protecting the Earth.




Related: Climate Change Hoax Collapses As Michael Mann’s Bogus “Hockey Stick” Graph Defamation Lawsuit Dismissed By The Supreme Court Of British Columbia

The climate change industry has managed to transform a natural phenomenon of climate change into a global disaster that needs to be addressed by bureaucrats through fundamentally changing how we live, what we own, how our economies are run, by carbon footprint taxation, Smart Growth, Green Growth state and local programs around the world, and through weather modification spraying of chemicals into the atmosphere.

This spraying of chemicals (chemtrails) is really affecting the weather and the growing season for agriculture, reducing yield. The climate change industry has become such a religion of environmentalism gone berserk that they are now trying to ban farming.

Electricity costs are going up, smart meters that catch on fire have been installed everywhere in order to control people's energy consumption and in-home ambient temperature, and many electricity generation plants are scheduled to be closed due to draconian EPA regulations.

The government's all-out assault to redress climate change through regulatory planning and financial control is having a serious impact on our economy, the coal industry, the oil industry, and on everybody's lives.



Related: ClimateChangeGate: The Hidden Agenda Behind The Huge Hoax And Global Criminal Conspiracy & Climate Change Hoax Collapses As New Science Finds Human Activity Has Virtually Zero Impact On Global Temperatures

The hypothesis that rich nations caused climate change by burning fossil fuels to produce energy has never been proven by IPCC's computer modeling.

The fact that now the hypothesis changed its name from global warming to climate change in the face of obvious 18 years of global cooling is enough evidence that the purveyors of the industry of climate change are desperate but are not giving up.

There is never a shortage of young, idealistic rioters-for-hire who, for a nominal fee will demonstrate anywhere against global warming, even in Quebec in the snow. Fleecing rich countries with carbon taxes is too lucrative a scam to give up the agenda.



Related: Amazing Science Lesson: Environmentalists Declare War On Photosynthesis In Stupefying Effort To Exterminate All RecognizableLife On Planet Earth

The real reason behind the global warming scare and why the United Nations' alarmists have been driving us into forced submission of environmentalist stewardship is that they want capitalism destroyed and replaced with their vision of a utopian communist economy that has never worked across the centuries.

These progressives have a problem with the Industrial Revolution, with "fossil fuels" (They are not so fossil, since the earth keeps producing them), with the only successful economic model that has provided generous income to all these hot-air spewing, idle bureaucrats, who have nothing better to do than meet in exotic locales planning the destruction of the goose that lays the golden eggs that feed their exorbitant lifestyles, salaries, bonuses, and pensions.

Christina Figueres, Executive Secretary of U.N.'s Convention on Climate Change, disclosed the real reason for the climate change industry when she told us that they are not interested in saving the world from global warming Armageddon, but they want to destroy capitalism:


"This is the first time in the history of mankind that we are setting ourselves the task of intentionally, within a period of time, to change the economic development model that has been reigning for at least 150 years, since the Industrial Revolution."


Related Articles:

Discovery Of Massive Volcanic CO2 Emissions Puts Damper On Global Warming Theory & Climate Change Hoax Collapses As New Science Finds Human Activity Has Virtually Zero Impact On Global Temperatures

Let's Review 50 Years Of Dire Climate Forecasts And What Actually Happened & New Zealand Climate Commission’s Radical Plan

Exposing The Bogus "97% Consensus" Claim Over Climate Change 'Science' & Top-Level Climate Modeler Spills The Beans On The ‘Nonsense’ Of ‘Global Warming Crisis’

UN IPCC Scientist Blows Whistle On Lies About Climate, Sea Level


Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi

Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi
Why The Powers That Be Are Pushing A Cashless Society
August 4 2023 | From: ZeroHedge / Various

We can't reign-in the banks if we cannot pull our money out of them - awareness is required;



Click here to watch 'Evolution of a Cashless Society (1:49)

Related: The “Great Reset” Elite Coup: Taking Control By Destroying Cash - Reshaping The Human “Individual”

Martin Armstrong summarizes the headway being made to ban cash, and argues that the goal of those pushing a cashless society is to prevent bank runs ... and increase their control:


"The central banks are ... planning drastic restrictions on cash itself. They see moving to electronic money will first eliminate the underground economy, but secondly, they believe it will even prevent a banking crisis.

This idea of eliminating cash was first floated as the normal trial balloon to see how the people take it. It was first launched by Kenneth Rogoff of Harvard University and Willem Buiter, the chief economist at Citigroup. Their claims have been widely hailed and their papers are now the foundation for the new age of Economic Totalitarianism that confronts us.

Rogoff and Buiter have laid the ground work for the end of much of our freedom and will one day will be considered the new Marx with hindsight. They sit in their lofty offices but do not have real world practical experience beyond theory.

Considerations of their arguments have shown how governments can seize all economic power are destroy cash in the process eliminating all rights. Physical paper money provides the check against negative interest rates for if they become too great, people will simply withdraw their funds and hoard cash.

Furthermore, paper currency allows for bank runs. Eliminate paper currency and what you end up with is the elimination of the ability to demand to withdraw funds from a bank.

***

In many nations, specific measures have already been taken demonstrating that the Rogoff-Buiter world of Economic Totalitarianism is indeed upon us. This is the death of Capitalism.

Of course the socialists hate Capitalism and see other people’s money should be theirs. What they cannot see is that Capitalism is freedom from government totalitarianism. The freedom to pursue the field you desire without filling the state needs that supersede your own.

There have been test runs of this Rogoff-Buiter Economic Totalitarianism to see if the idea works. I reported on June 21, 2014 that Britain was doing a test run. A shopping street in Manchester banned cash as part of an experiment to see if Brits would accept a cashless society.

London buses ended accepting cash payments from July 2014. Meanwhile, Currency Exchange dealers began offering debt cards instead of cash that they market as being safer to travel with. The Chorlton, South Manchester experiment was touted to test customers and business reaction to the idea for physical currency will disappear inside 20 years.

France passed another Draconian new law that from the police parissummer of 2015 it will now impose cash requirements dramatically trying to eliminate cash by force. French citizens and tourists will then only be allowed a limited amount of physical money.

They have financial police searching people on trains just passing through France to see if they are transporting cash, which they will now seize. Meanwhile, the new French Elite are moving in this very same direction. Piketty wants to just take everyone’s money who has more than he does. Nobody stands on the side of freedom or on restraining the corruption within government.

The problem always turns against the people for we are the cause of the fiscal mismanagement of government that never has enough for themselves.

In Greece a drastic reduction in cash is also being discussed in light of the economic crisis. Now any bill over €70 should be payable only by check or credit card – it will be illegal to pay in cash. The German Baader Bank founded in Munich expects formally to abolish the cash to enforce negative interest rates on accounts that is really taxation on whatever money you still have left after taxes.

***

Complete abolition of cash threatens our very freedom and rights of citizens in so many areas.

***

Paper currency is indeed the check against negative interest rates. We need only look to Switzerland to prove that theory. Any attempt to impose say a 5% negative interest rates (tax) would lead to an unimaginably massive flight into cash.

This was already demonstrated recently by the example of Swiss pension funds, which withdrew their money from the bank in a big way and now store it in vaults in cash in order to escape the financial repression. People will act in their own self-interest and negative interest rates are likely to reduce the sales of government bonds and set off a bank run as long as paper money exists.

Obviously, government and bankers are not stupid. The only way to prevent such a global bank run would be the total prohibition of paper money. This is unlikely, both in Switzerland and in the United States because the economies are dominated there by a certain “liberalism” to some extent but also because their currencies also circulate outside their domestic economies.

The fact that but the question of the cash ban in the context of a global conference with the participation of the major central banks of the US and the ECB will be discussed, demonstrates by itself that the problem is not a regional problem.

Nevertheless, there is a growing assumption that the negative interest rate world (tax on cash) is likely to increase dramatically in Europe in particular since it is socialism that is collapsing. Government in Brussels is unlikely to yield power and their line of thinking cannot lead to any solution.

The negative interest rate concept is making its way into the United States at J.P. Morgan where they will charge a fee on excess cash on deposit starting May 1st, 2015. Asset holdings of cash with a tax or a fee in the amount of the negative interest rate seems to be underway even in Switzerland.

***

The movement toward electronic money is moving at high speed and this says a lot about the state of the financial system. The track record of the major financial institutions is nearly perfect – they are always caught on the wrong side when a crisis breaks, which requires their bailouts.

The fact that we have already seen test runs with theory-balloons flying, the major financial institutions are in no shape to withstand another economic decline.

For depositors, this means they really need to grasp what is going on here for unless they are vigilant, there is a serious risk of losing everything. We must understand that these measures will be implemented overnight in the middle of a banking crisis after 2015.75. The balloons have taken off and the discussions are underway.

The trend in taxation and reduction of cash seems to be unstoppable. Government is not prepared to reform for that would require a new way of thinking and a loss of power. That is not a consideration. They only see one direction and that is to take us into the new promised-land of economic totalitarianism."

People can’t pull cash out of their bank accounts – for political reasons, because they’ve lost confidence in the bank, or because “bail-ins” are enacted – if cash is banned.



Related: The Khazarian Bankster Cult That Hijacked The World & Worthless Pieces Of Paper - Interest On Fake Money Is Confiscating Your Freedom

The Financial Times argued last year that central banks would be the real winners from a cashless society:


"Central bankers, after all, have had an explicit interest in introducing e-money from the moment the global financial crisis began…

***

The introduction of a cashless society empowers central banks greatly. A cashless society, after all, not only makes things like negative interest rates possible, it transfers absolute control of the money supply to the central bank, mostly by turning it into a universal banker that competes directly with private banks for public deposits. All digital deposits become base money."


The Government Can Manipulate Digital Accounts More Easily than Cash

Moreover, an official White House panel on spying has implied that the government is manipulating the amount in people’s financial accounts.

If all money becomes digital, it would be much easier for the government to manipulate our accounts.

Indeed, numerous high-level NSA whistleblowers say that NSA spying is about crushing dissent and blackmailing opponentsnot stopping terrorism.



Related: The Three Varieties Of Money

This may sound over-the-top … but remember, the government sometimes labels its critics as “terrorists“. If the government claims the power to indefinitely detain – or even assassinate – citizens at the whim of the executive, don’t you think that government people would be willing to shut down, or withdraw a stiff “penalty” from a dissenter’s bank account?

If society becomes cashless, dissenters can’t hide cash. All of their financial holdings would be vulnerable to an attack by the government.

This would be the ultimate form of control. Because – without access to money – people couldn’t resist, couldn’t hide and couldn’t escape.


Related Articles:

COVID-19 And The War On Cash: What Is Behind The Push For A Cashless Society? & Will COVID-19 Break Our Cash Habit?

The Money Changers

Ghost Money, Burnt Money And Dead Money


Why Gold Is Money - Fiat Money Creates An Immoral Society: Money With Real Value Is Crucial

Cashless Crisis: “With Digital Payments, Civilization Comes To An End Until Power Is Restored”

How Greece Became A Guinea Pig For A Cashless And Controlled Society

Babylonian Money Magic & How Modern "Commercial Law" Is Based On Ancient Babylonian Codes


The War On Cash: Australia Leads The New Age Of Economic Totalitarianism


Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi

Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi

A Totalitarian Society Has Totalitarian Science
August 3 2023 | From: JonRappoport / Various

And vice versa. Totalitarian science lets you know you’re living in a totalitarian society



The totalitarian party principles from George Orwell's "1984"

The government, the press, the mega-corporations, the prestigious foundations, the academic institutions, the “humanitarian” organizations say:

Related: The Darkening Clouds Of Totalitarianism


"This is the disease. This is its name. This is what causes it. This is the drug that treats it. This is the vaccine that prevents it."

“This is how accurate diagnosis is done. These are the tests. These are the possible results and what they mean."

“Here are the genes. This is what they do. This is how they can be changed and substituted and manipulated. These are the outcomes."

“These are the data and the statistics. They are correct. There can be no argument about them.

“This is life. These are the components of life. All change and improvement result from our management of the components."

“This is the path. It is governed by truth which science reveals. Walk the path. We will inform you when you stray. We will report new improvements."

“This is the end. You can go no farther. You must give up the ghost. We will remember you.”

We are now witnessing the acceleration of Official Science. Of course, that term is an internal contradiction. But the State shrugs and moves forward.

The notion that the State can put its seal on favored science, enforce it, and punish its competitors, is anathema to a free society.

For example: Declaring that psychiatrists can appear in court as expert witnesses, when none of the so-called mental disorders listed in the psychiatric literature are diagnosed by laboratory tests.

For example: Sstating that vaccination is mandatory, in order to protect the vaccinated (who are supposed to be immune) from the unvaccinated. An absurdity on its face.

For example: Announcing that the science of climate change is “settled,” when there are, in fact, huge numbers of researchers who disagree. And then, drafting legislation and issuing executive orders based on the decidedly unsettled science.

For example: Officially approving the release and sale of medical drugs (“safe and effective”) which go on to kill, at a conservative estimate, 100,000 Americans every year. And then refusing to investigate or punish the purveyors of these drug approvals (the FDA).

For example: Permitting the widespread use of genetically modified food crops, based on no long-term studies of their impact on human health. And then, arbitrarily announcing that the herbicide, Roundup, for which many of these crops are specifically designed, is non-toxic.

For example: Declaring and promoting the existence of various epidemics, when the viruses purportedly causing them are not proven to exist and/or not proven to cause human illness (Ebola, SARS, West Nile, Swine Flu, etc.)



Related:
A Slippery Slide To Totalitarianism

A few of you reading this have been with me since 1988, when I published my first book, AIDS INC., Scandal of the Century. Among other conclusions, I pointed out that HIV had never been shown to cause human illness; the front-line drug given to AIDS patients, AZT, was overwhelmingly toxic; and what was being called AIDS was actually a diverse number immune-suppressing conditions.

Others of you have found my work more recently, since I started this site in 2001. I always return to the subject of false science, because it is the most powerful long-term instrument for repression, political control, and destruction of human life.

As I’ve stated on many occasions, medical science is ideal for mounting and launching covert ops aimed at populations - because it appears to be politically neutral, without any allegiance to State interests.

Unfortunately, medical science, on many fronts, has been hijacked and taken over. The profit motive is one objective, but beyond that, there is a more embracing goal:

Totalitarian control.

It aims to replace your freedom, consciousness, and intelligence with its own synthetic versions.


Related Articles:

Hollywood Sci-Fi Filmmakers Dramatise Fictional Climate Change To Scare Everybody Into Voting For Climate Totalitarians

NWO: Totalitarianism And The Five Stages Of Dehumanization + Why 2022 Is 1973: Klaus Schwab Is Zbigniew Brzezinski

Archbishop Carlo Maria Viganò Calls On People Of Faith To Unite In A Worldwide Anti-Globalist Alliance To Free Humanity From The Totalitarian Regime & WEF Founder Klaus Schwab Announces ‘Great Narrative’ Project

Socialism Equals Triumph For Corporate Criminals

Australia Is A Full Scale Pilot Test For The New World Order & The Totalitarian Futue Globalists Want For The Entire World Is Being Revealed



Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi

Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi

Have You Ever Felt Like The Government Doesn’t Really Care What You Think?
August 2 2023 | From:RepresentUs / Various

Professors Martin Gilens (Princeton University) and Benjamin I. Page (Northwestern University) looked at more than 20 years worth of data to answer a simple question: Does the government represent the people?



Their study [which took place in the US but which is equally applicable to all other western countries] took data from nearly 2000 public opinion surveys and compared it to the policies that ended up becoming law.

Related: Everywhere In The Western World, Government Is A Conspiracy Against The People & Cartels That Run The World

In other words, they compared what the public wanted to what the government actually did. What they found was extremely unsettling: The opinions of 90% of Americans has essentially no impact at all.

This video gives a quick rundown of their findings - it all boils down to one simple graph: 





Read more at: RepresentUs



Related Articles:

After Decades Of Brainwashing, MSM & Governments Are Losing Control Of The People

Mathematical Report Proves Human Society Is Too Complex To Be Ruled By A Government

CAFR (Comprehensive Annual Financial Report) Collateral Accounts: Taxes And Government Fraud Against Citizens Around The World

Four Words: Weapons Of Media Lies & When Corporate Power Is Your Real Government, Corporate Media Is State Media

PfizerGate: Official UK Government Reports Prove Hundreds Of Thousands Of People Are Dying Every Single Week Due To COVID-19 "Vaccination" & The COVID-19 Power Grab: “Our Governments Are Working To Harm Us”


The Rise And Rise Of Control-Freak Government



Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi

Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi

Demons Behind The Music Industry (Ex Illuminati Explains) & Illuminati - The Music Industry Exposed
August 1 2023 | From: JohnTodd / Various

John Todd, former member of the Illuminati and music industry insider speaks out, plus a truly excellent documentary on what really goes on within the music industry.



I made an interesting discovery which may back up my video Demons Behind The Music Industry.

Related: The Record Industry Pushed Gangster Rap As a Favor to Friends in the Prison Industry

In the video John Todd mentions the album Destroyer by KISS. If you look on the cover of the album you can see the KISS members standing on rocks (or coals) above what looks like a lake of fire with smoke in the background, and it has a dark sky.

The Bible says in Revelation 9:2 -


"And he opened the bottomless pit; and there arose a smoke out of the pit, as the smoke of a great furnace; and the sun and the air were darkened by reason of the smoke of the pit."

In verses 7 and 8 it goes on to say that the faces of the locusts that came out of the pit had faces of men and hair as the hair of women. If you look at the KISS album cover Destroyer they have faces of men and long hair like women.

The king of these locusts from the pit is called Apollyon.

Now if you check the name Apollyon in the dictionary guess what it means? It means the DESTROYER which is the title of KISS's album. Coincidence? You decide.



Demons Behind The Music Industry (Ex Illuminati Explains)




Illuminati - The Music Industry Exposed




Related Articles:

The Secret Meeting That Changed Rap Music And Destroyed A Generation & The Troubling Case Of Paz de la Huerta And Her (Now Deleted) Instagram Account

Social Engineering - The War On The Higher Mind Of Humans: Here’s Why You Should Consider Converting Your Music To A=432 Hz

Devil Music: A History Of The Occult In Rock & Roll



Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi

Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi

Two Major Psy Ops Documents You Must Read
July 31 2023 | From: TruthStreamMedia / Various

These psychological operations are being used on you.The Amerikan and global populace have no conception of the level of advanced, high-tech psychological operations they are under. The field of psy ops, which used to be a tool of governments and military strategists against rival nations has now been turned upon the masses by the emerging global government.



 For the last century, thousands of think tanks have perfected the use of propaganda through fields like advertising, neurological research, psychology, etc.  The father of modern advertising and Defense Department brain Edward Bernays, opened his classic Propaganda in 1928 with the following:

Related: Fraudcast News: You Will Believe What the Media Tells You To


"The conscious and intelligent manipulation of the organized habits and opinions of the masses is an important element in democratic society. Those who manipulate this unseen mechanism of society constitute an invisible government which is the true ruling power of our country. 

One of the ironies of propaganda to work is that its population must be educated. Ellul argues that the university education forms the next generation of propagandist to manipulate its society.





In other words, the more highly educated you are, the more integrated you are in this propaganda and its dissemination.

Remember Ellul is not talking about the obvious Nazi or Communist propaganda during the Second World War which was for a short-term campaign using a vertical process (top down approach easily countered by a competing top down approach).

No, Ellul is talking about the horizontal process similar to how viruses infect adjoining people around them.

Imagine an intellectual virus which spreads itself similar to a biological virus, through contact and multiply this with mass media technology as a delivery system.
We are governed, our minds are molded, our tastes formed, our ideas suggested, largely by men we have never heard of.
This is a logical result of the way in which our democratic society is organized. Vast numbers of human beings must cooperate in this manner if they are to live together as a smoothly functioning society. Our invisible governors are, in many cases, unaware of the identity of their fellow members in the inner cabinet.

They govern us by their qualities of natural leadership, their ability to supply needed ideas and by their key position in the social structure.

Whatever attitude one chooses to take toward this condition, it remains a fact that in almost every act of our daily lives, whether in the sphere of politics or business, in our social conduct or our ethical thinking, we are dominated by the relatively small number of persons - a trifling fraction of our hundred and twenty million - who understand the mental processes and social patterns of the masses.

It is they who pull the wires which control the public mind, who harness old social forces and contrive new ways to bind and guide the world.”

It is crucial to consider that the US is not a democracy, but as it was socially engineered from a republic to a so-called “democracy,” the normal state of a “democracy” is shown to be an oligarchy.

 Bernays is explaining that very fact – a nation of enforced egalitarian democracy ends up being an oligarchy run by billionaire manipulators and con artists.  



Related: Propaganda Is The Art Of Overwhelming Logic

Those that rule end up being the best as swaying mass man by appealing constantly to his baser desires. In this system, the only telos is to constantly drive any and all of society towards those base desire to increase material consumption and production.

The system itself has no end, other than the propagation of the parasitical system.  

Modern psy ops has only refined this technique. Retired Major Ed Rouse writes of modern psychological operations:


“Another part of the answer to this question lies in the attitude of people towards psychological operations. To some, it produces images of government controlled communications/mass media, telling the people only what the government wants them to hear.

To others, it raises the horrid specter of Joseph Goebbels, Hitler’s Propaganda Minister, practicing the technique of the “big lie” which has incorrectly become synonymous with “propaganda”. Still to others, the mere mention of “psychological” operations or warfare invokes visions of “mind control” through some mysterious means of brainwashing.

It should be clear that modern psychological operations, or PSYOP, is none of those things. On the contrary PSYOP is not unlike the public advertising that we are all exposed to wherever we go, every day, through all kinds of mass media. However the negative connotation that some people attach to the word psychological” prevents many people from recognizing the simple truth.

Everyone knows that if you do not have a good product to sell, people will not continue buying it, no matter how much you advertise. The same applies to the points of view advertised through the use of psychological operations. Thus we have no reason to fear PSYOP, but we do have ample reason to respect it for what it can do.”

There is no reason to fear Psy Ops, we are told, because it is a humane weapon. Infowar has ever been the major focus of warfare, back to Sun Tzu, who wrote that warfare’s goal was to change the enemy’s mind, not destroy his army.

If the target could be changed in his thought pattern, what use in expending tremendous effort and resources on fighting a physical battle?  



Related: Total Individual Control Technology – Insider Exposes How You And Your DNA Are Being Targeted & Psychotechnology: How Artificial Intelligence Is Designed To Change Humanity

But that was an older time, when nations and tribes battled one another for regional dominance and natural resources.

While this still goes on today, the top players are different: Major power blocs are battling for control of the new world order. The dominant power bloc in our world today is the Anglo banking empire, and their method of control is largely through mass media, which, as we’ve seen from the quotes above, is the same as mass advertising.  

This is why the “news” has a uniform presentation globally. The governing structure above the “government” level is that of international corporations, themselves governed by the major banking houses. Thus, the government / corporate “news” is always the same, all the way down to the local affiliate broadcasting the same laughable tabloid and warm fuzzy pieces about local kitten shelters and pharmaceutical salvation.

This was recently illustrated in a masterful way by Conan’s late night show, where pieces of local news stations were clipped together, from supposedly different stations, reading from the exact same script, nationwide. These scripts are written and sent out to the news agencies by the Pentagon and corporate central think tanks to engineer the populace into mindless abandon. 

“You don’t need us to tell you gas prices are back on the rise!”





Noted propaganda analyst Jacques Ellul posited that democratic societies even use a more sophisticated form of propaganda than authoritarian ones. A reviewer of Ellul’s famous Propaganda: The Formation of Men’s Attitudes elucidates this point:


“Ellul argues that authoritarian governments never really need propaganda as much as democratic societies do and when the authoritarian governments of the past (communist and fascist) used propaganda, it was an obvious type.

One could insinuate that it would be amateurish level and much easier to spot. Nonetheless many people in the past fell prey to this propaganda as much as people today fall prey to advertising campaigns.

A democratic society uses a more sophisticated form of propaganda, one which is long-term in process and result; again one could insinuate that this would be of a professional level and much more difficult to spot.






One of the ironies of propaganda to work is that its population must be educated. Ellul argues that the university education forms the next generation of propagandist to manipulate its society.

In other words, the more highly educated you are, the more integrated you are in this propaganda and its dissemination.

Remember Ellul is not talking about the obvious Nazi or Communist propaganda during the Second World War which was for a short-term campaign using a vertical process (top down approach easily countered by a competing top down approach).

No, Ellul is talking about the horizontal process similar to how viruses infect adjoining people around them.

Imagine an intellectual virus which spreads itself similar to a biological virus, through contact and multiply this with mass media technology as a delivery system.
One of the ironies of propaganda to work is that its population must be educated. Ellul argues that the university education forms the next generation of propagandist to manipulate its society. In other words, the more highly educated you are, the more integrated you are in this propaganda and its dissemination.

Remember Ellul is not talking about the obvious Nazi or Communist propaganda during the Second World War which was for a short-term campaign using a vertical process (top down approach easily countered by a competing top down approach). No, Ellul is talking about the horizontal process similar to how viruses infect adjoining people around them.

Imagine an intellectual virus which spreads itself similar to a biological virus, through contact and multiply this with mass media technology as a delivery system.

So the more educated you become, the less aware you are that you are a victim of propaganda and the more you are ready to spread your ideology to others who will in turn reinforce you and be reinforced by you in a horizontal process.

Leaders aren’t telling you what to think (directly), you are being told by your peers what to think and you pass along this information to others to inform them what to think.

Then when this ideology has reached a substantial portion of the population, you demand the leaders to comply and they reluctantly do so (which was their intention 30 to 40 years previously, but they won’t tell you this). This is the essence of what Ellul says in his Propaganda book.”

As you watch the snooze, er, “news,” notice the psychological tricks that are being foisted upon you. Why is the focus something mundane and irrelevant, like a celebrity’s nipple or a litter of kittens being born?  

Why are the newscasters talking to you like you’re a 5th grader? Why is the netwscast about depression followed by an ad for the pharmaceutical pill that will magickally make you happy?  

Why is the een sexting piece followed by an ad for the latest smartphone and sex app? All of this is a scientific tactic of psychological manipulation. This is why the Pentagon places Psy Ops soldiers at local news stations.

The Infowar is the war on the public’s mind:





Related Articles:

A Masterclass In Propaganda & Transgressing The Logic Of The New Tyrannical Normal

Is Wikipedia An Establishment Psyop?

How To Spot A Media Psy-Op

Twenty Five Rules Of Disinformation, Propaganda, “PSYOPS”, Debunking Techniques

Ten Psychological Behavior Tips That Can Make Your Life Easier



Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi

Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi

FBI Document Confirms Hitler Fled To Argentina In 1945
July 30 2023 | From: Geopolitics / Various

Hidden in plain sight at FBI.gov, a document confirming the whereabouts of Adolf Hitler at the closing of World War 2 can be downloaded there.



He’s been roaming the entire United States until the ripe age of 92…


Related: The History And Mission Of The Nazi-Illuminati Bush (Scher(f)f) Crime Family



Click here to view this on the FBI website. Click here to download a PDF copy of the FBI document.

From the above document:


“January 12, 1945 – I received a visit from X, a well known German Agent. He hinted at the possibility of German defeat and gave me a period of two days to think of the most suitable spot in South America as a refuge for Hitler and a group of German Scientists and officers, in case the latter should find it necessary to “disappear from the world scene” temporarily.

January 13, 1945 – I wracked my brain trying to decide what spot would provide the greatest security. I decided to recommend Colombia, my own country.”

– 149, FBI document above

“After having made all the necessary arrangements, which required well over a month and a half, during which period I was constantly in contact with Germany and the “Hitler Group”…, the landing was made in Bahiahonda on July 19, 1945, at dawn.”

“For six days Hitler and his followers travelled on horseback , only at night, from Bahiahonda to the “La Loma” landing field. At the agreed hour of meeting three contact men and I waited at the rendezvous.

We had succeeded in acquiring three small four-passenger Stinson planes, to begin the trip from there to Narino. Then, I was suddenly informed by a high-ranking German officer that Hitler had changed his mind and he had decided not to hide on my property.”

– p 150, FBI document above

Newly declassified FBI documents prove that the government knew Hitler was alive and well, and living in the Andes Mountains long after World War II.

On April 30 1945, Adolf Hitler committed suicide in his underground bunker. His body was later discovered and identified by the Soviets before being rushed back to Russia. Is it really possible that the Soviets have been lying all this time, and that history has purposely been rewritten?

No one thought so until the release of the FBI documents. It seems that it is possible that the most hated man in history escaped war torn Germany and lived a bucolic and peaceful life in the beautiful foothills of the Andes Mountains.



Related: Were Hitler & Nazism Zionist Creations?


The Intelligence Community Knew

FBI documents are beginning to show that not only was Hitler and Eva Braun’s suicide faked, the infamous pair might have had help from the director of the OSS himself, Allen Dulles.

In one FBI document from Los Angles, it is revealed that the agency was well aware of a mysterious submarine making its way up the Argentinian coast dropping off high level Nazi officials. What is even more astonishing is the fact that the FBI knew he was in fact living in the foothills of the Andes.


Who is the Mysterious Informant?

In a Los Angeles letter to the Bureau in August of 1945, an unidentified informant agreed to exchange information for political asylum. What he told agents was stunning.

The informant not only knew Hitler was in Argentina, he was one of the confirmed four men who had met the German submarine. Apparently, two submarines had landed on the Argentinian coast, and Hitler with Eva Braun was on board the second.

The Argentinian government not only welcomed the former German dictator, but also aided in his hiding. The informant went on to not only give detailed directions to the villages that Hitler and his party had passed through, but also credible physical details concerning Hitler.

While for obvious reasons the informant is never named in the FBI papers, he was credible enough to be believed by some agents.



Related: Exposed: The Nazi Roots Of The European Union

The FBI Tried to Hide Hitler’s Whereabouts

Even with a detailed physical description and directions the FBI still did not follow up on these new leads. Even with evidence placing the German sub U-530 on the Argentinian coast shortly before finally surrounding, and plenty of eye witness accounts of German official being dropped off, no one investigated.



Information has emerged which indicates that the current Chancellor of Germany, Angela Merkel is either the daughter or grand daughter of Adolf Hitler and that she is the leader of the Fourth Reich. It is suggested that this photo is of the two.


Even More Evidence is Found:

Along with the FBI documents detailing an eye witness account of Hitler’s whereabouts in Argentina, more evidence is coming to light to help prove that Adolf Hitler and Eva Braun did not die in that bunker.

In 1945, the Naval Attaché in Buenos Aires informed Washington there was a high probability that Hitler and Eva Braun had just arrived in Argentina.

This coincides with the sightings of the submarine U-530. Added proof comes in the form of newspaper articles detailing the construction of a Bavarian styled mansion in the foothills of the Andes Mountains.

Further proof comes in the form of architect Alejandro Bustillo who wrote about his design and construction of Hitler’s new home which was financed by earlier wealthy German immigrants.

Irrefutable Evidence that Hitler Escaped:

Perhaps the most damming evidence that Hitler did survive the fall of Germany lies in Russia. With the Soviet occupation of Germany, Hitler’s supposed remains were quickly hidden and sent off to Russia, never to be seen again.

That is until 2009, when an archeologist from Connecticut State, Nicholas Bellatoni was allowed to perform DNA testing on one of the skull fragments recovered.

What he discovered set off a reaction through the intelligence and scholarly communities. Not only did the DNA not match any recorded samples thought to be Hitler’s, they did not match Eva Braun’s familiar DNA either. So the question is, what did the Soviets discover in the bunker, and where is Hitler?


Even former general and President Dwight D. Eisenhower wrote to Washington

It was not only General Eisenhower who was concerned over Hitler’s compete disappearance, Stalin also expressed his concerns. In 1945, the Stars and Stripes newspaper quoted then General Eisenhower as believing that the real possibility existed of Hitler living safely and comfortably in Argentina.



Related: Ukraine Biolabs, Blood, Sand, Betrayal & U.S. Congress Admitted Nazi Role In Ukraine In 2015

Is it Possible?

With all of the evidence coming to light, it is possible and even likely that not only did Hitler escape from Germany; he had the help of the international intelligence community. Released FBI documents prove that they were not only aware of Hitler’s presence in Argentina; they were also helping to cover it up.

It would not be the first time the OSS helped a high ranking Nazi official to escape punishment and capture. Look at the story of Adolf Eichmann who was located in Argentina in the 1960’s.

Did Hitler escape to Argentina? The answer is yes.


Related Articles:

The Swastika: How The Nazis Turned A Sign Of Good Luck Into A Symbol Of Evil

WikiLeaks Rolls Out Archive Of Over 1,200 ‘Clinton Iraq War’ Emails: FBI Recommends "No Charges" Against Hillary Clinton

Shocking Hillary Quotes + Hillary's Emails Confirm France And US Killed Qaddafi For His Gold And Oil


“Collective Narcissism” And The “Dark Triad”: Those Who Protest Against The “Official” Covid-19 Narrative Are Categorized As “Psychopaths”: Is It A Witch Hunt? + Is The World Adopting The Ways Of Nazi Germany?

Same Media That Once Deemed Chemtrails A Conspiracy Theory Now Openly Promotes Chemtrailing The Entire Planet To “End Climate Change” & Global Geoengineering (Chemtrails) Experiment Pushed By Bill Gates Also Funded By Nazi-Linked Alfred P. Sloan Foundation, Linked To Eugenics And Depopulation

Pulitzer Prize-Winning CNN Journalist Busted For Fabricating Fake News, Resigns From CNN + Google Gestapo Goes Full Nazi Against Independent Media — Hiding “Controversial Content” And “Redirecting” Searches


The Federal Reserve And The Bank Of England Financed The 3rd Reich + International Red Cross Report Confirms The Holocaust Of Six Million Jews Is A Hoax

Propaganda Techniques Of Empire + P.C. Language Control And The Rise Of The Third Reich

A Nazi In The (Pocket) Is Worth Four In The Bush (Family)



Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi

Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi

‘The Black Spider Memos': Prince Charles, Secrecy And The British Government
July 29 2023 | From: 21stCenturyWire / Various

A little known but potentially significant bundle of letters written by Prince Charles could alter the public perception, and ultimately the course of a fragile British monarchy in the 21st century.



Why are these letters so important? Aren’t the monarchs in Britain just ‘figureheads’? These letter expose the monarchy’s ability to privately lobby government on matters concerning themselves, and to micro-manage any affairs pertaining to themselves.

Related:
Unlawful Killing - The Murder Of Princess Diana And Why It Matters


“In 2006, the former deputy private secretary and press adviser to the Prince of Wales, Mark Bolland, said that the Prince had referred to himself as a “dissident” who worked against the prevailing political consensus.[6]

Concerning Charles’s views, Bolland said that he “…routinely meddled in political issues and wrote sometimes in extreme terms to ministers, MP’s and others in positions of political power and influence…

The prince used all the means of communication at his disposal, including meetings with ministers and others, speeches and correspondence with leaders in all walks of life and politicians. He was never party-political, but to argue that he was not political was difficult…

These letters were not merely routine and non-controversial…but written at times in extreme terms…containing his views on political matters and individual politicians at home and abroad and on international issues…

I remember on many occasions seeing in these day files letters which, for example, denounced the elected leaders of other countries in extreme terms, and other such highly politically sensitive correspondence.”[7]
(Source: Wiki)

As a ‘privy counsellor’, Prince Charles gives himself the right to communicate confidentially with British cabinet ministers about “matters that concern him.”[6]


Special privileges for those who believe they are the rightful rulers of this planetary fiefdom. Here, here…





Over this month, British officials, with enormous reluctance, will relinquish the contents of 27 letters by Prince Charles to the press termed the “black spider memos” spanning the period between September 2004 and April 2005. 


A better view into the idiosyncratic views of the prolific letter writing prince might be offered, though it is unlikely to be spectacular.  The Royals, notably the British ones, have tended to be fairly open about their antediluvian prancing in a world that has somehow left them behind.

Related: Prince Harry: “I Will Not Be Bullied Into Playing A Game That Killed My Mum”

But that was not the point of The Guardian newspaper’s ten year challenge, which yielded rewards last month with a 5 to 2 Supreme Court ruling rejecting the attempt by former Attorney-General Dominic Grieve to veto publication.  The veto had been directed against the decision of the freedom of information tribunal which rejected Grieve’s efforts to keep the lid on the correspondence.

In 2012, Grieve argued that the correspondence contained the “most deeply held personal views and beliefs” that effectively constituted his training to be a monarch. The tribunal found, however, that it was:


“in the overall public interest for there to be transparency as to how and when Prince Charles seeks to influence government.”

The rather vague constitutional justifications for secrecy again demonstrate how woolly logic has a habit of finding its ways into the highest departments of supposed constitutional democracy. 

Should the public be interested in what the Prince [now "King"] and future heir to the throne is considering in letters to the ministers of the crown?  Perhaps less than the efforts of government to suppress the contents of such correspondence.



Related: The Spider's Web: Britain's Second Empire

Amendments made to the Freedom of Information Act in 2010 suggest that knowing one’s royals – at least in terms of thoughts, however threadbare – is not something governments wants the public to know. 

The persisting addling of British thinking on this score is that transparency is only good in modest doses, and is not something necessarily required over large swathes of government.  Communications from a monarch, heir, and second in line are exempt for 20 years, or five years after the individuals death.

Then comes the government veto, which was overridden by the UK Supreme Court. In the words of Lord Neuberger, President of the court;


“There is no clear or specific suggestion anywhere in the [FOI Act] that it is intended that [a veto] should enable a member of the executive to over-ride a judicial decision.”

The argument fired from the secrecy advocates was always one of protecting Charles – most probably from himself.  You can’t spill the beans on the future monarch – to do so risks harming his ability to perform his duties, certainly on his ascension to the throne, should his enduring mother ever decide to leave this world.

A mystifying line taken by those mucking in for Charles is that of compromising political neutrality.  It is evidently not in the public interest to know that the heir is, in fact, politically compromised.  Keep that reality at bay. 



Related: Their Royal Heilnesses - Secret 1933 Film Shows Edward VIII Teaching This Nazi Salute To The Queen

Advocates of privacy for Charles’ correspondence suggest that his correspondence be protected, notwithstanding it was with government ministers and officials.  It is precisely for this reason that such correspondence can have value.

To what extent the royal understands his constitutional role in the structure of Westminster is not entirely clear.  In such cases, presumption means little, and some politicians are wondering whether Charles should be leapfrogged. 


“If there are serious questions about the suitability of Prince Charles as a monarch,” ponders Labour member Paul Flynn MP, “there could be a question in the public mind about whether to skip a generation.”

Prime Minister David Cameron is aggrieved at the whole business, finding fault with the view that senior members of the royal family have a direct, yet confidential line with the government of the day. Cameron;


“thinks that’s a principle we should uphold. So while we have taken steps in this parliament to strengthen the ability to do that through the FOI act, if there needs to be more done to make that clear, then the prime minister is clear those steps should happen in the next parliament.”

The imposition of further secrecy is something to look forward to.

The move on the part of republicans is to show Charles to be a significant meddler in the affairs of elected government.  The demarcation between monarch and government is a fine one, managed by steady, sagacious heads.  Charles’ mother, Queen Elizabeth II, may well have that; the republicans wonder whether the son sports a similar approach. 

Campaign group Republic are awaiting to see if the letters reveal the prince to be “a serious political force rather than […] apolitical and harmless.”

Certainly, republicans might get a fillip from all of this, though it will hardly matter much.  First comes the issue of what will be released.  Heavy redaction may be expected.  In Cameron’s own ominous words, “we will now consider how to release these letters.”



Related: JFK: Dylan Strikes Again & Diana Mystery White Fiat Uno Driver Breaks His Silence - Why He Won’t Talk To Police

The second issue is how revealing the contents of such correspondence will actually be. The prince may well inhabit a twilight role of assumed powers and relevance, patched over by various causes and efforts at activism. 

But however eccentric, bizarre or simply dull in modesty, the privacy of such figures has to yield to a general understanding of public duty. 

And that duty remains particularly onerous when faced with the dictates of Westminster democracy and parliamentary supremacy.


Related Articles:

The Royal Institute Of International Affairs

Make No Mistake: The Royal Wedding Was A Strategic Move By The House Of Windsor To Rebrand And Survive

Conspiracy Fact: US Media Royalty Admits To Practicing Occult To Kill Three People


Royal Society Of New Zealand Claims On Seal Level Rise Don't Stand Up

Royal Deceit? The Queen's Bank Under Investigation Over Tax Evasion


Kate’s Tutor And Royal Adviser Is A War Criminal Weapons Dealer: Sir David Manning

The British Empire Is Un-Masked, But Desperate

Brexit And The Matrix & The Sun Sets On The British Empire: Northern Irish Want Out After Brexit

The Top Of The Pyramid: The Rothschilds, The Vatican And The British Crown Rule World

Nothing To Celebrate In ANZAC: The Bloody History Of The British Empire

Murder On Queen Elizabeth II's Orders


Royal Household Will Not Be Exempt From Scrutiny In Child Sexual Abuse Inquiry

A Few Inconvenient Truths About The 'British Royal Family': The Queen's Speech - Decyphered

Weird Al Yankovic 'Royals' Parody Music Video: Illuminati 'Foil'


The Crown Of England Is Owned And Operated By The Vatican

Channel 4 News Cancels Prince Charles Interview Due To 'Draconian' Demands



Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi

Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi
Game Over: GMO Science Fraud Shattered By Stunning Investigative Book Worthy Of Nobel Prize - Altered Genes, Twisted Truth
July 28 2023 | From: NaturalNews
/ Various [Historical]

The science fraud game is over for the biotech mafia. After years of running its corporate con that pushed dangerous poisons into the food supply and the fragile environment, the biotech industry's lies are now exposed and meticulously deconstructed in an exhaustively researched new book launching March 20.





The title of the book? Altered Genes, Twisted Truth - How the Venture to Genetically Engineer Our Food Has Subverted Science, Corrupted Government, and Systematically Deceived the Public by Steven Druker.


Related: GMO's - A Planned Human Sterility Program

The Foreword of the book was authored by one of the most celebrated living scientists in the world: Jane Goodall, PhD, DBE and UN Messenger of Peace. The derogatory "anti-science" slur used by biotech operatives (such as discredited biotech shill Jon Entine) against other scientists won't work against Jane Goodall. Her legacy of science is irrefutably extraordinary, and she has received more science awards and accolades than almost any other scientist living today.

What does Jane Goodall have to say about the total science fraud of GMOs and the corrupt biotech industry?

In her own words, Altered Genes, Twisted Truth is "...without doubt one of the most important books of the last 50 years."

She goes on to reveal the stunning truth about the outright corruption, fraud and disinformation that now characterizes the biotech industry and the collusion of the FDA:


Altered Genes, Twisted Truth is the most chilling thing I've ever read. It's about the huge conspiracy by the big companies who do genetic modification to keep the public from knowing the truth, to subvert the course of justice.

[GMOs are a] shocking corruption of the life forms of the planet.

...the huge conspiracy by the big companies who do genetic modification to keep the public from knowing the truth, to subvert the course of justice.

...the general public and government decision makers have been hoodwinked by the clever and methodical twisting of the facts and the propagation of many myths.

...a number of respected scientific institutions, as well as many eminent scientists, were complicit in this relentless spreading of disinformation.



Related: GMOs Are Killing Us: Facts You Probably Don’t Know

Steven Druker is a hero. He deserves at least a Nobel Prize.

...the commercialization of GE foods occurred through the unbelievably poor judgment -- if not downright corruption -- of the US Food and Drug Administration (the FDA)... it apparently ignored (and covered up) the concerns of its own scientists and then violated a federal statute and its own regulations by permitting GE foods to be marketed without any testing whatsoever.

The evidence further shows how the agency assured consumers that GE foods are just as safe as naturally produced ones -- and that their safety has been confirmed by solid scientific evidence -- despite the fact it knew that no such evidence existed.

...it was this fraud that truly enabled the GE food venture to take off. And he asserts that the fraud continues to deceive the public and Congress, despite the fact that the lawsuit he initiated thoroughly exposed it.

...the mainstream media have been highly selective in what they report -- and have consistently failed to convey information that would cause concern about these engineered products. Moreover, Druker demonstrates that the policies imposed by the media magnates have been, in his words, 'not merely selective, but suppressive.'

...he relates several dramatic incidents in which journalists who tried to bring unsettling facts to light had their stories altered or totally quashed by higher level executives.

...it appears that such publications are downright deceptive, not only portraying genetic engineering in a misleading manner, but even misrepresenting some basic features of biology.

...even if these products did not entail higher risks, it's doubtful they could significantly reduce malnutrition or solve any major problems of agriculture.


I want Natural News readers to help make this book a national bestseller



Related: Transgenic Wars - How GMOs Impact Livestock And Human Health Around The Globe

Let's help make this a bestseller! Pre-order the book now: Altered Genes, Twisted Truth - How the Venture to Genetically Engineer Our Food Has Subverted Science, Corrupted Government, and Systematically Deceived the Public


Additional Quotes About the Book From Other Scientists


"Steven Druker has written one of the few books I have encountered, in my many years of public interest work, with the capacity to drive major change in a major issue. What Ralph Nader's Unsafe at Any Speed was to the auto industry and what Rachel Carson's Silent Spring was to synthetic pesticides, Altered Genes, Twisted Truth will be to genetically engineered food.

It is profoundly penetrating, illuminating, and compelling, and it could stimulate a monumental and beneficial shift in our system of food production." - Joan Levin, JD, MPH

"Altered Genes, Twisted Truth is a remarkable work that may well change the public conversation on one of the most important issues of our day. If the numerous revelations it contains become widely known, the arguments being used to defend genetically engineered foods will be untenable." - Frederick Kirschenmann, Phd Distinguished Fellow, Leopold Center for Sustainable Agriculture, Iowa State University, Author of Cultivating an Ecological Conscience

"Druker's brilliant exposé catches the promoters of GE food red-handed: falsifying data, corrupting regulators, lying to Congress. He thoroughly demonstrates how distortions and deceptions have been piled one on top of another, year after year, producing a global industry that teeters on a foundation of fraud and denial. This book is sure to send shock waves around the world." - Jeffrey M. Smith, international bestselling author of Seeds of Deception & Genetic Roulette

"Altered Genes, Twisted Truth is very readable, thorough, logical and thought-provoking. Steven Druker exposes shenanigans employed to promote genetic engineering that will surprise even those who have followed the ag-biotech industry closely for years. I strongly recommend his book." -- Belinda Martineau, Ph.D., a co-developer of the first genetically engineered whole food and author of First Fruit: The Creation of the Flavr Savr Tomato and the Birth of Biotech Foods

"Altered Genes, Twisted Truth reveals how the inception of molecular biotechnology ignited a battle between those committed to scientific accuracy and the public interest and those who saw genetic engineering's commercial potential.

Steven Druker's meticulously researched book pieces together the deeply disturbing and tremendously important history of the intertwined science and politics of GMOs. Understanding this ongoing struggle is a key to understanding science in the modern world." - Allison Wilson, PhD molecular geneticist, Science Director, The Bioscience Resource Project

Steven Druker's investigation into the history of fraud and deceipt that ushered in the era of GMOs deserves serious consideration before we take actions that will irreversibly alter the European food supply." -- Pat Thomas of Beyond GM

Through its masterful marshalling of facts, it dispels the cloud of disinformation that has misled people into believing that GE foods have been adequately tested and don't entail abnormal risk." --David Schubert, Ph.D. molecular biologist and Head of Cellular Neurobiology, Salk Institute for Biological Studies

"As a former New York City prosecutor, I was shocked to discover how the FDA illegally exempted GE foods from the rigorous testing mandated by federal statute. And as the mother of three young kids, I was outraged to learn how America's children are being callously exposed to experimental foods that were deemed abnormally risky by the FDA's own experts." - Tara-Cook Littman, J.D.

"The evidence is comprehensive, clear, and compelling; and its credibility is irrefutable. No one has documented other cases of irresponsible behavior by government regulators and the scientific establishment nearly as well as Druker documents this one. His book should be widely read and thoroughly heeded." -- John Ikerd, Ph.D. Professor Emeritus of Agricultural and Applied Economics, University of Missouri -- Columbia

"Altered Genes, Twisted Truth will stand as a landmark. It should be required reading in every university biology course." -- Joseph Cummins, Ph.D. Professor Emeritus of Genetics, Western University, London, Ontario

"Steven Druker's meticulously documented, well-crafted, and spellbinding narrative should serve as a clarion call to all of us. In particular, his chapter detailing the deadly epidemic of 1989-90 that was linked with a genetically engineered food supplement is especially significant.

I and my Mayo Clinic colleagues were active participants in the attempt to identify the cause of this epidemic. Druker provides a comprehensive analysis of all the evidence and also presents new findings from our work.

Overall his discussion of this tragic event, as well as its ominous implications, is the most comprehensive, evenly balanced and accurate account that I have read." - Stephen Naylor, PhD CEO and Chairman of MaiHealth Inc., Professor of Biochemistry and Molecular Biology, & Pharmacology Mayo Clinic (1991-2001)

"Based on over 30 years of teaching computer science at universities and on extensive experience as a programmer in private industry, I can state that Steven Druker has done an excellent job of demonstrating the recklessness of the current practices of genetic engineering in comparison to the established practices of software engineering.

His book presents a striking contrast between the two fields, showing how software engineers progressively developed greater awareness of the inherent risks of altering complex information systems – and accordingly developed more rigorous procedures for managing them – while genetic technicians have largely failed to do either, despite the fact that the information systems they alter are far more complex, and far less comprehended, than any human-made system." - Ralph Bunker, Phd


Publisher's Description

This book uncovers the biggest scientific fraud of our age.

It tells the fascinating and frequently astounding story of how the massive enterprise to restructure the genetic core of the world's food supply came into being, how it advanced by consistently violating the protocols of science, and how for more than three decades, hundreds of eminent biologists and esteemed institutions have systematically contorted the truth in order to conceal the unique risks of its products - and get them onto our dinner plates.

Altered Genes, Twisted Truth provides a graphic account of how this elaborate fraud was crafted and how it not only deceived the general public, but Bill Clinton, Bill Gates, Barack Obama and a host of other astute and influential individuals as well.



Related: Genetics Are The New Eugenics: How GMO’s Reduce The Human Population & This Major Report On GMO Safety Has Just One Small Problem: Undisclosed Conflicts Of Interest

The book also exposes how the U.S. Food and Drug Administration (FDA) was induced to become a key accomplice -- and how it has broken the law and repeatedly lied in order to usher genetically engineered foods onto the market without the safety testing that's required by federal statute.

As a result, for fifteen years America's families have been regularly ingesting a group of novel products that the FDA's own scientific staff had previously determined to be unduly hazardous to human health.

By the time this gripping story comes to a close, it will be clear that the degradation of science it documents has not only been unsavory but unprecedented - and that in no other instance have so many scientists so seriously subverted the standards they were trained to uphold, misled so many people, and imposed such magnitude of risk on both human health and the health of the environment.



Related Articles:

“A Blatant Display Of Unscientific Propaganda:” Cornell Student Exposes GMO Propaganda In Scathing New Letter

Heartbreaking Letter From Dying EPA Scientist Begs Monsanto “Moles” Inside The Agency To Stop Lying About Dangers Of RoundUp (Glyphosate) & Monsanto Funneled Money To Front Groups To Attack Anti-GMO Activists, Court Documents Reveal

Total Individual Control Technology – Insider Exposes How You And Your DNA Are Being Targeted & Psychotechnology: How Artificial Intelligence Is Designed To Change Humanity



Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi

Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi

Ten George Orwell Quotes That Predicted The World Today
July 27 2023 | From: TheAntimedia / Various

“If you want a picture of the future, imagine a boot stamping on a human face - forever.”



George Orwell, author of 1984, had tremendous insight on how the global elite would dominate society, and he predicted the current political climate in America today as you’ll see from this list by Justin King of the Anti-Media:

Related: The Darkening Clouds Of Totalitarianism

George Orwell ranks among the most profound social critics of the modern era.

Some of his quotations, more than a half a century old, show the depth of understanding an enlightened mind can have about the future.

1. “In our age there is no such thing as ‘keeping out of politics.’ All issues are political issues, and politics itself is a mass of lies, evasions, folly, hatred and schizophrenia.”

Though many in the modern age have the will to bury their head in the sand when it comes to political matters, nobody can only concern themselves with the proverbial pebble in their shoe. If one is successful in avoiding politics, at some point the effects of the political decisions they abstained from participating in will reach their front door.

More often than not, by that time the person has already lost whatever whisper of a voice the government has allowed them.

2. “All the war-propaganda, all the screaming and lies and hatred, comes invariably from people who are not fighting.”

Examining the nightly news in the run up to almost any military intervention will find scores of talking heads crying for blood to flow in the streets of some city the name of which they just learned to pronounce. Once the bullets start flying, those that clamored for war will still be safely on set bringing you up-to-the-minute coverage of the carnage while their stock in Raytheon climbs.



Related: The Dystopian Western World

3. “War against a foreign country only happens when the moneyed classes think they are going to profit from it.”

It’s pretty self-explanatory and while it may be hard to swallow, it’s certainly true. All it takes is a quick look at who benefited from the recent wars waged by the United States to see Orwell’s quip take life.

4. “The very concept of objective truth is fading out of the world. Lies will pass into history.”

My most prized books are a collection of history books from around the world. I have an Iraqi book that recounts the glory of Saddam Hussein’s victory over the United States in 1991. I have books from three different nations claiming that one of their citizens was the first to fly.

As some of the most powerful nations in the world agree to let certain facts be “forgotten,” the trend will only get worse. History is written by the victor, and the victor will never be asked if he told the truth.

5. “In a time of deceit, telling the truth is a revolutionary act.”

Even without commentary, the reader is probably picturing Edward Snowden or Chelsea Manning.

The revolutions of the future will not be fought with bullets and explosives, but with little bits of data traveling around the world destroying the false narratives with which governments shackle their citizens.



Related: Orwell’s 1984 No Longer Reads Like Fiction - It’s The Reality Of Our Times & The Propaganda Ministry Known As “The Free Press”

6. “Journalism is printing what someone else does not want printed: everything else is public relations.”

Make no mistake about it; if an article does not anger someone, it is nothing more than a public relations piece. Most of what passes for news today is little more than an official sounding advertisement for a product, service, or belief.

7.“In real life it is always the anvil that breaks the hammer…”

In every conflict, it is not the side that can inflict the most damage, but the side that can sustain the most damage that ultimately prevails. History is full of situations in which a military “won the battles but lost the war.”

8.“The nationalist not only does not disapprove of atrocities committed by his own side, but he has a remarkable capacity for not even hearing about them.”

Haditha. Panjwai. Maywand District. Mahmudiyah. These names probably don’t ring a bell, but it is almost a certainty that the reader is aware of the brutality that occurred in Benghazi.

The main difference is that in the first four incidents, those committing the acts of brutality were wearing an American flag on their shoulder.



Related: The Emergence Of Orwellian Newspeak And The Death Of Free Speech

9. “Threats to freedom of speech, writing and action, though often trivial in isolation, are cumulative in their effect and, unless checked, lead to a general disrespect for the rights of the citizen.”

Every day there is a new form of censorship or a new method of forcing people into self-censorship, and the people shrug it off because it only relates to a small minority.

By the time the people realize their ability to express disapproval has been completely restricted, it may be too late. That brings us to Orwell’s most haunting quote.

10. “If you want a picture of the future, imagine a boot stamping on a human face - forever.”

Once the people are indoctrinated with nationalistic beliefs, and the infrastructure to protect them from some constantly-changing and ever-expanding definition of an enemy is in place, there is no ability for the people to regain liberty.

By the time all of the pieces are in place, not only is opportunity to regain freedom lost, but the will to achieve freedom has also evaporated. The reader will truly love Big Brother.


Related Articles:

Beware Modern-Day Doublespeak

Not Just Surveillance: Three Current Phenomena Exposing 1984 As An Instruction Manual For The State

It's Official: This Is Straight Out Of Orwell's 1984...


Ministry Of Truth: EU Takes A Bashing Over Orwellian 1984 Tweet

Orwell’s Dystopian CCTV Surveillance State Comes To Life In China – Who’s Next?


Facebook To Become Left-Wing Propaganda Echo Chamber With Orwellian Plan To Label Independent Journalism “Fake” + Facebook Jumps On ‘Fake News’ Fact-Checker Train, Will ‘Roll Out’ With PolitiFact

The Orwellian War On Skepticism: Battling “Fake News” & Institutional Investors Now Dominate Media Company Ownership


Act Leader David Seymour: Kiwis Need To Resist An 'Orwellian Future' & Zuckerberg Complains About FCC’s Lack Of Free Speech Regulations - Wants More Silencing Of Voices, But Especially Conservative Voices


Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi

Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi
The Conspiracy To Rule The World: #58. The Trilateral Commission
July 26 2023 | From: WakeUpKiwi / Various

Occult Meaning of the Trilateral Commission logo: The logo for the Trilateral Commission (Zionist entity of the New World Order) is said to contain the number 666.



Each arrow when separated from the logo represents a 6, making 666. The arrows also form a pyramid in the centre.

Related: The Conspiracy To Rule The World - An Interactive History



www.trilateral.org

Unfortunately, the Council on Foreign Relations is not the only group proposing an end to the sovereignty of the United States. In 1973, The Trilateral Commission was founded to work for the same goal: a one-world government.

The Trilateral Commission's roots stem from the book, "Between Two Ages", written by Zbigniew Brzezinski in 1970. In this book, Brzezinski praised Marxism, thought of the United States as obsolete, and praised the formation of a one-world government. His thinking closely parallels that of CFR founder Edward Mandell house.


Marxism


On page 72, Brzezinski writes: "Marxism is simultaneously a victory of the external, active man over the inner, passive man and a victory of reason over belief."

On page 83, he states: "Marxism disseminated on the popular level in the form of Communism, represented a major advance in man's ability to conceptualize his relationship to his world."

On page 123, we find: "Marxism supplied the best available insight into contemporary reality."

What Mr. Brzezinski fails to tell his readers is that approximately 100 million human beings have been murdered under Marxism "in the form of Communism" just in this Twentieth Century.

It has enslaved a billion more, and has been responsible for those who live in Communist-dominated countries. There is nothing like being brainwashed!



For World Government

Zbigniew Brzezinski's "Between Two Ages" was published in 1970 while he was a professor in New York City. David Rockefeller read the book and, in 1973, launched the new Trilateral Commission, whose purposes include linking North America, Western Europe, and Japan "in their economic relations, their political and defense relations, their relations with developing countries, and their relations with Communist countries."

As Newell writes:


"The original literature of The Trilateral Commission also states, exactly as Brzezinski's book had proposed, that the more advanced Communist States could become partners in the alliance leading to world government.

In short, David Rockefeller implemented Brzezinski's proposal."

Rockefeller appointed Zbigniew Brzezinski to be the Director of The Trilateral Commission.



David Rockefeller




Zbigniew Brzezinski

Jimmy Carter

In 1973, Jimmy Carter became a student of Brzezinski, and a founding member of the Trilateral Commission.

On March 21, 1978, "The New York Times" featured an article about Zbigniew Brzezinski's close relationship with the President. In part, it reads:


"The two men met for the first time four years ago when mr. Brzezinski was executive director of The Trilateral Commission… and had the foresight to ask the then obscure former Governor of Georgia to join its distinguished ranks. Their initial teacher-student relationship blossomed during the campaign, and appears to have grown closer still."

To think that the teacher in this relationship praised Marxism, and wanted to form a one-world government. And the student was to become ghe President of the united States.

During the 1976 political campaign, Carter repeatedly told the nation that he was going to get rid of the Establishment Insiders if he became president. But when he took office, he promptly filled his Administration with members of the Council on Foreign Relations (284 to be exact) and The Trilateral Commission, the two most prominent insider organizations in America.

Included in this list of members of The Trilateral Commission were Walter Mondale and Dr. Henry Kissinger.




The Trilateral Commission Office of The North American Group - 1156 Fifteenth Street, NW, Washington, DC 20005

Beginning with Jimmy Carter, all the recent presidents, including president Clinton, have promptly filled their administrations with members of the Council on Foreign relations and The Trilateral Commission.


Trilateral Commission Membership

When the Trilateral Commission was first launched, the plan was for an equal number of members from each of the three regions. The numbers soon began to grow, and ceilings were imposed about 1980. These ceilings have been raised somewhat since then as new countries came to be represented in the groups.

The European Group includes members from Austria, Belgium/Luxembourg, Bulgaria, Croatia, Cyprus, the Czech Republic, Denmark, Estonia, Finland, France, Germany, Greece, Hungary, Ireland, Italy, Norway, Poland, Portugal, Romania, Serbia, Slovakia, Slovenia, Spain, Sweden, the Netherlands, and the United Kingdom.

It now has a ceiling of 170 members which is divided into national quotas. Germany has a quota of 20; France, Italy, and the United Kingdom each have a quota of 18; and Spain has a quota of 12. The remaining national quotas range from 6 to 1.



Related: When The Rockefeller Trilateral Commission Exposed Its Own Secret

The ceiling for the North American Group is 120, including 24 Canadian members, 13 Mexican members and 90 U.S. members.

The Japanese Group of 85 members expanded in 2000 to become the Pacific Asian Group and now includes over 100 members from Japan, Korea, Australia, New Zealand, the original five ASEAN countries (Indonesia, Malaysia, the Philippines, Singapore and Thailand), India, and the People's Republic of China. Triennium Participants from Hong Kong and Taiwan have also participated. This group changed its name to Asia Pacific Group in 2012.

To help preserve the Commission’s unofficial character, members who take up positions in their national administration give up Trilateral Commission membership. New members are chosen on a national basis. The procedures used for rotation off and for invitation of new members vary from national group to national group.

Three chairmen (one from each region), deputy chairmen, and directors constitute the leadership of the Trilateral Commission, along with an Executive Committee including 36 other members.

Membership in The Trilateral Commission is by invitation only.

Global Regions of the Trilateral Commission:




Click here to download the Trilateral Commission Membership List


The Effects

The common everyday American citizen does not need to be told that there is a controlled government running the United States.

But when we understand exactly what the Council on Foreign Relations and The Trilateral Commission are, and how its members hold key positions in the Government, it becomes all the more clear.

As Newell writes:


"The effects of the Council on Foreign Relation and The Trilateral Commission on the affaires of our nation is easy to see. Our own Government no longer acts in its own interest, we no longer win any wars we fight, and we constantly tie ourselves to international agreements, pacts, and conventions.

And, our leaders have developed blatant preferences for Communist U.S.S.R., Communist Cuba, and Communist China, while they continue to work for world government, which has always been the goal of Communism…

"The real goal of our own Government’s leaders is to make the United States into a carbon copy of a Communist state, and then to merge all nations into a one-world system run by a powerful few."

Barry Goldwater once stated on this subject:


"The Trilateral Commission is international, and it is intended to be the vehicle for multinational consolidation of the commercial and banking interests by seizing control of the political government of the United States.

The Trilateral Commission represents a skillful, coordinated effort to seize control and consolidate the four centers of power – political, monetary, intellectual, and ecclesiastical."

As with the CFR, not all the members of The Trilateral Commission are fully committed to the destruction of the United States. Some just go along for the ride, to obtain fame, comfortable living, and constatn flattery.

But some, of course, really do run things and some, of course, really do run things and work against the independence of the united States.



Related: NWO: Totalitarianism And The Five Stages Of Dehumanization + Why 2022 Is 1973: Klaus Schwab Is Zbigniew Brzezinski


In Conclusion

The American [Western] people may think that they live in a free country when, in reality, things could not be more controlled. The American public must be made aware of what is really taking place in the united States.

The key to obtain our freedom, to have a true independence, is to free ourselves from the yoke of International Finance. How true it is to state that those who control the money of a country control everything in that country.

The first step is prayer: to kneel down before Almighty God and to ask Him to save America, to shower His blessings on this great land.



Related: The Conspiracy To Rule The World: #07. The House of Rockefeller

And second; to educate the population. Every citizen of the United States should become informed about these inside organizations, and make it a point not to vote nor to promote those, who are members for these organizations.

And to demand a reform of the financial laws of the country, especially to repeal the Federal Reserve Act of 1913 [ which has now expired, seeing the Fed and IRS merge into the Treasury Department - which of course has never been officially announced ], and to implement the philosophy of Social Credit into the laws of the country.

Make it a point to subscribe as many people as possible to the "Michael" Journal so they could become educated as to how the financial system of the United States could actually be corrected.

Then the United States Government would no longer be under the control of the Bankers, but would become a servant of the American people.


Related Articles:

Behind Bilderberg 2015, Trilateral Commission: The Globalists Have A Major Problem + Bilderberg 2015: Full Attendee List & Agenda

The Round Table: The Hub Of The CFR, Trilateral Commission, RIIA, Club Of Rome, Bilderberg Group And The UN

An Expose: The Council On Foreign Relations (CFR) & The Trilateral Commmission



Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi

Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi

Clive de Carle: How You Can Restore Your Health And Enable Your Body To Self-Repair From Virtually Any Disease Or Affliction
July 25 2023 | From: WakeUpKiwi / ClivedeCarle / Various

This article contains the key points from two interviews with Clive de Carle on the Cosmic Voice channel on Blogtalk Radio, from November 9 and November 30, 2014.




Clive has many informative videos on Youtube and his website may be found at www.ancientpurity.com.
He encourages people to make contact with him and he may be reached at clivedecarle@gmail.com.
Clive also recommends The Institute for Optimal Nutrition at www.ion.ac.uk.


Related: In Defense Of Homeopathy

The notes below were taken from the two Blogtalk radio shows featuring Clive which may be streamed online or downloaded from here.


About Clive


Clive de Carle is an acclaimed speaker in the field of natural health and longevity. A former organic farmer, for over 20 years he has worked in health performance optimisation, providing cutting edge dietary consultancy and enabling thousands of clients to reverse the signs of illness and regain optimum health. 

Clive now holds his own events, speaks at many natural health and innovative events. He hosted The Health Revolution Show and interviews Health and Healing experts from around the world.

Clive's passion for natural health was triggered initially by a major health crisis in 1986.

A healthy man of 33, Clive was prescribed a course of antibiotics by his doctor for a skin condition, which left him hospitalised with Type 1 diabetes and advanced rheumatoid arthritis with no hope of a cure. With the doctors unable to help, Clive sought out a cure himself using nutrition and within one year Clive found he had completely reversed the arthritis.

Clives passion is helping people regain their health naturally, he see's clients whenever he can, in person or via skype. If you'd like a consultation with Clive or you'd like to come to one of his events please contact him.



Related: The Truth About MMS (Chlorine Dioxide) That They Don’t Want You To Know


Some Truths About Disease

The flu is caused by a lack of vitamin D in Winter. There is no such thing a 'flu season' - that is marketing hype.

The human brain is made from water, fat and cholesterol. Low fat / low cholesterol / low salt diets are deliberately misleading, hey will harm you and will eventually cause Alzheimers. Six tablespoons of coconut oil a day will cure Alzheimers as the fats allow the body to repair the brain.

There is no such thing as good cholesterol and bad cholesterol - this is disinformation. Your brain is largely made of cholesterol and this also is used by your body as a bandage for arteries.

Poisoning from Glyphosate (Roundup) can be reversed by taking brewers yeast.

A Russian scientist has proven that using frequency, GMO seeds can be reverted to their original non-GMO form.

People are told that their family history and genes determine whether they are susceptible to heart attacks or certain diseases - but much of this is programming. Any gene-based type of disorder can be eliminated by ensuring optimal health as described here.

90% of pharmaceutical drugs do not work on 60% of people - and this data came directly from an industry insider.

If Doctors know a cure for something they are under no legal obligation to tell you. 80% of Doctors would not take chemo, but they must recommend it to you for if they do not they will be struck off.

The 'normal' Doctors job is not to save your life but to put you on a treatment.



Related: Glyphosate Worse Than We Could Imagine: “It’s Everywhere” & Monsanto / Bayer Keeps Riding A Path Of Corruption


There are only 3 reasons why the human body becomes ill:

1. Physical damage, such as a car crash

2. Toxic poisoning

3. Nutrient deficiency


Nobody gets ill from a lack of pharmaceutical drugs, so how can these drugs ever be the answer?
(other than in a few cases).

Emergency Room (ER) medicine is very different from 'normal' medicine. 'Normal' Doctors can offer you drugs, surgery or radiation. They cannot give you nutritional advice and their training is shaped in such a way as to avoid anything that will really work. Their study only includes half a day on nutrition.

If you go into an ER, their job is to save your life. The ER Doctor uses Magnesium Sulphate (Epsom Salts) injections to stop heart attacks and strokes. ER Doctors know this trick but normal Doctors are not taught this, because a patient cured is a customer lost.

Ask a Chiropractor or an Osteopath: Can you cure Arthritis? If they say no they are useless.If they say yes they might be useful. Ask them if they do post-surgery cases as these are the most difficult ones. The nervous system is most often ignored by the mainstream medical apparatus.



Related: The Medical Cartel Is King In A Globalist World

Various Diseases & Cancer

If you are having problems with allergies you are most likely low in vitamins and minerals - you might be low in what is termed as "normality'. If you take fulvic minerals you might find this takes care of the issue alone.But it also could be the processed nature of the food that you are used to, it could also be the pasteurisation of dairy foods that you are used to.

It has been proven that many viruses may be defeated by high doses of Vitamin C alone. Add to that Colloidal Silver, Selenium, MMS and Iodine, if you start piling one thing on top of another you could walk through a Leper colony kissing and hugging people and be fine.

If the germ theory were true Doctors would be dropping like flies. It is about how healthy you are, not about the viruses.

The founder of German New Medicine was an Oncologist who canvassed his 20,000 patients to come to the conclusion that there are reasons why certain people develop cancers in certain parts of their bodies and it is quite often linked to a life trauma. He also noted that there are some parts of the body that just do not get cancer, such as the heart.

3BP: 3 Bromopyrovate - Goes into the cancer cells and turns the Mitochondria off which is the energy system of the cells and so cancer cells die 100% of the time.

And so it's not "is there a cure for cancer", because there are hundreds of them, it's "which one?"

But, in the first week after a cancer diagnosis the chances of the person dying of a heart attack go up 25% because of the shock.

All of the charities that are begging for money to find a cure for cancer, they are not looking for a cure, they are looking to further line the pockets of the Pharmaceutical industry - and they are looking for a treatment, a drug that makes you feel a bit better while you die.

High doses of Vitamin C have cured cancer.

We are interested in health; and health by definition means that you are not ill.

Must-watch interview: Oncology nurse quits after discovering nutrition heals cancer



Related: Cancer Industry Not Looking For A Cure; They’re Too Busy Making Money & Same Amazon.Com That Banned Cancer Cure Documentaries Now All In With Big Pharma’s Toxic Cancer “Treatments” Via Its New “Go Gold” Astroturfing Campaign

Restoring Health

What Clive recommends is that people learn how to be healthy again, because everybody is a self repairing unit.

Looking at a flock of birds or school of fish, and assuming that all the food they need is there - you can't tell the young from the old. They all move at the same speed, and Human Beings left in the wild could also achieve that. If you put wild animals in captivity and change their food, they get the same diseases that humans get. If you cut your finger and you are very healthy it will heal much faster than if you are not well.

To get your health back you need about 100 vitamins, minerals, essential fats, amino acids, sunshine and proper water. Seventy of them are in one product alone, which is real [celtic] sea salt.

Many people who have a problem with fat, especially around the belly find that when they take these supplements that because they are de-toxing and re-mineralising that the fat just drops off because the body no longer has to store toxins in fat anymore.

Anybody who is not feeling 100% has to look at whether they are physically damaged, toxically poisoned or nutritionally deficient. Most people will be able to answer yes to the last two.



Related: World’s Elite Try To Wipe Out All Knowledge And Use Of Natural Cures, While They Privately Use Them For Their Own Longevity

Salt

They call it Celtic salt, it is the natural grey wet stuff that amongst many other things normalises blood pressure. It is a very good starting point for restoring health as it contains many helpful minerals and trace elements.

Supermarket table salt is bleached and is no good for you. Rock salts are nowhere near as good for you as Celtic salt.

Your body is self regulating, you know exactly how much salt you want on your food. Forget everything you have been told about salt, they were probably lying or ignorant.

Salt is good for you and you can put a pinch of it in water to make it softer, easier to drink and much more hydrating to the cells, as the salt changes the structure of water.

Magnesium

Magnesium is like the opposite of Calcium, and is very good for arthritis. Magnesium spray used on sore or inflexible joints will work in 5 minutes. Magnesium carries oxygen to all of your cells.

A deficiency in Magnesium by be notes by symptoms such as muscle cramps, restless leg syndrome, eye twitches, and anxiety, hiccups, panic attacks, heart attacks, cancer and strokes.

A stressed person burns up 3 times more Magnesium and Vitamin C that an unstressed person.

Magnesium is not best taken internally because too much will move the bowels - and so a Magnesium deficiency will cause constipation.

Calcium cause muscles to contract which Magnesium causes muscles to relax. Magnesium helps over 300 emzyme processes in the human body and it also relaxes you. Magnesium Chloride baths help with getting good sleep. People taking a Calcium supplement may want to consider stopping this as they may be getting too much Calcium.



Related: The Criminalization Of Science Whistleblowers + The Connection Between Sudden Infant Death, Vaccines And Vitamin C

Vitamins & Minerals

Vitamin C is the answer to every virus because no virus can survive a high enough dosage of Vitamin C. It has been tested on everything from Anthrax, to TB, to Smallpox to Pneumonia, Mumps, Measles, Scarlet Fever and Dyptheria.

Everything they give you a vaccine for can be overcome with Vitamin C. This as been known for about 60 years and has been deliberately obscured and not taught to Doctors. This knowledge would be very bad for business.

High doses of Vitamin C have also cured cancer and helped to repair eyesight. With the prevalence of pharmaceutical drugs in recent decades, pretty drug reps with clever sales pitches have fooled Doctors (who know no better) into pushing drugs that cause more harm than good in most cases.

You should also take a good Multivitamin which contans Selenium and Zinc, along with a good multi-mineral. Minerals are just as important as vitamins.

If you are buying vitamins from the supermarket then you are pretty much wasting your time and money as they will be synthetic.

Iodine

Doctors once had a much higher success rate using easily accessible, cheap materials. About 100 years ago Iodine was used as the great cure-all. Iodine is all about intelligence, IQ, proper hormonal balance, adrenals and glands.

A lack of Iodine causes thyroid issues and in pregnant mothers, will reduce the IQ of the baby. Many people who have brain fog find that Iodine helps this lift.

Iodine is a great protector against radiation.



Related: Iodine - Suppressed Knowledge That Can Change Your Life

Organic Sulphur / Methylsulphonyl Methane (MSM)

Organic Sulphur (Sulfur) is another essential that is missing from out food chain because of chemical fertilisers.

Among many other things Sulphur is helpful in tumour reduction because it binds with heavy metal toxins and allows the body to expel them.

Sulphur helps a range of things including eyesite, erectile dysfunction and the healing of scar tissue.

Onions, garlic, brocolli and cauliflower are good food-based sources of sulphur but in low quantities


Fulvic Minerals

On top of everything else we need soil-based plant-derived minerals and the best way to get these are by way of Fulvic minerals. These come from the earth and a few drops taken in water will make you feel years younger when you wake up the next day. People have reported many positive benefits from taking Fulvic minerals, including the elimination of morning sickness.

If you are craving sugar or chocolate, it is most probably because you are low in chromium. The Fulvic minerals give you the trace elements that are missing from processed foods and that have been filtered out of water because you can't mix Chlorine with these minerals and Chlorine is present in tap water.

People who take the Multiminerals and Fulvic minerals notice that apart from having more energy that their apetite normalises.







Related: The Health & Healing Benefits Of Organic Sulphur (Sulfur): MSM (Methylsulfonylmethane)

Other Recommendations

Probiotics are also important because of the damaged gut we all have from chlorine in water and the use of antibiotics - which have also made their way into the water supply.

The best way is to fix the gut, because many people have a flora issue because of taking Pharmaceutical drugs or from too much Chlorine from tap water, and they have damaged their gut lining. This can be fixed by giving their stomach a rest from these things for a while and by using probiotics to restore their stomach lining to normal.

If you are over 40 then digestive enzymes are good to take as well because as we get older we tend not to digest food so well. These are taken just before meals.

People are enjoying incredible results in restoring their health, for example there is a product made from two types of egg plant that cured 96% of skin cancers in 85,000 people tested in Europe.

gcMAF is one of the most important revelations - it was discovered 24 years ago. It is a substance that is manufactured in the liver and it has been determined that if a person has a disease such as cance that it wipes out gcMAF.

European clinics that are using the gcMAF treatment are getting 84% success rates in reversing stage 4 cancer in patients, with an average tumor size reduction of 25% - 40% in one week. It is taken as a probiotic supplement and also by way of intramuscuar injection and sepository.

gcMAF re-starts the immune system and allows the body to heal itself. The treatment is also bringing 25% of Autistic children out of Autism, and so combined with other Autistic protocols there is much hope for these children to recover.

gcMAF is also helping with a range of other ailments including Alzheimers and Arthritis. The reason it works with so many ailments is because it is not about the illness, but the patients lack of health. gcMAF 'switches health back on again'. gcMAF is expensive but it is very powerful and very fast acting.

30 years ago the Russians began experimenting with Peptides and in many cases people have actually been able to re-grow limbs that were cut off, including fingers with the nail.



Related: The Remedy For True Health & The True Origin Of Vaccines

Organics

Eating something with an 'organic' sticker slapped on the side of it doesn't mean a thing. Clive notes that he was an organic farmer for 9 years and what he saw going on was terrible. That label was virtually meaningless. The definition of 'Organic' has been diluted to such a degree that the farmer can get away with most things and you are not going to know about it.

Crops can be grown organically in ground that is completely devoid of minerals, so the plant may look alright and not have been sprayed with chemicals but are you going to get any nutritional benefit from it?

With all of the hybridisation that has gone on we are eating unbalanced food. So many fruits and vegetables sold now are seedless - how can they possibly be any good for you?


Water

In some places the water supply comes from recycled sewage and this should be avoided. Each year the remnants of prescription drugs that cannot be removed from the water are cycling around and around and getting stronger over time.

Distilled water is very good but it is unbalanced and so you should at least put a pinch of Celtic salt into it, as while the additives and impurities are removed - on an energetic level the water is dead.

Reverse osmosis treatment has the same issue as distillation although the RO process is quieter and less expensive to run than distillation.

The 'Miracule' system is excellent but it is very expensive. In addition to cleansing the water it also provides powerful Homeopathic advantages.

An interesting test was carried out on Homeopathy in Cuba where two million people were given a Homeopathic treatment for a disease that is common in the rainy season. They proved beyond a doubt that Homeopathy works as hardly anybody who had been treated as a preventative got the disease.



Related: Transgenic Wars - How GMOs Impact Livestock And Human Health Around The Globe

Bad Food

The fast food industry and cat / dog food industry have known for decades that if they remove minerals from food, the body on a subconscious level says "that food was empty, I must have another one". The moment the minerals are back the cravings end.

The cheese used in fast food burgers has been formulated to such a degree that they have manipulated the Cacine so that it is as powerful from an addictive perspective as heroin.

Many people have left fast food out for months or years and it still looks the same. Bacteria and fungus won't attack it because it's not real food. It simply won't decompose.

The problem with modern grains and carbohydrates is not to do with gluten so much but the fact that the farmers are under so much pressure to produce the cheapest bread ingredients no matter what, that they are spraying Glyphosate (Roundup) onto the crops about a week before harvest. This kills the wheat and forces the remaining nutrients into the seeds - along with the toxic chemicals.

The modern grains are not healthy and are very addictive. It's not fat that makes you fat but carbs that make you fat.

Gluten is not really the problem. Our ancestors were not allergic to Gluten and so it is a new thing. It's not the Gluten but what is being done to the wheat. The Gluten free thing is just a con and they have probably used some nasty method to get rid of the Gluten - and so there is no guarantee that it is even going to help.

In bars they provide peanuts because they make you thirsty and so you drink more. In restaurants they give you bread because they know it will give you a raging hunger. There is nothing good in the bread and so your stomach tells you that you need more food.

Cut out the breads and the biscuits and the pies and the rice and pizza and the pasta for a while and see how your weight responds.



Related: GE Food Venture: Chronically Dependent On Deception


Cancer

The Nobel prize was won by Otto Warburg in 1931 for showing the cause of cancer. He showed that if you take a normal cell and deprive it of oxygen, it becomes cancerous. It changes from breathing oxygen (being aerobic) to utilising, metabolising glucose (which is anaerobic).

Of course, this is not taught in medical school. Neither do they teach the revelations about Magnesium or Iodine - because that wouldn't be good for business. Of course talking about reversing or curing cancer is illegal.

The average patient cost for Allelopathic (mainstream medicine) treatment is about $US300,000.

Everyone has cancerous cells in their body and cancer occurs in every person about 6 times in a lifetime. So in going to get tested for cancer, there is a pretty good chance they will find it. But would you have died from it? Many people will have had cancer a number of times and survived it without even knowing they had it.

Everything we have been told about cancer is wrong. Which is more clever? Your body that handles about 4,000 quadrillion actions each second, or a Doctor?

The Doctor tells you your body has gone wrong - "we know better than your body and we are going to override your body's natural systems" effectively.

When your body develops a cancer, is it a bad thing or is it protecting you from something worse?

The Doctors, in saying they are going to remove a lump is like taking your car to the garage and the mechanic saying "we have found the problem, it is a red light on the dashboard and we are going to remove the red warning light from the dashboard". Now the cancer is cured?

They are assuming that the body did not know what it was doing. You might have some very dangerous toxins in your body which could have come from vaccines, food, air etc. The body can't excrete them because they are modern chemicals and the body has no pathways to get rid of them. What's it going to do?

Well what would an Oyster do? If an Oyster has a grain of sand in it, so they say, it coats the grain of sand in a Pearl so that its not an irritant anymore.

What if the body locks up the toxins in a tumour and parks it away somewhere. If you carry on taking on more and more toxins, then that tumour is going to grow. If you get rid of the toxins that tumour will have a chance to shrink.

But the Doctors know better and they want to do a biopsy, which involves rupturing the tumour with a large needle. This is madness, because this action spreads the very toxins that the body was trying to encapsulate. So the Doctor says "we have to cut it out", and they give you poisonous drugs and irradiate you - everything will be fine.

The medical establishment have waged war on cancer - they have declared war on your body. This is NOT the way to heal any body - to cut it, burn it, poison it - declare war on it.

You need to nurture your body back to becoming well again, and this is why detoxification is so incredibly important. You have to assume that your body would not go wrong on you or let you down, it's doing the best it can in order to survive.

By putting the minerals, vitamins, essential fats and essential amino acids in (which are the sum total of what we need to have perfect nutrition and therefore perfect health) you can love cancer away.

There may be people that say, oh but cancer can be caused by a virus, or a fungus or a bacteria and these observations are also true. But to understand the nature of healthy you need to understand it from the cellular level.



Related: How Baking Soda Became A Cancer Treatment + Oncologists Don’t Like Baking Soda Cancer Treatment Because It’s Too Effective And Too Cheap

Candida

Candida is a fungus and a fungus survives by consuming dead things. Without Candida you would be dead, we need it as an integral part of our system. When the natural gut flora are damaged by toxins the Candida begin to take over and so balance needs to be restored.

If you have too much Candida it is happening for a reason. A Doctor will say "you have too much Candida, lets knock it out". But if you have a lot of Candid there must be a lot of dead stuff for it to eat, some inflammation is going on leading to cell death. Also, if you are eating too much sugar or too many carbohydrates, processed foods; the Candida is going to be having a field day and you are going to feel ill. There is a huge link between Candida and cancer.

A tell tale sign that you have too much Candida is if you have a white or yellow coating on your tounge.

There are many things that can cause Candida overgrowth - but they all mean you are toxic. It can be as simple as a mercury filling. With mercury present, Candida levels can be 6 times normal and so it can be a sign of heavy metal poisoning.

Candida overgrowth can also be caused by the body being low on minerals and vitamins and so your body's detox pathways can't function properly. It can also be caused by a lack of exercise and sweating which is another way the body gets toxins out. A lot of people are being poisoned because they are not getting enough exercise and their lymph system is not moving.



Related: Everything You Need To Know About Candida Overgrowth

Health Restoration Packages

The reason Clive started a supplement company is that he had investigated the raw materials that most vitamin companies were using and found that about 98% of these companies were using the cheapest ingredients, as opposed to the best ingredients. The products that Clive sells are of the highest quality, which also makes his job easier as people don't come back and complain.

Clive has formularised all of these supplements and in addition to many individual products, has two packages available via his website www.ancientpurity.com. They are the 'Health In A Month Pack' and 'The Essentials Pack'.

Everyone who takes either of these packages will notice a difference in one month, more energy, clearer thinking, no colds or flu. Once you remember what it is like to feel properly healthy again, you will be hooked!

With these combinations you are giving your body everything it needs to self-repair again. 'The Essentials Pack' is more expensive as it contains more products.



Related: Why Nutritional Psychiatry Is The Future Of Mental Health Treatment + Depression Is A Symptom Of Nutrient Deficiency; Treating It With Drugs Is Not Only Ineffective But Dangerous

About Ancient Purity

Ancient Purity was founded in England in 2010 following years of working in health and well-being. Our products are supplied worldwide. Born out of their passion for natural health and wellbeing, we have researched and sourced the highest quality organic Superfoods,

Supplements & Cutting Edge Health Products from around the world that will enable you to optimise your development and regain your health. Ancient Purity products are sourced from the highest quality and most reliable producers in the world today.

Purposely avoiding products that are deficient in active ingredients or containing GMO’s like so many supplements available on the market. We present natural, real health in superfood and super-nutrient form along with health technology that encourages the body's healing capacity. It's your body that does the healing, supplements and devices simply provide the correct fuel the body requires to make this possible.

We spend much of our time investigating the latest health discoveries as well as searching for the lost health secrets of the past. Our goal is to educate and guide you to understand how to return to health or how to optimise it naturally and effectively.

We aim to promote the use of natural health across the world as the first step to promoting health and recovering from a lack of it. We pride ourselves on our reputation of providing a personal, friendly service and exceptional health products.
We hope you will join us in choosing to live a healthy, abundant, happy life and put your health first.

See: www.ancientpurity.com


Related Articles:

This Is How Your ‘Aura’ Affects Your Health & Those Around You + Magnetic Fields Of The Human Body And Their Functions & 13 Signs You Are Experiencing A Spiritual Awakening

Willful Ignorance: Why We Stay Oblivious To Facts That Threaten Our Health And The Planet

Nature’s Prozac: Nutrition For Mental Health


Why Anti-Authoritarians Are Diagnosed As Mentally Ill


Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi

Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi
The Dumbing Down Of Mainstream Media & The Agendas Driving It
July 24 2023 | From: Jack / Various

The mainstream media is deliberately broken news. I watched TV3 6 o’clock News last night and the second item on it was “a grass fire on about 2 acres in Canterbury! This is the second leading news feature they can come up with on “Prime Time” national news! The whole news on both radio, TV and newspapers had now been deliberately reduced down to “trivialities” like this, while the true, more important events taking place around the world are by and large totally censored by these lying mongrels.



The reason for is that the bankers that now own the world’s media companies, and the higher executives in these multinationals that control the media, and therefore set the policies of the presenters and programs, have a vested financial and political interest in keeping the masses continuously dumbed down and mind-controlled like this so that ordinary people don’t ever wake up and truly understand how the world is being taken over by this handful of corrupt oligarchical misfits at the top in the City of London Corporation.

Related: Mainstream Media Insults The Public's Intelligence On Vaccines & Vaccinated Vs. Unvaccinated Pilot Study: Early Vaccination Sees Exponential Increase In Chronic Disorders + Lies, Vaccines And The New Zealand Media

For nearly a thousand years the filthy white monkey in the Vatican and his un-Holy See and band of deviants, cardinal thieves and black Jesuits ingeniously controlled most of the world’s tangible riches and land, censored the Bible from ordinary people, enforced a list of Forbidden Books, to keep the working classes and peasants totally ignorant and subservient under their wicked control, torturing and burning everyone at the stake who disagreed with them or wouldn’t comply.

But Henry 8th changed all that in the early 16th century when he broke with Rome, which has now grown into a particularly nasty Fascist gang of apostate Protestants, headed by the Queen [now King] and the “King’s Jews” bankers in the city of London Corporation taking over the assets and wealth world, repeating the same sins as the Vatican, but on a much greater scale and with much ingenuity and cunning, using the United Nations as the vehicle to usurp and wrest political control from nation states.

British control of the media (and global intelligence agencies that are allied to it) goes back hundreds of years, but really accelerated from the beginning of WW1.

Unfortunately, though, they are having teething problems getting the Russian bear to jump into line, and may I say, “good job,” and great to see someone’s got the guts to put their foot down!



Related: Mainstream Media Manipulation / Controlling The Narrative + Mosaic Of Facts: Inside The Information War [Ukraine]

The employees in these organisations already know they would lose their jobs if they publish anything that they know is out of line.

You will note, Newstalk ZB and Radio Live, the two prime talkback shows in New Zealand, have degenerated into talkback formats now where they pre-advise the subject they want callers to talk about which is always trivialities, and limit the timespan of all calls so anyone who really does have something serious or important to say is suppressed by time restraints.

Most people have difficulty in understanding that Queen Elizabeth II is in actual fact a modern NAZI, no different than Hitler and his FASCIST Third Reich. Google: “Gold State Coach – photos” and you will see that on the rear of the coach are two statues of the sons of Neptune, carrying the old Roman FASCES (a bundle of rods bound with the helve of an axe) which was the symbol of the Emperor’s dictatorial power to decapitate and rule in ancient Fascist Rome.

The Nazi Fascist Third Reich based its form of National Socialism on the FASCES and so to now the United States of America, where the two fasces on the Queen’s Gold State Coach have been replicated and mounted on the rear wall behind the Speaker’s Rostrum in the US House of Representatives in the US Capitol!

This specially includes university professors, doctors and the very wealthy or leading businessmen, who most of the time know very little other than what they have been indoctrinated with through convention.



Related: After Decades Of Brainwashing, MSM & Governments Are Losing Control Of The People

And the truth is, if the world keeps on its current, conventional course , without some major new ideas or change in navigation in the near future – we are all doomed!


So one must conclude, that any profound change will only come in the future from the non-conformists. Not the university-educated mainstream or orthodox view. All those people out there who would be protesters, or those who have alternate views other than the mainstream, even if we don’t necessarily all agree with them.

They are the ones who will save us. But certainly not the unethical band of sewer rats we currently have running the show now!

If you write to politicians or the media, don’t threaten them or defame them. But do use the truth, be forceful, with strong language and send copies of your letter personally to a few of them, so they can’t individually screw it up so no body else knows they are in fact deliberately prostituting themselves to mammon.

Many years ago, when I was secretary of a national childcare organisation involved with submissions on new childcare regulations in NZ - we were sending letters to the appropriate Government Minister without any success, other than “thank you for your letter” or a short letter not even addressing the issue raised.

Later we found out that the minister was so incompetent and unethical, the letters were all read by his secretary who more often than not simply screwed them up and threw them into the wastepaper basket, or replied to them himself.



Related: Brave New World And Individual Power & How The Elite Dominate The World: They Buy Politicians, And Incumbents Almost Always Win

But after we discovered this, I thought well, let’s send our letters to the Minister as we always had done, but also to the Prime Minister, Deputy Prime Minister and all leaders of the Opposition. My, my, what a DRAMATIC change in response from these parasites!

I received a personal telephone call immediately from the Minister, inviting me to fly to Wellington, all expenses paid, with other executives to quietly discuss the matters personally with him. I could write a book about how inept and unethical most politicians really are.

I remember a leading bureaucrat once told me;


'“We run the show, not these common pick-pockets and political bed-bugs who often jump from one party to the other, who are usually only in power for a short time and preoccupied with the next election, while we are not.

Ask a politician a question and you will get a politician’s answer, and invariably it will be a lie aimed at helping them win the next election.”

Mind you, we shouldn’t be surprised. This charade has been going on for hundreds of years! Sad, I know, but there you are!


Related Articles:

The US “media” continues to prove that it is the Establishment’s whore

CBS Reporter Calls Mainstream Press ‘Political Activists,’ ‘Propagandists’ + Max Blumental Proves Western Media A Propagandist For War Criminals

The Mainstream Media Lies

Hidden Truths About The Mainstream News Media

Fraudcast News: You Will Believe What the Media Tells You To

Mind Control Theories And Techniques Used By Mass Media

How To Stop The Media From Controlling Your Mind + Why The ‘Red Pill’ Has Become So Big



Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi

Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi
Sixteen Signs That You’re A Slave To The Cabal Control Matrix
July 23 2023 | From: TheMindUnleashed / Various

Today’s world is a strange place. We are inundated with signals from early on in life, encouraging each of us to walk a particular path, establishing blinders on us along the way to discourage us from looking for alternatives to what the herd is doing or thinking.



Life is so complex that overtime, if we are paying attention, we realize that there are an infinite number of possibilities to what the human experience could be, and we come see that the world is on fire because individuals all too infrequently question why things are the way they are, failing to notice that their mindset or behavior needs adjustment in favor of more intelligent, common sensical, or sustainable patterns of existence.

Related: The Matrix Program Is Crashing

Not meant to be overtly critical of anyone’s lifestyle choices or personal situation, the following 16 signs that you’re a slave to the matrix are meant purely as an observational approach to helping you identify the areas of your life where you may be missing an opportunity to liberate yourself from someone else’s self-destructive design for your life.

Read on, and please take a moment to comment below with anything you’d like to add to the list or object to.

1. You pay taxes to people you’d like to see locked up in jail

This is perhaps the biggest indicator that we are slaves to the matrix. The traditional notion of slavery conjures up images of people in shackles forced to work on plantations to support rich plantation owners.

The modern day version of this is forced taxation, where our incomes are automatically docked before we ever see the money, regardless of whether or not we approve of how the money is spent.

2. You go to the doctor, but you’re still sick

Modern medical care, for all of it’s scientific progress, has sadly become sick care, where we are rarely advised to eat well and tend to our mental and physical health, but instead are routinely advised to consume expensive medications and procedures that are pushed by the for-profit healthcare matrix.

3. You’ve picked Team Democrat or Team Republican [Red party / Blue party - see any Western country for that relentless sham-gag] and argue with your friends, family and co-workers about politics

This is what the control strategy of divide and conquer looks like in our society. Both of the major parties are corrupt through and through, and independent candidates are not even allowed to participate in public debates.

By believing in one of these parties and burning your personal energy on arguing with other ordinary people you are turning over your soul the matrix, and doing your share in making sure that ‘we the people’ will never be united against corruption.



Related: Resetting Politics And The Media

4. You work hard doing something you hate to earn fiat dollars 

Work is important and money does pay the bills, however, so many people lose the best years of their lives doing things they hate, just for money. The truth about money today is that we do not have money, but instead, inflationary fiat currency that is privately owned and manipulated.

Since it is still necessary to get by in this world, it is best that you get more value for your time by doing something you enjoy or by working with people you do not despise. It is easier than you may think to live on less money than we believe we need, we just have to be willing to go against the grain realize this.

5. You’re willing to accrue personal debt to fund the acquisition of a consumer oriented lifestyle

Each time a credit card is swiped it creates digits on the balance sheets of the banks that are most involved with the financial looting of the world today. These digits are then multiplied electronically by the fractional reserve system, which exponentially increases the power of these institutions.


To participate in this, and by agreeing to pay this fake money back with interest, in order to maintain a certain lifestyle, is a strong indication that you are bound by one of the main tenets of the matrix – consumerism.

6. You converse with real people about the ongoing happenings of TV shows

TV is the most potent tool used for mind control, and the ‘programming’ that is available, while certainly cool, fun, or entertaining is geared to reinforce certain behaviors amongst the masses.

Dramatizing the ego’s importance, over sexualizing everything, glorifying violence, and teaching submissiveness to phony authority are the main features of modern TV.

By taking what is happening onscreen and making it a part of your real life, you are doing your job of supporting the matrix’s desire to confuse us about the nature of reality, proving that something doesn’t have to actually happen in order for it to feel real to people.



Related: Society Is Made Of Narrative – Realizing This Is Awakening From The Matrix

7. You don’t have anything to hide from total surveillance

If it does not bother you that someone, somewhere, working for somebody is watching you, listening to your conversations, and monitoring your movements, then, you are a good slave to the matrix.

Invisible surveillance is an insidious form of thought control, and by using the logic of, ‘I have nothing to hide, therefore, it will do me no harm to be surveilled,’ then you are mindlessly admitting that you have an earthly master and are not of sovereign mind and body.

8. You think the world would be safer if only governments had guns

This is a violent world, and criminals engage in criminality against honest people at every level of society, including from within the government.

Sure, in a perfect world, weapons wouldn’t be necessary for anyone but, sadly, our world is anything but perfect, and firearms are indeed a very effective form of protection against common criminals and abusive governments alike.

The willingness to forego your right to self-defense is a sign that you’ve relegated personal responsibility to someone else. Having the masses abdicate personal responsibility is one of the most important aspects of controlling them. Welcome to the matrix.

9. You knowingly drink fluoridated water

Of all the health debates taking place today, the topic of fluoridated water is the easiest to understand, for it is a toxic by-product of an industrial process… poison.

Water is supposedly fluoridated to aid in dental health, which is debatable in itself, but if this were so, then the involuntary fluoridation of public water is a medication without your consent… a form of slavery.

Knowing this and continuing to drink fluoridated water is a sign that you’re content with your slavery to the matrix.



Related: The Dark History Behind Fluoride (That The Media Refuses To Report)

10. You knowingly consume toxic poisons like MSG and Aspartame

These two chemicals are widely known to be toxic to the human body. Knowing this and continuing to poison yourself with tasty, but chemical-laden processed foods is a sign that the matrix has programmed you to place less value on your health and future than on your immediate gratification.

11. You depend on the pharmaceutical industrial complex for the management of your own mental health

The use of psychotropic medicines is rising rapidly in our society because people have been convinced that mental and emotional states can be classified as diseases, while the truth about natural mental health has been obfuscated by corporate media and a for-profit medical establishment.

If you’re taking psychotropic medications, then you are under one of the most potent forms of mind control available. Part of this control is to convince you that you have no authority over your own mind.

This is perhaps the matrix’s most terrible lie, and by willingly taking these psychotropic medications you are conforming to the worst kind of slavery, and inhibiting your natural mental and emotional responses to the life stressors that are signaling to you that you need to change your behavior and habits.

12. You haven’t yet stopped watching your local and national news programming

The mainstream news media is a tool of control and manipulation, and by continuing to support their ideas and world views by giving them your attention you are volunteering to be a slave to this not-so-subtle form of mental programming.

Even the local news is scripted at the national level by agents of the handful of corporations tasked with shaping our opinions of events.



Related: Escaping The Matrix: 10 Ways To Deprogram Yourself

13. You’re more concerned with televised sports or other mindless distractions than you are with the quality of your natural environment

The Deepwater Horizon, Alberta Tar Sands, the rise of Fracking, the sacrifice of the Amazon, and Fukushima are all life-changing events that will severely impact our future on planet earth.

To be unconcerned with all of this while tuning into a never-ending stream of sports trivia and distraction-based living is a sign that your sense of self-preservation has been stolen and replaced with an impulsive tendency for triviality and escapism.

14. You’re skeptical of any area of life that hasn’t been ‘proven’ or validated by modern science

The very essence of science is the inquiry into the unknown, implying that until science can grasp something, it is unexplainable.

By discrediting or ridiculing experiences that other people have, which yet evade scientific understanding, like near-death experiences, acupuncture, or the life changing effects of Ayahuasca, then you are slavishly reducing your understanding of the world to a narrow range of possibilities.

The matrix is made possible by the efforts of volunteer gatekeepers who are unwilling to think outside of the box.

15. You’ve never questioned the popularized version of ancient history and the origins of our civilization

There are many unanswered questions about the origins of the human race that point to a different version of human history than what is taught in school.

Read 20 history questions they refuse to answer in school to discover some of the many ways in which our history has been hijacked.

By never questioning what we’ve been told about our origin we are acquiescing to many of the imposed belief systems and narrow-banded views of human potential that the matrix promotes.



Related: Cycles Of History Ignored - Canceling History

16. You haven’t yet realized that you are a spiritual being living a human experience

If you can relate to any of the items on this list, then the matrix has you, and it is now your duty to engage more deeply in your liberation.


Related Articles:

Nineteen Ways To Question Your Reality

Ley Lines - The Key To Understanding The Matrix

FBI Document Adds “Fringe” Conspiracy Theories As Next Big Domestic Terror Threat & CIA, Climate And Conspiracy: More Notes From The Edge Of The Narrative Matrix


Research Shocks Scientists: Human Emotion Physically Shapes Reality

New Mind-Blowing Experiment Confirms That Reality Doesn’t Exist If You Are Not Looking At It

The US Federal Government Replaces Twitter As Our Ministry Of Truth & Reality vs. Illusion: People Have Been Robbed Of Their Ability To “Decipher Between Fact And Fiction”

Why Millions Of Kids Don’t See Any Purpose In Going To School Anymore & Matrix Revealed: Why Logic Disappeared

Official Science: The Grand Illusion



Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi

Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi
How The CIA Made Google
July 22 2023 | From: Medium / Various

Insurge Intelligence, a crowd-funded investigative journalism project, breaks the exclusive story of how the United States intelligence community funded, nurtured and incubated Google as part of a drive to dominate the world through control of information.



Seed-funded by the NSA and CIA, Google was merely the first among a plethora of private sector start-ups co-opted by US intelligence to retain ‘information superiority.’


Related:
Boycott Facebook, Twitter, And Google. Here’s Why

The origins of this ingenious strategy trace back to a secret Pentagon-sponsored group, that for the last two decades has functioned as a bridge between the US government and elites across the business, industry, finance, corporate, and media sectors.

The group has allowed some of the most powerful special interests in corporate America to systematically circumvent democratic accountability and the rule of law to influence government policies, as well as public opinion in the US and around the world.

The results have been catastrophic: NSA mass surveillance, a permanent state of global war, and a new initiative to transform the US military into Skynet.

In the wake of the Charlie Hebdo attacks in Paris, western governments are moving fast to legitimize expanded powers of mass surveillance and controls on the internet, all in the name of fighting terrorism.US and European politicians have called to protect NSA-style snooping, and to advance the capacity to intrude on internet privacy by outlawing encryption.



Related: Will Google’s Social Credit System Determine Your Future?

One idea is to establish a telecoms partnership that would unilaterally delete content deemed to “fuel hatred and violence” in situations considered “appropriate.” Heated discussions are going on at government and parliamentary level to explore cracking down on lawyer-client confidentiality.

What any of this would have done to prevent the Charlie Hebdo attacks remains a mystery, especially given that we already know the terrorists were on the radar of French intelligence for up to a decade.

There is little new in this story. The 9/11 atrocity was the first of many terrorist attacks, each succeeded by the dramatic extension of draconian state powers at the expense of civil liberties, backed up with the projection of military force in regions identified as hotspots harbouring terrorists.

Yet there is little indication that this tried and tested formula has done anything to reduce the danger. If anything, we appear to be locked into a deepening cycle of violence with no clear end in sight.

As our governments push to increase their powers, Insurge Intelligence can now reveal the vast extent to which the US intelligence community is implicated in nurturing the web platforms we know today, for the precise purpose of utilizing the technology as a mechanism to fight global ‘information war’ - a war to legitimize the power of the few over the rest of us.




Related: The Surveillance State: How To Disappear & It’s Why Big Tech Is Watching You: How You Spend Your Money Reveals Parts Of Your Personality, And Vice Versa

The lynchpin of this story is the corporation that in many ways defines the 21st century with its unobtrusive omnipresence: Google.

Google styles itself as a friendly, funky, user-friendly tech firm that rose to prominence through a combination of skill, luck, and genuine innovation. This is true. But it is a mere fragment of the story.

In reality, Google is a smokescreen behind which lurks the US military-industrial complex.

The inside story of Google’s rise, revealed here for the first time, opens a can of worms that goes far beyond Google, unexpectedly shining a light on the existence of a parasitical network driving the evolution of the US national security apparatus, and profiting obscenely from its operation.


The Shadow Network

For the last two decades, US foreign and intelligence strategies have resulted in a global ‘war on terror’ consisting of prolonged military invasions in the Muslim world and comprehensive surveillance of civilian populations. These strategies have been incubated, if not dictated, by a secret network inside and beyond the Pentagon.



Related: American Pravda: How The CIA Invented "Conspiracy Theories"

Established under the Clinton administration, consolidated under Bush, and firmly entrenched under Obama, this bipartisan network of mostly neoconservative ideologues sealed its dominion inside the US Department of Defense (DoD) by the dawn of 2015, through the operation of an obscure corporate entity outside the Pentagon, but run by the Pentagon.

In 1999, the CIA created its own venture capital investment firm, In-Q-Tel, to fund promising start-ups that might create technologies useful for intelligence agencies. But the inspiration for In-Q-Tel came earlier, when the Pentagon set up its own private sector outfit.


Known as the ‘Highlands Forum,’ this private network has operated as a bridge between the Pentagon and powerful American elites outside the military since the mid-1990s. Despite changes in civilian administrations, the network around the Highlands Forum has become increasingly successful in dominating US defense policy.

Giant defense contractors like Booz Allen Hamilton and Science Applications International Corporation are sometimes referred to as the ‘shadow intelligence community’ due to the revolving doors between them and government, and their capacity to simultaneously influence and profit from defense policy.

But while these contractors compete for power and money, they also collaborate where it counts. The Highlands Forum has for 20 years provided an off the record space for some of the most prominent members of the shadow intelligence community to convene with senior US government officials, alongside other leaders in relevant industries.



Related: Fourteen Eyebrow-Raising Things Google Knows About You

I first stumbled upon the existence of this network in November 2014, when I reported for VICE’s Motherboard that US defense secretary Chuck Hagel’s newly announced ‘Defense Innovation Initiative’ was really about building Skynet  -  or something like it, essentially to dominate an emerging era of automated robotic warfare.

That story was based on a little-known Pentagon-funded ‘white paper’ published two months earlier by the National Defense University (NDU) in Washington DC, a leading US military-run institution that, among other things, generates research to develop US defense policy at the highest levels.

The white paper clarified the thinking behind the new initiative, and the revolutionary scientific and technological developments it hoped to capitalize on.


The Highlands Forum

The co-author of that NDU white paper is Linton Wells, a 51-year veteran US defense official who served in the Bush administration as the Pentagon’s chief information officer, overseeing the National Security Agency (NSA) and other spy agencies.

He still holds active top-secret security clearances, and according to a report by Government Executive magazine in 2006 he chaired the ‘Highlands Forum’, founded by the Pentagon in 1994.



Related: Google's Digital Book Burn: Alternative Medicine Content Now Vanishingly Rare, Despite One Billion Health Searches A Day

New Scientist magazine (paywall) has compared the Highlands Forum to elite meetings like “Davos, Ditchley and Aspen,” describing it as “far less well known, yet… arguably just as influential a talking shop.”

Regular Forum meetings bring together “innovative people to consider interactions between policy and technology. Its biggest successes have been in the development of high-tech network-based warfare.”




Linton Wells II (right) former Pentagon chief information officer and assistant secretary of defense for networks, at a recent Pentagon Highlands Forum session. Rosemary Wenchel, a senior official in the US Department of Homeland Security, is sitting next to him

Related: Here’s What The Big Tech Companies Know About You & Sundar Pichai Lies To Congress About Google Tracking Location Of Users

Given Wells’ role in such a Forum, perhaps it was not surprising that his defense transformation white paper was able to have such a profound impact on actual Pentagon policy. But if that was the case, why had no one noticed?

Despite being sponsored by the Pentagon, I could find no official page on the DoD website about the Forum. Active and former US military and intelligence sources had never heard of it, and neither did national security journalists. I was baffled.


The Pentagon’s Intellectual Capital Venture Firm

In the prologue to his 2007 book, A Crowd of One: The Future of Individual Identity, John Clippinger, an MIT scientist of the Media Lab Human Dynamics Group, described how he participated in a “Highlands Forum” gathering, an “invitation-only meeting funded by the Department of Defense and chaired by the assistant for networks and information integration.”


This was a senior DoD post overseeing operations and policies for the Pentagon’s most powerful spy agencies including the NSA, the Defense Intelligence Agency (DIA), among others. Starting from 2003, the position was transitioned into what is now the undersecretary of defense for intelligence.



Related: Is Social Media The New Tobacco?

The Highlands Forum, Clippinger wrote, was founded by a retired US Navy captain named Dick O’Neill. Delegates include senior US military officials across numerous agencies and divisions  -  “captains, rear admirals, generals, colonels, majors and commanders” as well as “members of the DoD leadership.”

What at first appeared to be the Forum’s main website described Highlands as “an informal cross-disciplinary network sponsored by Federal Government,” focusing on “information, science and technology.” Explanation is sparse, beyond a single ‘Department of Defense’ logo.

But Highlands also had another website describing itself as an “intellectual capital venture firm” with “extensive experience assisting corporations, organizations, and government leaders.”

The firm provided a “wide range of services, including: strategic planning, scenario creation and gaming for expanding global markets,” as well as “working with clients to build strategies for execution.” ‘The Highlands Group Inc.,’ the website says, organizes a whole range of Forums on these issue.

For instance, in addition to the Highlands Forum, since 9/11 the Group runs the ‘Island Forum,’ an international event held in association with Singapore’s Ministry of Defense, which O’Neill oversees as “lead consultant.” The Singapore Ministry of Defense website describes the Island Forum as “patterned after the Highlands Forum organized for the US Department of Defense.”



Related: Harvard Professor Exposes Google And Facebook & NZ Police Trialled Facial Recognition Tech Without Clearance

Documents leaked by NSA whistleblower Edward Snowden confirmed that Singapore played a key role in permitting the US and Australia to tap undersea cables to spy on Asian powers like Indonesia and Malaysia.

The Highlands Group website also revealed that Highlands is partnered with one of the most powerful defense contractors in the United States. Highlands is “supported by a network of companies and independent researchers,” including “our Highlands Forum partners for the past ten years at SAIC; and the vast Highlands network of participants in the Highlands Forum.”

SAIC stands for the US defense firm, Science Applications International Corporation, which changed its name to Leidos in 2013, operating SAIC as a subsidiary. SAIC/Leidos is among the top 10 largest defense contractors in the US, and works closely with the US intelligence community, especially the NSA.

According to investigative journalist Tim Shorrock, the first to disclose the vast extent of the privatization of US intelligence with his seminal book Spies for Hire, SAIC has a “symbiotic relationship with the NSA: the agency is the company’s largest single customer and SAIC is the NSA’s largest contractor.”

Reat the full story at: Medium


Related Articles:


August 21 2019 - Google Operating Like A News Publisher, Project Veritas Leaks Reveal & Mother Of All Google Whistleblowers Exposes Global Criminal Plan To Control All Information

It’s Not That We’ve Failed To Rein In Facebook And Google. We’ve Not Even Tried

Trump Delivers The Google-Facebook Reckoning That Obama Refused & Google Suspends “Trending” Emails In New Zealand After Government Complaints

CIA Records: Epidemic Fabrication And Assassinations - They Wanted To Kill, Using Chemical And Biological Substances

Former High Ranking CIA Agent Gives A Break Down On What The US Deep State And Shadow Government Is Comprised Of


Bilderberg On Steroids - Meet The Secret CIA-Funded Group Behind The ‘War On Terror’


Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi

Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi
How The Dairy Industry Tricked Humans Into Believing They Need Milk
July 21 2023 | From: TrueActivist / Various

Despite the fact that one can get their daily recommendation of calcium, potassium, and protein from fruits and vegetables, the dairy industry has spent billions of dollars to convince consumers otherwise.




Got Milk? We sure hope not. Despite being a somewhat tasty addition to coffee, tea, and delectable treats, the ingredient – when pasteurized – is highly toxic to the human body.

Related: Milk Wars Battle On: Farmer’s Raw Milk Versus Big Dairy's Pasteurized

In fact, physicians such as Dr. Willet, who has conducted many studies and reviewed the research on the topic, believe milk to be more of a detriment to the human body than an aid.

This is because despite popular belief, the food has never been shown to reduce fracture risk. In fact, according to the Nurses’ Health Study, dairy may increase risk of fractures by 50%!

This concerning finding is supported by the fact that countries with lowest rates of dairy and calcium consumption (like those in Africa and Asia) have the lowest rates of osteoporosis.



Related: Top 10 Food And Medicine Myths You Probably Fell For At Some Point + How The Mind Treats “Impossible Things That Couldn’t Be Happening”


Considering that approximately 3/4 of the world’s population is unable to digest milk and other dairy products, it seems clear the food is not an ideal substance for consumption.

However, the average consumer doesn’t know this.

From celebrity endorsements to advertisements by the dairy industry, most have been taught to believe that dairy is an ideal food for optimum health.

Because there’s so much misinformation surrounding the subject, Vox recently created a video which illustrates the facade of the dairy industry.

One of the points made is that despite the fact that consumers can get the daily recommendation of calcium, potassium, and protein from [properly organic] fruits and vegetables, the dairy industry has spent billions of dollars to convince the populace otherwise.

If you were taught that one must drink milk to grow up “big and strong,” you’re not alone. However, now is the time to get educated on the facts.



Related: 10 Reasons To Drink Your Milk Raw

Because milk is very mucus-forming in the human body, it is believed to contribute to allergies, ear infections, Type 1 diabetes, anemia, and even constipation. In addition, the food may contribute to various types of cancers as consumption of the product increases the body’s level of insulin-like growth factor-1 (IGF-1).

The good news is that there are plenty of tasty, creamy dairy alternatives that are not only easy-to-make, they’re affordable.

‘Milks’ from rice, almonds, cashew, hemp, and even coconut can be found in most grocery stores, and some companies even sell dairy-free ice cream – such as Ben & Jerry’s!

In fact, the non-dairy milk market has surged within the past few years. Almond milk sales, in particular, have increased by 250 percent from 2000-2015 to almost $895 million. [Avoid Soy milk as it is not good for you and often GMO].

Is it time to ditch dairy?






Related Articles:

1899 Merck Manual Shows Natural And Food - Based Medicine Once Reigned Supreme + The Healing Web

An Invisible Form Of Oppression: Our Food System

"Shrinkflation" - How Food Companies Implement Massive Price Hikes Without You Ever Noticing

‘Cultural Schizophrenia’: Media Shift To Feelings Over Facts Tearing US [West] Apart & You Are Being Bombarded By Fake News, Fake News “Filters,” Fake People, Fake Food, And Fake Medicine

Fluoride Officially Classified As A Neurotoxin In World’s Top Medical Journals & Perfluorinated Chemicals (PFCs) Found In Nearly Half Of All Fast Food Wrappers From McDonald’s, Burger King, Starbucks And other Food Retailers



Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi

Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi
The Medical Cartel Is King In A Globalist World
July 20 2023 | From: JonRappoport / Various

“Elites who invent reality need an unimpeachable operation, headed up by people who are relentlessly promoted as the sanest, most intelligent, competent, and caring representatives of the human race. Guess who that would be?” (The Magician Awakes, Jon Rappoport)



In 1976, the great critic of 20th-century society, Ivan Illich, wrote: “Modern medicine is a negation of health. It isn’t organized to serve human health, but only itself, an institution. It makes more people sick than it heals.”

Related:
The Hypnotic Symbols Of Modern Medicine

The medical cartel is the answer to the question: What do you with the population of Earth once they are living under a globalist oligarchy?

It’s all about managing lives, from womb to grave, and no institution serves that management better than Medicine.

First of all, you have a system that dispenses toxic drugs in an endless stream, killing in the US alone, by conservative estimate, 100,000 people per year. On top of that, medical drugs cause anywhere from two to four millions severe adverse effects annually.

Beyond this straight-out destruction, there is the turmoil, suffering, grieving, and confusion that extends in ripples, from each one of the deaths and injuries, to families, friends, and co-workers. The overall effect?

Demoralization and the inability to see and think past the emotional pain - which is exactly what you want if you are a psychopath running a planet.



Related: Why Medically Caused Deaths Continue To Be Ignored

The medical cartel (drug companies, public health agencies, medical schools, doctors) wants to assure cradle-to-grave treatment of every person. This means 30 or 40 diagnoses of illnesses and mental disorders during a lifetime, and treatment with toxic drugs.

It also means medical issues are at the forefront of every person’s mind as he/she wends through life, believing that Disease is the most important aspect of living.

People become proud, yes, proud of their diagnoses and treatment. They wear the diagnoses like badges of honor, and every social communication is an occasion for displaying badges and discussing treatments and comparing notes.


"You know, at first my doctor thought it was ADHD, but then he did one of those new brain scans, and realized it was Bipolar with a trace of genetically inherited Oppositional Defiance Disorder. Once he had the ODD under control with a major tranquilizer, he could go after the Bipolar. But then I developed tremors. So he implanted a chip…”

It’s not only a sick society, it’s a society about sickness.

Medical care is free, if by free one means: paid for by extraordinary levels of taxation.



Related: Three Questions You’re Not Supposed To Ask About Life In A Sick Society

The basic collectivist slogan, “We’re all in this together,” achieves its most fervent support from the axiom that Disease is our primary opportunity to help each other by accepting awesome tax burdens.

Of course, huge segments of the world population won’t be able to participate in modern, up-to-date, cutting-edge “care.” For them, there are several solutions. The first is vaccines seeded with chemicals and genes that reduce fertility and potency.

As birth rates gradually decline, cover stories are invented to explain the phenomenon: stress; rising employment rates; the social effects of urbanization; the dissolution of the nuclear family.

The second solution is epidemics that purportedly kill off large numbers of people.

These epidemics are routine frauds, based on concocted science. In the poverty-stricken Third World, announced epidemics are nothing more than cover stories; people aren’t dying because of germs; they’re dying because their water is contaminated, because of overcrowding, lack of basic sanitation, generation-to-generation starvation.



Related: Cover Stories Are Used To Control Explanations & Medical Propaganda Headlines For Gullible Minds

They’re dying because their fertile growing lands have been stolen. While medical experts crow about attacking the germ of the moment with (toxic) drugs and vaccines, these actual causes of death can be ignored and even enhanced.

Meanwhile, in industrialized technological sectors of the planet, psychiatry ascends to new heights of control over the educated classes. Although no so-called mental disorder has ever been diagnosed by a real laboratory test, the experts who dominate the field continue to invent new disorders at the drop of a hat.

Psychiatric patients believe they have brain conditions that must be treated with (highly toxic) drugs. The patients also believe their own aspirations are limited by their disorders, and so they acquiesce to a psychiatric model that circumscribes their lives.

At the top-end of society, new medical inventions are applied to the wealthy. Genetic enhancement is the most highly touted of these.



Related: The Corruption Of Evidence Based Medicine - Killing For Profit

Despite the fact that, as yet, there are no genetic treatments for any disease that work across the board, experiments will be done to extend life, to seed the unborn with special talents, to cure a wide variety of illnesses.

There will be efforts to substitute technological components for biological nature. Limbs, organs, whole body systems, brains.

The workability of high-tech pieces is not really the issue. The aim is simply to involve the rich in the entire grand experiment, thereby swallowing them up as well in a medical paradigm of existence.

At the front door of medical cartel operations, a person will be enrolled in the system while in utero, and a path will be laid out that extends all the way to the grave.

Once he is on record with a medical ID package, he will be tracked and treated and tweaked without let-up.


Related Articles:


The Transhumanist Agenda And The [Attempted] Future Of Humanity

Why Mandatory Vaccination Is Unethical And Immoral + California Medical Doctor Explains How Doctors Receive No Medical Training on Vaccines – Indoctrination On Belief In Vaccines & First-Ever Peer-Reviewed Study Of Vaccinated Vs Unvaccinated Children Shows Vaccinated Kids Have A Higher Rate Of Sickness, 470% Increase In Autism

Here’s How Industry-Funded “Research” Is Making Us Sick And Fat + Like Tobacco And Big Pharma, The Sugar Industry Has Manipulated Research For 50 Years

The Violence-Inducing Effects Of Psychiatric Medication & The Psychiatric Agenda Destroys Creative Children

1899 Merck Manual Shows Natural And Food - Based Medicine Once Reigned Supreme + The Healing Web

‘Cultural Schizophrenia’: Media Shift To Feelings Over Facts Tearing US [West] Apart & You Are Being Bombarded By Fake News, Fake News “Filters,” Fake People, Fake Food, And Fake Medicine

Is Psychiatry Bullshit? + Fourteen Lies That Our Psychiatry Professors Taught Us In Medical School


Quick Review Of Fake Medical Diagnostic Tests + Author Exposes The “Vaccine Deep State”- A Massive Criminal Fraud And Embezzlement Ring Inside The CDC


Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi

Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi
Scientific Study: 'Conspiracy Theorists' Are The Sanest Of All
July 19 2023 | From: HumansAreFree / Various

I was so happy to finally see a study done on the psychology of conspiracy beliefs. It goes through the importance of belief systems in the acceptance or rejection of ‘conspiracy theories.’



If you consider yourself awakened and seeking the truth – especially in government matters, people are quick to label you a crazy conspiracy theorist just so they can validate themselves.

Related: The Conspiracy To Rule The World - An Interactive History

In this study, a large group of commenters were examined on a news website, surrounding the topic of 9/11. Out of the 2,174 comments collected, 1,459 were coded as conspiracist and 715 as conventionalist. Right away its evident more people are thinking critically about ‘conspiracies’ rather than just disputing them.

What they found was that conspiracist commenters were more likely to argue against the opposing interpretation and less likely to argue in favor of their own interpretation, while the opposite was true of conventionalist commenters.

In other words, the anti-conspiracy commenters we’re pushing on their own interpretations of the situation rather than focusing on what really happened.

The conspiracists were more likely to express mistrust and made more positive and fewer negative references.

They focused more on the points of what happened, rather than putting the other people down.



Related: Five So-Called “Conspiracy Theories” That Are Actually Supported By Mainstream Science

The data also indicated that conspiracists were largely unwilling to apply the “conspiracy theory” label to their own beliefs.

They realized that label carries a negative social stigma and there is no need to plaster on these labels when trying to decode the truth.

The most important part of this study found that the conventionalist arguments tended to be much more hostile. This is apparent all over the internet, people who are trying to spread truth and awareness usually aren’t mean about it.

When people refute these ideas, it seems to always be much more aggressive. They want to push their conventional mentality so they don’t have to broaden their minds.

People who want you to truly open your mind to new possibilities do it in a way that isn’t forceful and demanding.

Seeking truth happens on your own means so people who are labelled as conspiracy theorists are just trying to help awaken our world. Being considered a ‘conspiracy theorist’ is truly a noble thing.



Related: Why ‘Conspiracy Theories’ & Spirituality Are Intimately Connected

You are pushing through the barriers of existing belief systems in order to make room for broader, more accepting beliefs.

People are still very afraid and want to defend the old paradigm.

If anyone has ever invalidated your attempts to uncover the truth – keep going, it’s a brave and necessary act as our world raises it’s consciousness.

Read more about the study here.


Related Articles:

Everywhere In The Western World, Government Is A Conspiracy Against The People & Cartels That Run The World

Nine Indisputable Truths About “Conspiracy Theorists”

The Business Of Journalists Is To Destroy The Truth & Americans Think The Media Is More Destructive Than Banks & Corporations + The Normals vs. Conspiracy Theorists

2022 Review: When “Conspiracy Theories” Turned Into Obvious Realities

How To Get Rid Of Paranoid Conspiracy Theorists

American Pravda: How The CIA Invented "Conspiracy Theories"


Are You A Mind-Controlled CIA Stooge? + The Term “Conspiracy Theory” Was Invented By The CIA In Order To Prevent Disbelief Of Official Government Stories

What A Coincidence: Greta Thunberg Is A Blood Relative Of The Rothschild Clan & The “Great Zero Carbon” Conspiracy And The WEF’s “Great Reset”


Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi

Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi
A Tangible Maths Lesson – Four Types Of Institutional Lies
July 18 2023 | From: WakeUpWorld / Various

Despite the constraints of our educational systems, there are some excellent teachers. And there are some not so excellent instructors. We learn a lot in school, but it is also important to learn outside of school as well. Some of the most valuable lessons are not found in the teacher’s answer book, and yet some teachers operate by the book, at right angles, making no adjustments for the humanity of their students.



Not surprising given that the school system itself is geared toward creating two things: employment and expectation.

Related: Unschooling: Radical Education That Produces Free Human Beings Instead Of Slaves

Like most people who are interested in history I dreaded math and algebra, and may actually have found my interest in history out of my disdain and fear of division and multiplication.

What I didn’t realize then was how much addition and subtraction is actually involved in writing our history.

I remember the first time I learned how to add. I thought I had tackled the math thing then and there. I also remember the first time I was frozen in front of the class, unable to do long division on the chalkboard. And yet the mathematical lesson I have used the most since its revelation to me, and the one I remember most distinctly, turned out to be more than just a mathematical lesson.


A Tangible Maths Lesson

An elder grew up in a country where government lies and propaganda were commonplace. One day, when I was a child, he was grilling a friend and I on our multiplication tables. After a while he paused and said,


“Let me think of a hard one - alright, what is eight times seven?”

My friend and I deliberated and answered “fifty-six”.

“Wrong. Think again.”

Well we checked and double checked our arithmetic.

“Fifty-six.”

“No.”

“It’s fifty-six, I think.”

“You’re wrong, it’s fifty-eight.”

“I think it’s fifty-six.”

“Wrong it’s fifty-eight.”

We held our guns, but because he was the authority figure, finally capitulated to his insistence that he held the correct answer.

“Ok fifty-eight.”

After we gave in, he explained the lesson.

Never submit to the half-truths, distortions and lies of authorities, particularly when you already know the answer.



Related: Lies, Damn Lies And Statistics


Idiots and Elitists

The reality is, authorities are bound to distribute lies and half-truths in support of their own ends and agenda.

This lesson is huge part of George Orwell’s novels 1984 and Animal Farm. The removal and replacement of whole segments of language by those in control is a key part of the dystopian backdrop of 1984. Over time, the state dictionary shrinks, while events are changed or removed altogether from “history”.

In Animal Farm, the agreed social rules of the farm, posted in public for all to see, are progressively altered in both word and in spirit by an emerging power faction, who argue linguistic technicality while insisting that everything is unchanged and enforcing the altered “rules” to their own ends.

Orwell’s works were an eerily accurate exploration of the inherent potential for corruption in our heavily institutionalized society. The real world is full of similar such occurrences.

Elitists often censor, suppress and obscure the truth, while information is removed, falsely discredited, even replaced or entirely conjured.



Related: Orwell’s 1984 No Longer Reads Like Fiction - It’s The Reality Of Our Times & The Propaganda Ministry Known As “The Free Press”

Meanwhile, euphemisms are inserted into the wider vocabulary to steer not only people’s perceptions and decision making, but the very subjects they will reasonably consider.


“Idiots don’t question relevance and act on ignorance. Zealots question limitedly, in accordance to preconceptions. Elitists question in order to advance power and do not share information.

Patriots question and share information openly.”

-
from The Matrix of Four.

In accordance with the Matrix of Four, there are four types of lie, all of them involving some nugget of truth. For the sake of this discussion, let’s look to the nuclear experimentation industry for examples.

The first type of lie is the addition of information. Sometimes the addition of a small bit of information can change the story entirely. For example: yes the ailing Fukushima reactor is still spewing radioactive pollution… but did you know, according to nuclear industry supporters, low level exposure to radiation is actually good for you?

The second type of lie is the subtraction of information. The removal of small key components can result in entirely different meaning. For example: with the nuclear site in Miami operating dangerous above standard ‘safety’ limits, the regulator temporarily increased the limit, averting an “emergency” by subtraction.

The third type of lie is multiplication of information. Exaggerations of situations connected with the story as well as exaggerations of extraneous information are included in the presentation to dilute it.

The fourth type of lie is division of information. The facts are interlaced with disconnects and the significance of information is separated or underplayed. To exemplify the third and fourth types: nuclear industry advocates claim nuclear energy to be ‘clean’ and ‘safe’. To support this belief (not fact), they exaggerate the relevance of nuclear’s low carbon emissions in comparison to other energy systems while ignoring or downplaying the permanent environmental destruction their nuclear waste causes and discrediting the science that clearly proves radiation exposure = cancer and death.



Related: A Masterclass In Propaganda & Transgressing The Logic Of The New Tyrannical Normal

The problem for the ‘powers that were’ is, we each have a mind that can compute math tricks as well as self-serving political gimmicks – both of which are constants in today’s institutional operations.

Sure, this mixed up mathematics, irregular logic, circular reasoning and ill rhetoric is sometimes just due to a lack of information, combined with an unreasonable unwillingness to admit one doesn’t know everything.

But given how extensive and common such twisted representations are in modern politics, one can only assume that, more often than not, we are witnessing a web of implicit agendas running counter to the assumed program of community governance.

And we all know it.

So what is still sustaining a system we know is failing? Fear and hate.


Fear, Hate and Truth

Hate is the ultimate control mechanism. It prevents us from seeing the brotherhood in humanity. It enables institutions to promote (very profitable) war and killing.

It creates closed-mindedness and closes the heart to spiritual healing. In is endemic to a war mentality, where both sides rationalize violent acts in the name of peace, liberty and freedom, all the while hating the evil “others” who are invariably demonized or dehumanized by the intentional rhetoric of war.



Related: Fear Is Contagious And Used To Control You & The Fascist Scale Revisited

Fear is toxic and debilitating, and worst of all, much like ignorance – it is contagious. It’s no secret, most people don’t like change – particularly large scale change. Fear is by definition, an emotional response to the unknown, to a change that has not yet happened or something that does not yet exist.

And today, our institutions are designed to combat change of all kinds; we’re equipped for war, not peace. We’re busy fighting “climate change” instead of building sustainability. We have built entire institutions around such fears, constantly bracing against a perceived and mysterious threat to our future peace and security.

Ironically, it is by institutionalizing war and this culture of fear that we embed conflict, lack and separation into our collective consciousness. And it is from this point that acts of militarism and invasion become normalized in our minds.

[For a deeper look at the institutionalization of war, check out my previous article Where are the Peacemakers? Our Institutions are Designed for War]

The intentional seeding of fear and ignorance into our social psyche holds us back as a collective, limiting our knowledge of our actual (not perceived) world, our expectations and ultimately, how we manifest our future reality. Initiating a ‘flight or fight’ response, at a primal level, our self-protective impulses can propel us to take aggressive (re)actions, which in turn seed more hate and fear in those around us.

And when that fear relates to the question of social programming or collusion, the deep sense of trust and security that is embedded in our relationship with “society” and “the system” causes many to close their minds, fearful of even questioning such fundamental beliefs, and hateful toward those who do.



Related: A Primer For The Propagandized: Fear Is The Mind-Killer & Whistleblower: Newspaper Industry Chiefs Criminally Negligent Over Covid Scaremongering

Truth, the antithesis of evil, exists without fear – of outsiders, of alternative perspectives, of other lifestyles, of what may be seen heard or spoken, of what may come next, of losing control, of truth itself.

In our ongoing search for truth, we invariably encounter both ignorance and pro-institutional propaganda. So, when encountering those who espouse the relative merits of our corrupted, failing structures (while often also mocking alternative views), it can very be difficult to understand which people are in fact idiots and which are entangled with elitist philosophies and institutions.

Do they ignore the facts because of fear, imparted ignorance and mental numbness? Or do they perpetuate ignorance intentionally, in order to disempower – a common tactic in executing covert agenda.

The best mathematical lesson I ever learned taught me to question the deductions and answers of “authority” of all kinds.

Where authority exists, so too does an imbalance of power, and from a point of imbalance, the truth is easily corrupted – by addition, subtraction, multiplication and division.

When you encounter un-truths, you may wonder – are they idiots, zealots or elitists? Don’t waste your energy. Your best weapon is truth.

True patriots question and share information openly, free of fear and agenda. Be a patriot.


Related Articles:

Undoing The Dis-Education Of Millennials

Everything Is Rigged: Medicine, Science, Elections, The Media, Money, Education, Search Engines, Social Media... You Are Living In A Fabricated Fairy Tale

Twenty Five Rules Of Disinformation, Propaganda, “PSYOPS”, Debunking Techniques

“Order Out Of Chaos”: How The Elite’s Plans Were Foretold In Popular Culture

Renowned Doctor Slams Medical Education & Says We Have “An Epidemic Of Misinformed Doctors”



Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi

Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi
The Water Crisis Hoax: "Peak Water" - The New "Peak Oil" Myth
July 17 2023 | From: PrimaryWaterInstitute / NewScientist / ScientificAmerican / StopTheCrime

The Primary Water Institute: More scientific evidence that water Is renewable; Following on from the discovery that the earth creates oil in an ongoing process that does not take billions of years, it appears that the same is also true for water.



Click here to view a larger version of this diagram in a new window

Of course the myths of scarcity are used by the elite as tools to maintain control. In fact, we do not need to burn oil and oil derivatives at all, but by supressing free-energy alternatives and restricting us to the use of so-called "Scarce" resources we are kept in indebted serviture to the cabal. However this only work as long as the masses are uneducated as to the truth...

Related: Study: 528Hz Sound "Miraculously" Cleaned Oil Polluted Water In The Gulf Of Mexico


A recent study documented the presence of vast quantities of water locked far beneath the earth’s surface. That study confirmed:

"That there is a very, very large amount of water that's trapped in a really distinct layer in the deep Earth… approaching the sort of mass of water that's present in all the world's ocean"

- Scientific American

More scientific evidence emerges that water is renewable; that the Earth makes water deep within and that we can easily access it, but that we have been tricked by the powers that be into thinking water is scarce and we are running out.

We have not been told the truth. The Earth makes water continually, within.


A New Perspective On The Source Of The Post-Napa Quake Water

As Solano County enjoys an incredible new flow of water in local creeks after the recent Napa earthquake, experts are speculating what might be the source of this “bonus from nature”.

Officials report that at least 200,000 gallons of water per day are flowing from Wild Horse Creek, with many other areas reporting similar phenomena. Water quality tests performed by local public works officials confirm that the new water is pure enough to drink.

This new water is being added to municipal drinking water supplies which is a great blessing to local residents.
Although federal government geologists report that the new flow of water is likely “shallow groundwater" suddenly released from opening of fractures, other theories exist that offer great hope for a thirsty world.

During a recent interview, Pal Pauer, a respected American hydrologist, stated that this post-earthquake release is an excellent example of “primary water”, which comes not from rain-fed, shallow aquifers, but rather from very deep sources, far below typical aquifer levels.



Related: Neonic Pesticides In Tap Water React With Chlorine To Create Hazardous Chemicals That Are 300 Times More Toxic & Toxic Aluminum Found In Popular Prescription Infant Formulas

Primary water sources are independent of rainfall, and appear to be virtually unlimited. Although the science of primary water is not widely known, there is much evidence to support its existence.

In fact, a recent study reported in the Scientifc American documented the presence of vast quantities of water locked far beneath the earth’s surface. That study confirmed "that there is a very, very large amount of water that's trapped in a really distinct layer in the deep Earth approaching the sort of mass of water that's present in all the world's ocean":

Although primary water originates from geological processes deep within the earth, Pauer said it can be tapped (and has been tapped) for use at or near the surface of the earth. This is because primary water naturally pushes up through fracture zones in the earth’s crust, as illustrated in the diagram above.

High pressures in the earth’s mantle make this upward movement of primary water possible and inevitable. It is not necessary to drill hundreds of miles deep in order to access this abundant [and valuable] resource. In some cases, primary water can be found at the surface of the earth, as demonstrated by many natural springs.

Primary water can also be accessed by drilling near the surface (less than 200 feet). In other cases, earthquakes, such as the recent one in Napa, can remove blockages and open channels for primary water. This can facilitate sudden release of this great gift from below.



Related: Christchurch Earthquake: Remember September?

Pauer points out that there are other indications that the new-found water in Solano County is, indeed, primary water. For example, there were no major reports of sinkholes or subsidence associated with the release.

If this massive volume of water had been released from a shallow aquifer an equivalent volume of water would have had to replace the volume withdrawn so rapidly (over 1,000 gallons/minute, which is over 10 times the pre-quake flow).

Otherwise, massive sinkholes / subsidence would have appeared. The lack of sinkholes or subsidence indicates that the source of these new waters must not be shallow aquifers, but must be primary in origin, from much deeper, prolific sources. These primary water sources, in fact, were so prolific, they were able to sustain surface stability even as massive volumes of water were released.

In situations such as this, as depleted aquifers are replenished by primary water, variations in flow may be expected until equilibrium is reached.

After many decades of successful primary water studies and drilling projects, Pauer has proven that we can access this abundant source and supplement our current water supply. Primary water may be tapped directly, or may be found commingled with secondary water (e.g. aquifers) fed from atmospheric sources above.

As more people become aware of this little-known science, perhaps the Napa earthquake will be remembered for helping us look "down" instead of "up" for solutions to our current, epic drought crisis.


Related Articles:

1080 Was Added To Water Supplies By Germany In WW2 As A Chemical Weapon Says A US Manufacturer – But The New Zealand Authorities Are Dropping It Aerially Into Our Waterways

Dangerous Products That We’re Unknowingly Using In Our Day-To-Day Life + The Cancer Risk To People Who Drink Chlorinated Water Is 93% Higher Than Those Who Don’t

Elon Musk Just Exposed The Oil Oligarchy’s Control Over Mainstream Media In Epic Rant



Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi

Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi
The Real Inconvenient Truth & A Call For Critical Thinking By The 99%
July 16 2023 | From: BerkeleyDailyPlanet / Various

A person might be stoned for heresy in Berkeley if they were to question belief in global warming. But, as a decades long, left leaning, KPFA listening and sponsoring, commuter bike riding, composting, plastic avoiding, bring your own cloth grocery bag environmental activist, I am seeing too much hypocrisy and closed minded smugness, and a lack of critical thinking on the part of those who I have always thought of as my people.



I have come to the conclusion that those with liberal roots like me, have been sent on a fools errand, sucked into an unquestioning group-think and religiosity by a well-funded corporatised environmental establishment, that is scaring us into accepting top-down, pre-prescribed faux solutions that have never had public input and are designed to enrich bankers, diminish the rights of ordinary people, and funnel us into a controlled technocratic society.

Related: Inconvenient Reality: Al Gore’s Global Climate Apocalypse Never Took Place - He Now Says It Did But You Just Couldn’t Tell + Hero EPA Administrator Speaks Out Against Junk Science – Denies CO2 Is Primary Contributor To ‘Global Warming’!

We hear plenty of talk about lowering parts per million of carbon while basic principles of environmentalism are violated, such as, don’t pollute, do no harm, local control, conservation, recycle, reuse, live simply, less technology, not more.

The Democratic left has been hijacked and infiltrated, our ideals and beliefs distorted and twisted into a disciplinary social agenda, which demonises rank and file humanity, and deflects responsibility away from the real perpetrators of the destruction of our natural world.

Al Gore, the man charged with popularising the global warming theory, uses 20 times the energy of the average person in just one of his multi-million dollar homes, yet his ”carbon footprint” is never put under a spot light.

Few remember how as Vice President he used his “Earth in the Balance” environmental cred to stump for passage of NAFTA and Free Trade policies, which started the environmental race to the bottom and the wholesale giving away of local power over land and laws to multinational corporations.

Now Gore is investing with partners like Goldman Sachs in carbon trading schemes, espousing the self-enriching solution to a problem he defines. It would seem subscribers to the theory of global warming never question the designation of CO2, as the root of our environmental problems and its convenient, consequent value as a global taxable trading currency founded on the commodification of nature and a newly invented “right to pollute”.

This unverifiable system run by bankers will accelerate, not slow, the pillaging of the planet.



Related: Anna von Reitz: The Banking System Including Specifics On The World Bank And Karen Hudes

It is my observation that all aspects of the left alternative media from the progressive weeklies to KPFA radio, are conducting the environmental wing of the global war on terror, never missing an opportunity to frighten and guilt trip us that we will cause “game over for the planet” if we don’t vote for “climate change legislation”, aka, carbon taxes and carbon trading, and support “smart growth” policies.

We are schooled that only crazy right-wingers could possibly question the “settled science” and the “settled” remedies.

The Intergovernmental Panel on Climate Change (IPCC) is always cited as the trusted go-to body of expertise, even though their integrity was discredited with the “Climategate” scandal based on leaked emails, in which head scientists at the IPCC, Michael Mann of Penn State and Phil Jones of East Anglia University discussed doctoring the data on the “hockey stick” graph created by Mann, and punishing scientists and scientific journals that print contradictory evidence to the theory of global warming.

So many are now feeding at the trough of climate change disaster capitalism that a rational open debate is almost impossible. City councils throughout the land are curiously all subscribing to the same developer, banker- enriching, land-grabbing policies of “smart growth”.

Unelected, unaccountable regional boards, made up of selected local officials, along with corporations and non governmental organizations are drawing up dictatorial regional plans for growth that supercede city governments, depriving citizens of the right to affect their own local land use policy.

In the name of climate change remediation, we are told we must pack more people into smaller areas of land, as our towns are being transformed into mega Manhattanized cities with tall multi-unit apartment buildings that take our sunlight, and ultimately our connection to the land and nature.



Related: Six Issues That Are Agenda 21 & Myth Busters: Introducing Agenda 2030

Old buildings, neighborhoods, and communities are wastefully being torn down and made over to fit the vision of elite ideologue urban planners. In the upheaval, small local independent businesses are lost and replaced with national chains.

This is not protection of nature, but a transfer of wealth, power, property ownership, and autonomy of cities, towns and rural areas, away from ordinary citizens.

Today’s "environmentalists" are working towards increased government and corporate control and surveillance over our lives through bio-hazardous technology, ie. smart grid and smart meters, with no regard for thousands of independent scientific studies proving that digital microwave radiation damages biology.

Instead of a call to decentralise, simplify and conserve, citizens worldwide are being forced to apply “smart” meters to their homes, even as they are complaining of heart palpitations, extreme fatigue, mental confusion, sleeplessness, headaches, ear ringing, dizziness and more.

A technology is neither “green” nor “sustainable” if it’s byproduct harms humans, insects, plants and animals. This unseen pollution from smart meters and smart grid infrastructure is increasing exponentially with no objections from official environmentalists.

Unlike the old meters, smart meters use energy to power themselves 24/7. They are only advantageous to a centralized corporate model of energy control.

Most shockingly, the left, who claim to have the corner on environmental stewardship, are the ones giving credence to geoengineering-solar radiation management, (the spraying of chemical nanoparticle pollution, such as aluminum oxide and sulphur dioxide via jet aircraft into the atmosphere in order to block the sun), as a solution for global warming.



Related: Do You Know What We Are Breathing In From Weather Geoengineering Efforts?

On May 9, 2013, the Earth Island Institute sponsored a debate cavalierly dubbed, “Hack the Sky?” at the Brower Center in Berkeley CA. The purported adversaries were Stanford geoengineer, Ken Caldiera, and so called “ethicist”, Clive Hamilton, who belongs to the same geoengineering promoting, Solar Radiation Management Governance Group with Caldiera and other geoengineers. That very morning the two “debaters” made an appearance on liberal KALW’s “Your Call”.

A few months later the apprentices on Progressive radio KPFA”s “Full Circle” hosted the same performance duo. Why are environmental groups and left media putting on rigged debates legitimising and normalising a preposterous technology, which poisons and desecrates nature, and can only cause irreparable harm, when they should be screaming warnings from the rafters that scientists are recklessly playing God with our world.

These left media outlets are unconscionably frightening their following into accepting what amounts to nothing less than the corporate scientific intervention into our natural weather and climate systems.

The environmental establishment chooses to ignore a whole area of inquiry relevant and crucial to the climate change equation; that of scientific, military, university, and governmental, (NASA and NOAA) experimentation with our atmosphere and weather, which has been going on for many decades.

The book “Angels Don’t Play This HAARP” by Nick Begich and Jeanne Manning, documents the history of military experimentation with the earth’s atmosphere, and chronicles the development (including twelve patents) of the High Frequency Active Auroral Research Project, (HAARP), a field of giant antennas which can boil the upper atmosphere with a focused steerable billion watt electromagnetic beam, sending electromagnetic waves back onto a target on earth, causing changes in the jet stream and weather.




Related: Good Hearts, Fooled Minds: Four Fallacies Of The (Hijacked) Environmental Movement

The Department of Defense and their military contractors operate outside of all laws that protect the environment.

Ironically, the climate change activists of today are listening to and trusting the very moneyed, powerful entities who have brought us to the brink of ecological collapse and forced us into fossil fuel dependency, for diagnosis and treatment of our environmental calamities.

The Rockefellers, one of the biggest funders and grant givers to the current environmental “movement”, have throughout the decades, used their wealth and influence derived from BIG OIL to remain in control of energy.

They financed Prohibition in the 1920s and '30s to keep farmers from making their own alcohol fuel, and worked to criminalize hemp, from which fuel was made. They killed the electric car and the municipal electric railways and influenced our government to suppress more than 5000 energy technology patents, which have potential to end our energy crisis.

The rhetoric we hear of creating economic and environmental equity among people and nations, rings hollow when you realize that the environmental establishment is being bought and commandeered by the richest fat cats in the world, who have the inordinate means to create equity overnight, and to stop their destructive environmental practices, if that were their true purpose.

Instead they are financing and manufacturing a phony grassroots campaign to pin the blame for environmental devastation on the “everyman” who is living in a world choreographed by the corporate financial elite.



Related: Is The Globalist "Reset" Failing? The Elites May Have Overplayed Their Hand

Their message is that the future of the planet is impossible unless we the little people submit to the measures outlined by them. They have frightened, panicked, and demoralized the very people who would be fighting them with every breath into being the enforcement arm for their vision of our future.

Fear of climate change is being manipulated to get the left to aid in the stealing of citizen rights and the corporatization of our local government, land, business, nature and weather.

While the environmentalists are stuck on climate change, the nuclear accidents, toxic spills, pesticide contamination, deep sea oil drilling, fracking, tree cutting, electromagnetic radiation, introduction into the ecosystem of new dangerous technological compounds and organisms like GMOS, synthetic biology, nanoparticles, the geoengineering of our skies, destructive war and weapons, and much more, continue unabated.

Now left wing pundits like The Nation’s, Mark Hertsgaard, tell us to be impressed, that the big time financial fleecers and scammers, “Hank” Paulsen, hedgefund billionaire, Tom Steyer and Michael Bloomberg have come on board with climate change, as if they haven’t always been.

The War On Climate Change has gone publicly mainstream as the likes of BP, Goldman Sachs, J.P. Morgan, Dow Chemical bankrolled the “Peoples” climate march in New York City in Sept. 2014.

No. It is way past time for the left to question where blind belief in billionaire, banker funded environmentalism is taking us.


Related Articles:

Carbon Dioxide Revealed As The “Miracle Molecule Of Life” For Re-Greening The Planet & Leonardo DiCaprio’s War On Carbon Is Actually A War Against All Plants, Rainforests And Ecosystems On The Entire Planet

Amazing Science Lesson: Environmentalists Declare War On Photosynthesis In Stupefying Effort To Exterminate All Recognizable Life On Planet Earth

“Order Out Of Chaos”: How The Elite’s Plans Were Foretold In Popular Culture

Let's Review 50 Years Of Dire Climate Forecasts And What Actually Happened & New Zealand Climate Commission’s Radical Plan



Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi

Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi

The Dissolution Of Contrived Civilization
July 15 2023 | From: ZenGardner / Various

Despite the furious efforts of the world’s Machiavellian destroyers, humanity is waking up. In our current paradigm, we’re seeing significant progress in exposing the ongoing brutal Ukraine and Gaza exterminations and furtive Syria incursion, the mass revelation of chemtrails and other neo-scientific programs, the disastrous effects of EMFs of every source, GMO food manipulation, tectronic surveillance and monitoring, and the front and center clearly induced global war and the militarisation of society.



We’re in the thick of it now. But it’s revealing itself as we speak. Don’t let these events and seeming contests of ideology throw you. There’s nothing level about this playing field, and the mass narrative is strong propaganda. Don’t even listen to it. Rely on your heart and alternative sources. Their only weapon is our consent by yielding to their lies and adopting their mindset.

Related: Reaching People & Shifting Attitudes: Do’s And Don’ts In Conversation Regarding Waking Up

Disinformation serves several purposes, the most insidious of which is to introduce doubt to your heartfelt convictions regarding the reality of what is obviously before you. Keeping the mass mind at bay is imperative to their program.

Why? If we woke up to the truth we’d stop our participation and rise up and overthrow them. And they know that.

Now factor in the genetic modification from every source, the pharmaceutical / vaccination onslaught especially on our children, the toxification of our skies, water and food, and the transhuman robotic assault – and you start to get the picture.

But we are many, they are few…never ever, ever forget that.



Major Signs of Awakening


As mentioned above, there are many manifestations that the Truth is flooding in to human consciousness. What we collectively do with this information is one thing; what we individually do with it is the key. We either activate, or we don’t.

The more who do, the greater the mass awakening. With or without the masses, the awakening is coming to pass anyway, come what may. That’s the wonderfully exciting reality.

What the naysayers and foot draggers do with it is their business, as well as their demise if they choose wrongly to ignore what is more obvious by the minute.

The onus is on humanity. And the alternative is becoming crystal clear.




Related: Dealing With “Waking Up.” How To Handle Discovering More Than Just The Tip Of the Iceberg


The List Continues

If you need further encouragement, get involved. You’ll see signs of it everywhere. Major inroads of Truth are being made by the minute as these disgusting forces continue to attempt to forge their desired goal of a subservient, complacent and even happily servile work force. Damn them, and do it with gusto.

Don’t be deceived, it’s all a wicked charade. A ploy, a scam: a counterfeit civilization they’re trying to construct that true
conscious humanity is dissolving by the hour.

Disconnect – disobey – and de-enlist. Break your unconscious and conscious agreements. The parasites will shrivel up and disappear.

The time is now. It’s ours for the taking. And receiving.



Related Articles:

The Great Awakening Has Begun

Why Do We Condemn Others For Being ‘Less Awake’ Or ‘Less Conscious?’


Poll Shows Americans Waking Up, Majority Now Suspects Unelected Shadow Government In Charge [2018]


Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi

Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi
Ten Signs The Global Elite Are Losing Control
July 14 2023 | From: ActivistPost / Various

[ This is not a new article, however the observations remain correct and true today ]
Karma is coming for the elite in a big way. As the Powers That Be head toward a devastating defeat in their war plans for Syria, signs are emerging that their rule over humanity is rapidly diminishing.




Over the last decade the global elite have been on a mad dash to consolidate power over the world. It's always been their plan like some evil villain in a comic book, but after 9/11 the plan went into overdrive and then turbo charged during the financial crisis of 2008.

Related: Is The Globalist "Reset" Failing? The Elites May Have Overplayed Their Hand

Yet it's doomed to fail because humans are meant to be guided by their own free will, not controlled like livestock. The more the elite try to control humanity, the more entropy occurs. Entropy, for those who don't know, is the lack of order or predictability; a gradual decline into disorder.

Although the elite still enjoy a huge wealth advantage over the masses, they are now resigned to behaving like tyrants to maintain control. This, in turn, exposes their dark side which has been cleverly concealed for ages. Not anymore.

People are waking up in droves, at least as fast as the elite can build their full-spectrum prison matrix. Let them try. To paraphrase Victor Hugo, "No army can stop an idea whose time has come."

Here are ten signs that the elite are losing control over the people:


1. Official lies no longer effective: The lies they tell simply don't work anymore. There was a time when official lies, especially about war and peace, were believed. Because, after all, how evil would it be to lie about such things? Generally people want to believe they are being told the truth when life and death is at stake. The boy who cried wolf has cried one too many times. Even if they told the truth at this point, very few would believe them.


2. No confidence in politics: US politicians have a paltry approval rating. The trust in government is at all-time lows here and around the world. Mainstream polls show only 10% of the public has confidence in Congress. In other words, 90% don't believe in them to be competent to govern.


3. No confidence in media: The most recent polls show that 77% of the population no longer trusts corporate TV news. Is it any wonder why the establishment media failed to sell the lies about the alleged Syria chemical event? With all their monopoly might over the airwaves, they can no longer claim that black is white simply because officialdom says so.



Related: “Order Out Of Chaos”: How The Elite’s Plans Were Foretold In Popular Culture


4. Bankers rejected: Hungary recently became the first country to follow Iceland's lead by shedding international bankers ( IMF ) and is considering pursuing prosecution of past prime ministers who enslaved the people with debt.
Look for this trend to continue even if nations decide to default to break free.


5. Vatican abruptly cleaning up its act: Under the previous Pope, Pope Benedict, scandals erupted from the Vatican ranging from covering up pedophile priests to money laundering and fraud. Benedict, in an unprecedented move, abruptly retired to make way for a seemingly much more likable Pope Francis. Pope Francis by all measures is working furiously to reclaim the church's peaceful and humble reputation. Whether this is genuine or a PR move, it's telling that the church was forced into such a drastic turnaround to save itself from losing all credibility.


6. Mutiny among soldiers: Finally. Soldiers, who are outlawed from making political statements, are steadily speaking out against US military adventurism. As Einstein famously said "The pioneers of a warless world are the young men (and women) who refuse military service."


7. Militarized police state: One of the darkest signs that the elite are losing their grip on power is the construction of the militarized police state specifically trained to combat domestic civil unrest. Local cops with tanks and other combat gear are working with Feds at Fusion centers, active Army units are on American soil for the first time in history, the NSA spy grid is being used by the IRS and DEA , and the elimination of due process for Americans under the NDAA are just some of the tyrannical moves made to secure the elite criminals from public backlash.

They're clearly scared, and they should be given what they've done to the American people and the Constitution.


8. Serious secession movements everywhere: A state seceding from a larger political entity used to be an ultra-fringe concept, until now. In America, secession movements are winning over the public in parts of Colorado and California. In Europe, serious secession movements are happening in Spain and Scotland , as well as several EU nations flirting with the idea of dropping out of the euro. Decentralization = Entropy!


9. GMO food being rejected everywhere: Control the food and you control the people. True in theory, but much more difficult in practice. GMO leaders like Monsanto are being exposed .

All of their economic and political strength cannot defeat the spread of knowledge about the dangers of pesticide-soaked Frankenfoods. GMO fields are being burned in protest in America and around the world , informed nations continue to reject their products , and labeling laws are gaining traction.


10. Cannabis liberation: Many reading this will think marijuana legalization is a superficial development. However, it is a major signpost that the elite's grip is fading. Enormous resources have been spent to keep cannabis illegal.

Cannabis has been a powerful medicine for physical, mental, and spiritual health throughout the ages. This single plant represents a huge threat to the power structures and their industries, hence its seemingly senseless illegality. The approaching global reversal of the tyrannical policy of prohibition is the first of many concessions to come.


Related Articles:

World’s Elite Try To Wipe Out All Knowledge And Use Of Natural Cures, While They Privately Use Them For Their Own Longevity

Hollywood Is Dying, And The Elites Don’t Care

Are Elite Controllers A Fantasy? Read This

Brave New World And Individual Power & How The Elite Dominate The World: They Buy Politicians, And Incumbents Almost Always Win

Putin Declares Victory Over New World Order: ‘Change Of Elites’ Coming Because Humanity Has ‘Woken Up’ + Facts And Opinions Suppressed By The Corrupt Mainstream Media & New Zealand: A Surveillance Society




Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi

Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi
The Hypnotic Power Of Germ Propaganda
July 13 2023 | From: JonRappoport / Various

When perverse elites are building a false matrix for the masses, it’s always wise to find the elites’ most basic assumption and question it.

Time and time again, over the years, we hear about new germs and old germs and “mystery germs” that are afflicting people, suddenly, in various parts of the world.



And this news is met with nearly universal faith. Yes, there must be a germ. It must be what’s making people ill. When researchers speak about the germ, they are correct and truthful.

Related: The Flawed Germ Theory; Unfortunately The Basis Of Modern Medicine

Really? Why? Who said so?

I took my first serious germ-foray, when I was writing my book, AIDS Inc., in 1987. To my shock, I discovered that, even by the conventional rules of disease-causation, there was no reason to infer that something called HIV was causing something called AIDS.

Going a step further, I investigated every so-called high-risk group and found non-germ causes that accounted for all the symptoms of what was being called AIDS.

Without HIV as the lynchpin welding all these risk-groups together, “AIDS” was immune-system failure resulting from a variety of causes. Not one cause.

For example: T-cells are significant troops in the immune-system army. The biggest reason for T-cell depletion on the planet? Malnutrition.

The last time I looked, malnutrition is not a germ.



Related: Nutrition And Mental Health + ADHD Is A Fabricated Disease, Says Reputed Neurologist

AIDS Inc. is replete with illustrations of germ-touting that turn out to be irrelevant.

But people are fascinated by germ-stories. They love them, they fear them, they add their own wrinkles, they behave as if they’re in a theater watching a horror movie.

When the dreaded SARS epidemic made global headlines in 2003, the germ was the “coronavirus.” Of course, SARS turned out to be a dud. As a horror movie, it didn’t deliver. Too few people died.

Frank Plummer, a Canadian microbiologist working for the World Health Organization, achieved a few moments of honesty when he told reporters that, strangely enough, he was seeing fewer people with SARS who “had the coronavirus.” Eventually, Plummer said, almost none of the people being diagnosed with SARS had the coronavirus.

Which is exactly like saying, “They’re all suffering from disease X, except none of them have what causes disease X.”

A contradiction. Garble. Gibberish.

Six years later, in 2009, there was the fabled Swine Flu H1N1 pandemic, another dud.

Sharyl Attkisson, writing for CBS, and Peter Doshi, writing at BMJ Online, exposed the Swine Flu fraud: most people across the US who were “likely Swine Flu cases” didn’t have the H1N1 virus. That’s what lab tests revealed.


Related Articles:

Renowned Doctor Slams Medical Education & Says We Have “An Epidemic Of Misinformed Doctors”

Mainstream Media Is Trying Hard To Convince Us That “Plandemic” Is A “Conspiracy Theory” + The New Normal

Why Mandatory Vaccination Is Unethical And Immoral & First-Ever Peer-Reviewed Study Of Vaccinated Vs Unvaccinated Children Shows Vaccinated Kids Have A Higher Rate Of Sickness, 470% Increase In Autism

Cover Stories Are Used To Control Explanations & Medical Propaganda Headlines For Gullible Minds

Loneliness More Hazardous To Your Health Than Obesity Or Smoking

Why Nutritional Psychiatry Is The Future Of Mental Health Treatment + Depression Is A Symptom Of Nutrient Deficiency; Treating It With Drugs Is Not Only Ineffective But Dangerous


Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi

Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi
CAFR (Comprehensive Annual Financial Report) Collateral Accounts:
Taxes And Government Fraud Against Citizens Around The World
July 12 2023 | From: CAFR1 / Various

The Comprehensive Annual Financial Report (CAFR) Swindle - The Biggest Game In Town



Taxes are no longer necessary. This video exposes a deliberate and massive swindle that is perpetrated by every government agency from your local school district all the way up to the State / Federal / National governments.

Related: Republic Or Democracy And Self-Governance

This brief video does an excellent job of exposing how the 'budget' scheme actually operates and how local and national government has been systematically screwing us all since - forever. Warning: this will make you furious!

Below the video is an earlier article re-posted with more information. It is so critical that the public are aware of this information - the governments and their sellout politicians know what they are doing and must be held accountable.

A key agenda behind the CAFR swindle is ensuring that communities and countries never make any real progress and in fact degrade over time. It's all part of the Agenda 21 / NWO grand plan.







Unmasking The CAFR Scam In Your Country / City / Town / Council
August 11 2014 | From: Rense / RealityBlogger | See Update Below

It is perhaps not widely known that governments and councils use complicated accounting practices to hide their wealth from the people, providing 'justification' for rates hikes and other methods of wealth extraction.

In a world where council rates and infrastructure costs are conitinually on the increase, in most places the CAFR (Comprehensive Annual Financial Report) Accounting system is used, which hides wealth and provides the 'powers that be' with more reason to financially rape and pillage the people.




While much of the content below pertains to the US, the principles in play with CAFR Accounting are used in most countries.


Examples include: [And you might ask why many of these have been pulled?]

New Zealand Treasury Annual Report

Australia Treasury Annual Report

Melbourne City Annual Report

Australia Government - Department of Finance and De-regulation

Australia Future Funds ($100 billion) and “Nation Building Fund

Government of Canada (Annual Financial Report)

Montreal, Canada (Annual Financial Report)

Ireland National Pension Reserve Fund scheme

Belfast City Council Annual Financial Report

The British Monarchy

City of London Police Department

Welsh Government

Japan Finance Corporation


What Are CAFRs?

First, what is a CAFR? A CAFR (Comprehensive Annual Financial Report) is government's complete accounting of "Net Worth".

It has been reported that trillions of collective dollars not shown in government Budget reports are shown through Government CAFR reports and they are virtually never openly-discussed by the syndicated NEWS media, both the Democratic and Republican Party members, the House, Senate, and organized public education.

With, and being that the CAFR is "the" accounting document for every local government, and with it being effectively "BLACKED OUT" for open mention over the last 60 years, that this fact of intentional omission of coverage is the biggest conspiracy that has ever taken effect in the United States. Read more at: Rense

As more and more cities, counties, districts, and states across America falsely declare their near - insolubility, bankruptcy warnings, fiscal deficits, and budgetary quandaries, I am left with the sinking feeling that “the people” just can’t wrap their heads around how to point out these misleading and downright fallacious claims made by their councils, mayors, and professional con-men in places of public trust.



Related: After Decades Of Brainwashing, MSM & Governments Are Losing Control Of The People

So today I want to share with you a simple way to factually stand before your local or state political “leaders” and give indisputable proof that, when stating the “facts” about their own budget shortfalls, limited choices, and necessary raising of your hard-earned monies as taxation (revenue) to “balance the budget”, your own little criminal syndicate of elected mayors and council men and women are lying bold-faced to the entire citizenry through the act of subterfuge and omission.

This little factoid is uniform throughout the entirety of the financial structure of government, as reported in the audited Comprehensive Annual Financial Report and required by Federal and State laws. It is always reported in the same fashion and under the same heading as all other governments (municipal corporations).

The figures are not disputable. The truth is unshakable. And yet the doublespeak will never end… For even as you present this one simple line item to the scoundrels themselves behind their raised and protective pedestals, they will still attempt to deny what is undeniable, be it in ignorance or in deceit; usually a mix of both.

Read the full story at: RealityBlogger




Update: How The New Zealand [And Other Western Countries] Government Hides Billions (Trillions) In Slush Funds
October 9 2014 | From Narkive



C.A.F.R. (Comprehensive Annual Financial Report) Hidden / Stolen 'Cream' - Trillions In Surplus


Globally, The Biggest Financial Scandal In History / Annals Of Mankind

Playing in the derivitives market John Key was selected to become NZ PM / US Federal Reserve Bank / Israeli operative

Billions (Trillions) in profitable investments

Convincing you that the government is financially in trouble when the government has trillions of dollars in slush funds

Budget reports: Only need to show what is necessary to meet obligations

Transactions for local governments are missing

Total investment revenue is missing

Total income figures are missing

Total worth is missing

Surplus cream ($) is not mentioned [exposure of manufactured debt = loss of control]

United Nations (1946) created CAFR to take over and steal wealth

Only shows shortfall of budgetary revenue versus annual operating costs for the year, never shows 'cream'

45% of revenues invested internationally best rate of return

Free trade agreements (NAFTA / GATT / TPPA) ultimate purpose: Governments investing in foreign corporations extending their profits with slaves in China

Government agencies are lying to you when they say there is a need for taxation to pay for services already provided for

The New Zealand people NEVER profit from the investments - massive hidden surpluses

United States Statistics

Local and federal US Government owns approximately 70% of stock market listed companies

70% of Dow Jones (30) owned by composite government funds

Prison industry (Correctional Corporation of America) is the #1 industry in America. New Zealand Prime Minister John Key moves towards that end in New Zealand

US Federal $30 Trillion cream at top not reported


Total non-signatory to the 1740 Waitangi Treaty (with amusing numerous versions), this Tainui Kiingitanga warrior demands from the New Zealand government [the following]:

1. What Is The Total Cash Gross Receipts Income ?

2. What Are The Total Investments ?

3. What Is The Net Worth ?

4. What Is The Investment Growth ? 5, 10, 25 Years In The Future ?

5. What Are The Liquid Assets ? (Billions / Trillions)

We Know Know That The Constant Cries For More Taxation Are Entirely Bogus:

New Zealand CAFR (Comprehensive Annual Financial Report) where literally hundreds of Billions of dollars are hidden or not listed / discussed by the same banker controlled media.

Not Readily Listed:

Taxation and selling of government assets is the massive conspiracy, when the hidden surplus of Trillions of dollars
is not discussed by the bankers and government controlled media
.


Related Articles:


Everywhere In The Western World, Government Is A Conspiracy Against The People & Cartels That Run The World

Mathematical Report Proves Human Society Is Too Complex To Be Ruled By A Government

Four Words: Weapons Of Media Lies & When Corporate Power Is Your Real Government, Corporate Media Is State Media

$2.3M For A Banker’s Advice On Selling State Houses? See What Else Your Government (Corporation) Has Spent Your Tax Money On Kiwis

New Zealand Government Has Pledged Millions Of Dollars Worth Of Taxpayer Funds To The Corrupt Clinton Foundation & Clinton Health Access Initiatives



Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi

Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi
CIA Records: Epidemic Fabrication And Assassinations - They Wanted To Kill, Using Chemical And Biological Substances
July 11 2023 | From: JonRappoport / Various

"The application would be fairly simple. Covertly inject a few people with a germ - and later identify those people as "patient zeroes" or "carriers.
""



By analyzing CIA documents from earlier days, we can understand the programs of the Agency and its government cousins.

Related: Former High Ranking CIA Agent Gives A Break Down On What The US Deep State And Shadow Government Is Comprised Of

Given the fact that the CIA’s umbrella research program, MKULTRA, went completely dark in 1962, and given the technological advances that have been made in the intervening years, we can draw inferences about present-day covert ops.

Document: May 20, 1975; sent by CIA Inspector General, Donald F. Chamberlain, to the Director of Central Intelligence, William Colby.

Subject: CIA activities at Fort Detrick, Maryland [in the 1952 period.

Fort Detrick was the center of US government chem / bio warfare research.

Here is the opening quote from the document:


“In early 1952, CIA effected an agreement with the Army Chemical Corp for the performance of certain research and development work by the Army Chemical Corp at the laboratory facilities of Special Operations Division, Army Biological Laboratories, Frederick, Maryland.”

And here is a key quote about a research project:


“Adaptation and testing of a non-discernible microbioinoculator (device for clandestine inoculation with BW/CW [biowarfare/chemicalwarfare] agents) to determine compatibility with various materials to assure that the microbioinoculator cannot be identified structurally or easily detected upon a detailed autopsy…”

Translation: The CIA would test a tiny device for injecting chemical and biological agents into people, killing them - and the fact of an injection would be difficult to prove during subsequent autopsy of the victims.

Death would appear to be from other causes or vectors.



Related: Are You A Mind-Controlled CIA Stooge? + The Term “Conspiracy Theory” Was Invented By The CIA In Order To Prevent Disbelief Of Official Government Stories

Aside from the obvious use of this method for assassinations, there is the further possibility of “epidemic fabrication.”

The application would be fairly simple. Covertly inject a few people with a germ - and later identify those people as “patient zeroes” or “carriers.”

From there, through the use of propaganda, initiate the idea that the disease is rapidly spreading.

By falsifying diagnostic tests on others - a simple matter since routine tests register many false positives - and claiming a list of common symptoms are indicators of the epidemic-disease (cough, fever, muscle ache, weakness, fatigue), the appearance of a pandemic can be created. (re: “many false positives”,… see, for example, The Massive Fraud Behind HIV Tests)

From that follow the usual steps: the government is rushing a vaccine into production; everyone should be vaccinated; people should avoid large gatherings; suspected carriers can be quarantined.


Staged Reality

The mass-vaccination campaign “against the rising epidemic” inflicts harm. Chemicals (e.g., aluminum, formaldehyde, mercury) and germs ordinarily found in vaccines are toxic and destructive.

So without even covertly placing “unusual” materials in vaccines, people are going to suffer consequences.


Power Outside the Matrix

You might ask, what about using the CIA method to cause a real epidemic? It’s possible, but the amount of injected (or aerosolized) virus would have to be quite large, for each person, in order to create illness. (For “virus concentration”, see the discussion on “titer” in this article).

Secret ops like this one are funded, go underground, morph, are sometimes shifted to other departments, and develop, over the years.

The public does not hear of them, and does not suspect that its government is devising ways to inflict damage abroad and at home.


Related Articles:

American Pravda: How The CIA Invented "Conspiracy Theories"

Bilderberg On Steroids - Meet The Secret CIA-Funded Group Behind The ‘War On Terror’

Mainstream Media Confirm Dalai Lama Is A CIA Asset



Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi

Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi

Fraudcast News: You Will Believe What the Media Tells You To
July 10 2023 | From: TruthStreamMedia / Various

Did you know that when Obama signed the 2013 NDAA, it effectively made government propaganda LEGAL for the first time since 1948 when the Smith-Mundt Act was passed (not that they weren't doing it anyway, but...ya know... the gloves are officially off).




Related: Mind Control Theories And Techniques Used By Mass Media

"The people will believe what the media tells them they believe."

- George Orwell





"All news is lies and all propaganda is disguised as news."

- Willy Munzenberg (Stalin's propaganda chief)

"The Central Intelligence Agency owns everyone of any significance in the major media."

- William Colby, former CIA director

"The media is a Counter-Intelligence organisation. The media backs every war. The role of the media and embedded historians is to surround the truth with a bodyguard of lies. "

- Greg Hallett

"The media tries to put a sad face on these things, painting them up as great human tragedies; but we all know the function of the media has never been to eliminate the evils of the world, no! Their job is to persuade us to accept those evils and get used to living with them. The powers that be want us to be passive observers."

- Burning Man, "Waking Life"

"Think of the press as a great keyboard on which the government can play."

- Joseph Goebbels, Nazi propaganda minister

"Newscasters who want to keep their careers afloat learn the fine art of evasion. We should never accuse them of doing a poor and sloppy job of reporting. If anything, with great skill they skirt around the most important points of a story. With much finesse they say a lot about very little, serving up heaps of junk news filled with so many empty calories and so few nutrients. Thus do they avoid offending those who wield politico-economic power. It is enough to take your breath away."

- Dr. Michael Parenti

"No one outside America any longer believes the US media or the US government... You can't believe a word the American media says. If they say anything correct, it's just an accident."

- Paul Craig Roberts

"Newspeak was the official language ... The purpose of Newspeak was not only to provide a medium of expression for the world-view and mental habits ... but to make all other modes of thought impossible. It was intended that when Newspeak had been adopted once and for all and Oldspeak forgotten, a heretical thought should be literally unthinkable."

- George Orwell


Related Articles:

CBS Reporter Calls Mainstream Press ‘Political Activists,’ ‘Propagandists’ + Max Blumental Proves Western Media A Propagandist For War Criminals

How To Stop The Media From Controlling Your Mind + Why The ‘Red Pill’ Has Become So Big


The Mainstream Media Lies

Four Words: Weapons Of Media Lies & When Corporate Power Is Your Real Government, Corporate Media Is State Media

The Business Of Journalists Is To Destroy The Truth & Americans Think The Media Is More Destructive Than Banks & Corporations + The Normals vs. Conspiracy Theorists

The Business Of Journalists Is To Destroy The Truth & Americans Think The Media Is More Destructive Than Banks & Corporations + The Normals vs. Conspiracy Theorists



Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi

Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi
WiFi Radiation – New Device Makes It Visible At Last
July 9 2023 | From: ElectricSense / Various

Luis Hernan has produced a series of photographs that show the strength of wireless signals according to color.

He’s also produced an app that can be downloaded to a smart phone which can act as a very basic EMF detector. The app is free.

Related: Can EMF Make Us More Susceptible To Coronavirus Infection? & FCC Chair Commits To Enhancing WiFi/5G During Pandemic Despite Warnings From Experts + The First Report Of 5G Injury & Health Advocate Urges Nelson City Council To Halt 5G Roll-Out

I spoke to Luis about his device and how he produced these photos. Here is the color code Luis used so you can understand his photos:

Blue – Denotes the weakest signal
Violet – Slightly stronger
Green – Slightly stronger
Yellow – Slightly stronger
Red – Strongest signal



Cell phone in WiFi mode – the red swirls above the phone show that the strongest signal is found nearest the phone



Cell phone in WiFi mode – the signal close to the phone appears weaker on this image than the previous one, probably because of the variable nature of the WiFi signal



Cell phone in WiFi mode – although the majority of weak signals are found furthest away from the phone there are some weak signals quite close




WiFi radiation on a domestic staircase – not surprisingly the WiFi router is in the cupboard on the left under the telephone



Wifi radiation at building entrance – interesting to see about halfway up the steps there is less WiFi radiation than further away from the building and then the radiation gets stronger as you go nearer to the entrance



WiFi radiation on an office staircase – the distribution of the colors suggest the WiFi router is situated on the next level



Cell phone in wireless mode under a metal step ladder – interesting to see how the metal step ladder impacts the distribution of the WiFi signal




Wifi radiation in a lounge environment – the distribution of the colors suggest there are multiple sources of WiFi radiation



WiFi radiation signals in a coffee bar – the router is situated near the window




Smart phones with Luis’s Kirlian app activated – the phones are suspended showing that the WiFi radiation strength varies in different parts of the room


How These Images Were Created

Luis used a DSLR camera mounted on a tripod. He took these pictures using long exposure photography. So he left the aperture open for about 5 minutes. Then he used what he calls an “Arduino based Kirlian device”. This is essentially a WiFi sensor connected to a simple processor connected to an LED strip. It's the LED strip that makes the colors.

These pictures were created by Luis moving his device through the whilst taking the photo. Luis wore dark clothes to avoid being included in the photo.


What These Photos Don't Mean

These images don't show all the wireless signals in a given area. There are several things to understand here:

  1. They only show the radiation where Luis moves his device around. So there is possibly/probably radiation present in the other areas on these photos which we cannot see.
  2. These images don't indicate how WiFi moves. The swirls we can see are caused by Luis moving his device through the air.
  3. These images don't show cell phone radiation. For the purpose of these pictures the device was calibrated to 2.4 Ghz. The only radiation shown is that in the 2.4 GHz


What These Photos Show

These photos show:

  1. That wireless is all around us.
  2. That this radiation reacts in a very unpredictable manner, its affected both by the furniture in the environment and by people.
  3. WiFi does not respect 100% the “proximity to the source” rule.

As Luis says, even just walking around the house will interfere with the propagation and strength of the field. Closing a wrong door, and a room can become a hotspot or a dead spot for wireless.



Related: 5G And IoT: A Trojan Horse + Wifi Linked To Cancer And DNA Damage, Says Report: Here’s What To Do


Free App

Luis has also created a free app for Android devices called the Kirlian Device Android app , which allows people to see the Wi-Fi on their smart phone. The app also emits sound, the more radiation present the higher the pitch.

The app can be downloaded here.


Can This App Replace An EMF Meter?

At the moment this app can only detect radiation in the 2.4 GHz range. Luis intends to create a future version which will detect cellular networks also. But even then this remains a crude way of measuring radiation.

This app doesn't replace an RF meter but if you've already got a smart phone it does allow you to detect radiation for free. If you've got kids with smart phones it can be a good way to make them aware of their exposures.

Luis is a student at Newcastle University in the UK.  These images are part of his Digital Ethereal project which aims to make the invisible visible.

Hat's off to Luis for undertaking this project and sharing these images. But as pretty as these images are let's not forget that these swirling colors let us see pulsed digital radiation (a.k.a electromagnetic fields) which thousands of studies link to adverse biological effects and a myriad of diseases and illnesses including cancer, brain tumors, infertility, DNA damage, suppression of the immune system and much more.


Related Articles:

Advertising Watchdog Partially Upholds 5G Advertisement Claiming Wireless Tech Is Harmful & Wifi, 5G And EMF Pollution Can Cause Psychiatric Effects In Humans, Plus Spontaneous Abortions, Infertility And Cellular DNA Damage

5G Network Uses Same EMF Waves As Pentagon Crowd Control System + NZ 5G Update: June 2018

What Parents Should Know About EMFs and WiFi & 5G Is An International Health Crisis In The Making



Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi

Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi
Putin Inspires Terror In New World Order: Dr. Barrett
July 8 2023 | From: PressTV / Various

[From 2014 - Historical but highly relevant] Russian President Vladimir Putin is standing up against West’s aggression aimed at completely destroying traditional nations and values and creating a New World Order global dictatorship, an analyst says.



Related: Putin Declares Victory Over New World Order: ‘Change Of Elites’ Coming Because Humanity Has ‘Woken Up’ + Facts And Opinions Suppressed By The Corrupt Mainstream Media & New Zealand: A Surveillance Society

Ongoing Western attempts to destabilize Ukraine, Syria and Iran as well as other countries are the “most recent examples of a decade-old pattern of aggression” which the Russian president is countering, Kevin Barrett, a professor of Islamic and Middle Eastern Studies, wrote in an article for Press TV website.


“In short, the New World Order – a shadowy group of global banking oligarchs bent on establishing a one-world dictatorship – is trying to overthrow every leader on earth who resists. Russian President Putin is resisting. That is why the Western propaganda machine is calling him names,” Barrett said.

He noted that Russia and Iran are both successfully resisting a New World Order dictatorship.

The commentator noted that the establishment of the Islamic Republic of Iran was a landmark event signaling an end to the “20th-century wave of militant secularism and atheism – and a revival of traditional religion.”



Related: Covert War Between Russia And Khazarian Jewry

He said the Russian president enjoys overwhelming popularity in his country for his defense of traditional religious values.


“Putin is stopping New World Order ‘creative destruction’ in Syria and Ukraine. He is part of a growing coalition opposing the NWO – not just religious traditionalists, but also progressive anti-globalization forces, including [late Venezuelan President] Hugo Chavez inspired anti-imperialists in Latin America,” Barrett pointed out.

He added that the world today is facing an epic struggle between those who espouse sacred values such as justice and decency and those who desire to destroy all values.

Barrett expressed hope that God would bless Putin, “who is putting the fear of God into the New World Order.”


Related Articles:

An Honest Assessment Of Putin + Kremlin Publishes Full Megan Kelly Putin Interview - NBC Cut The Best Parts

Putin’s Call For A New System And The 1944 Battle Of Bretton Woods: Lessons For Victory Day

Putin And Trump Versus The New World Order: The Final Battle

Ukraine Biolabs, Blood, Sand, Betrayal & U.S. Congress Admitted Nazi Role In Ukraine In 2015

Mainstream Media Manipulation / Controlling The Narrative + Mosaic Of Facts: Inside The Information War [Ukraine]

Victoria Nuland: Ukraine Has “Biological Research Facilities,” Worried Russia May Seize Them & Tucker Carlson On Secret US Biolabs In Ukraine - Why Are We Funding This?

Trump Announces Declassification Of Russia Collusion, Clinton Email Probe Documents & Betrayal, Infuriating Betrayal

CIA Fabricated Russiagate ‘Evidence’, Says Former NSA Tech Chief



Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi

Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi

The Relationship Between Compulsory Vaccination, Suicide & Euthanasia
July 7 2023 | From: TheContrail / Various

The corrupt medical profession and inherent dangers of vaccines: The issues of vaccines - suicide - euthanasia are all inseparable in terms of Nazi philosophy.



That is why the media all around the world at present are pushing propaganda articles about the need to pass new laws to legalize “youth suicide and euthanasia” as “free choice” but take away the “informed choice” for anti-vaccinations groups, because vaccines are going to be used as an integral method to kill off millions of targeted groups soon.

Related: Eleven Common Symptoms Of The Global Depopulation Slow Kill

Remember, in Nazi Germany it involved not only killing off undesirable groups of people by lethal injection and gassing, but mass sterilizing others so that they could not reproduce.

I have a younger sister who, like myself, is a retired physician in Holland who has worked in Belgium also so I am very well informed what is happening there now. Although I live in NZ and am elderly, I still keep myself well informed.

As one who was brought up under the Nazis during WWII,  I can assure you that your description calling most modern medical doctors ‘neo-Nazis’ although I hate to admit it, is absolutely true in every respect.

In fact, modern doctors in The Netherlands and Belgium now are much worse than the Nazi doctors ever were, and what has already happened in Belgium is spreading out across the whole western world including here in New Zealand at present.



Related: The NWO Depopulation Agenda Is The Only Explanation Why Expensive Mainstream Medicine Is Lethal

The problem is when you tell the average uninformed person the full truth like this claiming that these physicians are “Nazis,” which they really are, most people just pull back, because they simply  cannot comprehend their supposedly ‘friendly family doctor’ could possibly be such a devil. But he or she is.

This was the case in Nazi Germany also, as the masses historically have always had a sort of ‘blind faith’ in physicians going back to Plato.

According to the End-of-Life Choice Voluntary Euthanasia Society Of New Zealand Inc. the Horizon Poll conducted in May 16-23 2017 on 1274 people from the public aged 18 and over, 75% supported euthanasia and 11% were opposed.

This is very much worse than would have been the case under Hitler.


When you’ve got 75% of brainless morons like this in New Zealand already supporting politicians to pass new laws to engineer their own euthanasia, (which  includes their own children if these pea brains only knew it) then you have almost an entire nation remarkably voting for their own premature death.



Related: Eugenics And Population Control To Save The Planet, Says Berkeley Professor

I note you included in your previous email some YouTube clips illustrating what is going on in Belgium right now. But may I say it is much worse than that.

Already, doctors are euthanizing not only the elderly, but young people with even very slight mental problems, or for example girls or women who have been raped and say they psychologically can’t cope, or any young person who is suffering depression or is unemployed and disillusioned.

This is MUCH WORSE THAN THE NAZIS EVER DID in the Final Solution! It is only beginning to escalate in Europe presently, yet is in the process of expanding worldwide.

Now if the euthanasia of these people itself is not bad enough, do you know that already in about half of the cases these people are being murdered without their consent.



Related: Explaining The Methods (And Insane Reasoning) Behind The Depopulation Agenda

Yes that is right. People are getting admitted into hospital claiming they are suffering from  such and such, depression, mental instability or dizzy spells – and they don’t come home.

So you see what you perceptively said about compulsory vaccination relative to the Nuremberg Code, why informed voluntary consent is so vitally important, and if it is removed, it is really the “last straw” and the last step before this medical tyranny is implemented worldwide.

I mean to say, it is not far away from anyone who criticizes the government being classified as mentally unstable, then being arrested and given a lethal injection without his or her consent and sent on their way – to paradise or hell as the case may be.

Here are some more YouTube clips about it which you may not have seen which I’ve gleaned. If people will not get the message after watching these in a strange way they all deserve what’s coming – because the video clips here are simply irrefutable – stunning:


1. “The Case of Tom Mortier”  - The Euthanasia Deception Promo
 
2. Why a rape Victim Was Euthanized 

3. The Euthanasia Deception – Documentary Promo 
 
4. Belgian woman approved for euthanasia says she lives in ‘extremes’ 

5. Hugh Scher, Euthanasia Prevention Coalition, Parliamentary C-14 Hearing   

6. 17-year-old becomes first minor to die by euthanasia in Belgium 

7. Allow Me To Die: Euthanasia in Belgium   

8. Assisted Suicide My Own Choice Science Documentary   

9. 24 & ready to die 



Related Articles:


Has The Australian Government Gone Stark-Raving Mad? + Basic Vaccine Lies In The World Of Fake News

Ten Current Trends Of Operation Coronavirus As Of August 2021 & Vaccine Mandates And The "Great Reset"

Harvard Immunologist: Unvaccinated Children Pose Zero Risk To Anyone And Here’s Why + New York Times Confirms Natural News Investigation: Mumps Now Spread Mostly By Vaccinated Children

New Zealand Has The Highest Rate Of Teen Suicide In The Developed World

Genetics Are The New Eugenics: How GMO’s Reduce The Human Population & This Major Report On GMO Safety Has Just One Small Problem: Undisclosed Conflicts Of Interest

Eugenics: Population "Control", New World Order Style

Debt, Vaccines And Food As A Weapon: When International Aid Is Used For Population Control



Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi

Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi
No Evidence Of A Human - Induced Sea Level Increase: Dr. Sterling H. Burnett
July 6 2023 | From: BreakingViews / Various

Environmental activists, mainstream media outlets, and many scientists routinely claim governments must take drastic action to transform the world’s economic system, including ending the use of fossil fuels
, or island nations will disappear beneath the seas and low-lying coastal cities will be swamped, forcing a great migration of populations inland..



To back up their claims, they cite statements from the Intergovernmental Panel on Climate Change (IPCC) asserting it is "very likely" sea level rise has accelerated since the middle of the twentieth century in response to warming caused by rising greenhouse gas emissions.

Related: Greta Crestfallen After 'World's Largest Iceberg' Turns Out To Be Part Of Normal Cycle

The IPCC, however, bases its claim on computer model projections instead of measured, real-life data.

Data lend little support to the claim seas are rising at a historically unusual or increasingly rapid rate. Global sea levels have risen by approximately 400 feet since the beginning of the end of the most recent ice age (approximately 20,000 years ago), with the sea level rise slowing and increasing over periods of tens, hundreds, and thousands of years over the past 20,000 years, having nothing whatsoever to do with human activities.

Research shows most of the islands making up nations such as Tuvalu and the Maldives are gaining land and mass, not losing it.

A peer-reviewed study that examined 600 coral reef islands in the Pacific and Indian Oceans reported approximately 40 percent of those islands remained stable and 40 percent grew.



Related: UN IPCC Scientist Blows Whistle On Lies About Climate, Sea Level

More evidence they and coastal areas in Florida and Hawaii, for instance, aren’t sinking beneath the waves can be inferred from the fact that the populations on these island nations and the coastal United States are increasing instead of fleeing, and they are putting up new, expensive buildings and associated infrastructure daily.

A 2019 report by Drs. Craig Idso, David Legates, and the late S. Fred Singer confirms sea levels have not been rising at an unusual rate in recent years.

After examining long-term data from tidal gauges and other sources, Idso, Legates, and Singer write;
:


"The highest quality coastal tide gauges from around the world show no evidence of acceleration since the 1920s."



Related: Chinese Company Claims Its Hydrogen-Powered Vehicle Can Travel 500km Using Only Water As Fuel & The Big Electric Vehicle Lie: Electric Cars Are Not “Zero Emissions,” And Their Ecological Impact Is Actually Dirtier Than Diesel Trucks

The difference between data recorded by the global tidal gauge system and projections made by various purported climate authorities is because "[l]ike ice melting, sea-level rise is a research area that has recently come to be dominated by computer models," the authors write.



"Whereas researchers working with datasets built from long-term coastal tide gauges typically report a slow linear rate of sea-level rise, computer modelers assume a significant anthropogenic forcing and tune their models to find or predict an acceleration of the rate of rise."

Human actions, such as the construction of barriers, channeling of rivers, conversion of coastal wetlands into densely populated metropolitan areas, and draining of coastal aquifers for human consumption (which causes land subsidence) have undoubtedly made some coastal regions and populations more vulnerable to rising seas.



Related: Let's Review 50 Years Of Dire Climate Forecasts And What Actually Happened & New Zealand Climate Commission’s Radical Plan

Nonetheless, there is little evidence increased greenhouse gas emissions are contributing to ocean rise.

In a 2017 Heartland Institute study, geophysicist Dennis Hedke analyzed data from 10 coastal cities with relatively long and reliable sea-level records and found there was no correlation between changes in sea levels at these locations and rising carbon dioxide levels.

For some cities, the rate of sea level rise has remained virtually constant, neither increasing nor declining appreciably from the rates experienced before humans began adding substantial amounts of greenhouse gases to the atmosphere.

Other cities, such as Ceuta, Spain, have experienced very little sea level rise over the past century, exhibiting almost a flat trend line well below the historic rate of global sea level rise of approximately seven inches per century.

Other cities, such as Sitka, Alaska, have experienced falling sea levels. Still others, such as Atlantic City, New Jersey, have experienced a large, rapid increase in sea levels.

The point is different areas around the world are having different experiences with sea levels, with differences in the rate of sea level rise being a result of localized conditions, not global climate change.



Related: Lockdowns to combat climate change, emissions, and consumption of red meat are coming; the beta tests are over

Some alarmists have recently tried to respond to observation that claims of accelerating rates of sea level rise are based on computer models alone, not hard data, by citing satellite-reported sea-level data collected by University of Colorado researchers.

Their dataset indicates seas are rising by approximately 3.3 mm per year, much higher than the annual rise of approximately one to two mm recorded at tidal stations, a rate that has changed little over the century or so for which we have adequate records.

The rate of rise claimed by the University of Colorado researchers is a result of statistical sleight of hand, produced by mixing data from four different satellites: combining data from two earlier satellites and two later satellites that record significantly higher rates of sea-level rise than the earlier two satellites.

As meteorologist Anthony Watts points out, the earlier dataset shows a much smaller trend of sea level rise than the latter two satellites:

Neither set of the satellite record shows any accelerating trend. The UC scientists simply combined the two dissimilar data sets, plotted a new trend showing acceleration, and didn’t mention the difference.



That one little burp by Mt Etna already put more than 10,000 times the carbon dioxide into the atmosphere than mankind has in our ENTIRE time on earth - but don't worry - a scam is in the works to tax you and your miniscule 'footprint'...

Related: Climate Change: The Con Behind the Covid Curtain

This is either incompetent or dishonest, and certainly not up to even the simplest of basic science principles. Virtually any high school or college student who presented such work for a class would get called out on it by their instructor for showing a false trend.

Our knowledge of previous interglacial cycles indicates seas will continue rising unless and until the next ice age comes, notwithstanding any efforts humanity may make to stem the tides.

It makes sense to prepare for rising seas by hardening coastal areas, discouraging ill-advised coastal development, and making people living along coasts aware investments made there could be swallowed by rising water.

Ending the use of fossil fuels and giving ever-larger governments increasing power over peoples’ lives will not stop the seas from rising and will only make people poorer and less free.


Related Articles:

Climate Change – natural phenomenon or man-made “threat”

Professor Shuts Down BBC's Propaganda In Real Time

Amazing Science Lesson: Environmentalists Declare War On Photosynthesis In Stupefying Effort To Exterminate All Recognizable Life On Planet Earth

Meet Naomi Seibt - The 19-Year-Old, Blond Antidote To Greta Thunberg & NZ Government Begins National Climate Indoctrination Of Children

Exposing The Bogus "97% Consensus" Claim Over Climate Change 'Science' & Top-Level Climate Modeler Spills The Beans On The ‘Nonsense’ Of ‘Global Warming Crisis’

Head Of World Meteorological Organization Slams Climate Extremists, In Unprecedented Move & NASA Admits That Climate Change Occurs Because Of Changes In Earth’s Solar Orbit, And Not Because Of SUVs And Fossil Fuels

Climate Change Hoax Collapses As Michael Mann’s Bogus “Hockey Stick” Graph Defamation Lawsuit Dismissed By The Supreme Court Of British Columbia

ClimateChangeGate: The Hidden Agenda Behind The Huge Hoax And Global Criminal Conspiracy & Climate Change Hoax Collapses As New Science Finds Human Activity Has Virtually Zero Impact On Global Temperatures

"The UN's 'Woke' Climate Change Propaganda Is An Insult To Science" + “What They Haven’t Told You About Climate Change.” – According To The Co-Founder of Greenpeace

Same Media That Once Deemed Chemtrails A Conspiracy Theory Now Openly Promotes Chemtrailing The Entire Planet To “End Climate Change” & Global Geoengineering (Chemtrails) Experiment Pushed By Bill Gates Also Funded By Nazi-Linked Alfred P. Sloan Foundation, Linked To Eugenics And Depopulation

Serious Errors Found In Widely Cited Global Warming Study


Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi

Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi
A Masterclass In Propaganda & Transgressing The Logic Of The New Tyrannical Normal
July 5 2023 | From: NZPCR / OffGuardian / Various

“It is true that you may fool all of the people some of the time; you can even fool some of the people all of the time; but you can’t fool all of the people all of the time.” - President Abraham Lincoln



When Jacinda Ardern took office in 2017, she promised her government would be the most open and transparent New Zealand had seen.

Related: Cover Stories Are Used To Control Explanations & Medical Propaganda Headlines For Gullible Minds

In her first formal speech to Parliament she pledged:


"This government will foster a more open and democratic society. It will strengthen transparency around official information.”

Since that time, the Government’s “iron grip” on the control of information has tightened and it is harder now than ever to get information.

This is the view of one of New Zealand’s most experienced political journalists, Stuff’s Andrea Vance, who last weekend explained:


"In my 20-year plus time as a journalist, this Government is one of the most thin-skinned and secretive I have experienced. Many of my colleagues say the same…

It’s now very difficult for journalists to get to the heart and the truth of a story. We are up against an army of well-paid spin doctors.

At every level, the Government manipulates the flow of information…

Even squeezing basic facts out of an agency is a frustrating, torturous and often futile exercise.”

She explains that since “the current Government took office, the number of communications specialists have ballooned. Each minister has at least two press secretaries. Ardern has four.”

The team assisting the Prime Minister to shape her public image is headed by her chief press secretary, Andrew Campbell, with former Stuff business editor Ellen Read as his deputy.



Related: Ardern Intent On Smashing Free Speech

Essentially, they handle incoming questions for the prime minister, help with speech writing, set up interviews and press conferences, and accompany the PM through media engagements.

In addition, the prime minister’s office not only controls what other members of the Cabinet are saying, but they go to great lengths to “make sure their audience is captured, starting the week and cementing the agenda with a conference call with political editors”.

It is not just politicians that have press secretaries – so too do government departments, and under our PR-savvy Prime Minister, the number is skyrocketing.

In the year Labour took office, the Ministry for the Environment had 10 PR staff – they now have 18. The Ministry for Foreign Affairs and Trade more than doubled their staff – up to 25.

MBIE blew out from 48 staff to 64, with the New Zealand Transport Agency, which had 26 communications staff five years ago, now employing a staggering 72!

With this PR army promoting an image of government benevolence and attempting to block unwanted scrutiny, even basic requests for information are now being denied.

Andrea Vance describes how attempts by two senior journalists to interview Foreign Minister Nanaia Mahuta, at a time of intense interest in the China-Australia-New-Zealand relationship, were refused – not because of geo-political sensitivities, nor a diary clash, but because “the paranoid and hyper-sensitive minister objected to taking questions from two journalists at once.”



Related: China’s Massive Amount Of Immunotoxic 5G Networking And The Wuhan Coronavirus: The Emperor’s New Virus

That same Minister, with her local government hat on, had released radical proposals for ‘three waters’ reforms that would essentially centralise the management of drinking water, wastewater, and storm water operations from local councils to mega-agencies, with 50 percent control allocated to private sector tribal corporations.

Yet, she “refused to answer detailed questions about the proposed changes”, agreeing to only one interview – with a ‘friendly’ state broadcaster. The whole debacle represented “a serious blow to accountability”.

It turns out that journalists who ask hard questions and challenge the Government’s spin are increasingly being side lined – refused interviews, excluded from press conferences, and ignored at media stand-ups.

Government departments are also being obstructive, refusing to answer Official Information Requests unless ordered to do so by the Ombudsman.

As a result, queries that should have been responded to within 20 working days are taking months to answer with much of the information, when it is eventually released, heavily redacted.

These are not the actions of the open and transparent government promised by Jacinda Ardern, but of an increasingly totalitarian regime.



Related: The Unseen Damages Fact Checking Has On Public Discourse

In her article Andrea Vance asks why the difficulties faced by journalists should matter to the public: “Why should you care?”

She then explains:


"Because the public’s impression of this government is the very opposite. They see a prime minister that has captivated the world with her ‘authentic’ communication style, intimate social media postings, daily Covid briefings and proactive releases of Cabinet papers.

It is an artfully-crafted mirage, because the reality is very different. This is a Government that is only generous with the information that it chooses to share.”

Jacinda Ardern is, of course, a public relations graduate, with a Bachelor of Communication Studies in Public Relations and Political Science from Waikato University.

As a result, when faced with a pandemic and an election in 2020, Prime Minister Ardern’s confidence in the power of PR led her to employ an army of communications experts to help her win the Covid-PR war and the election.



Related: A Primer For The Propagandized: Fear Is The Mind-Killer & Whistleblower: Newspaper Industry Chiefs Criminally Negligent Over Covid Scaremongering

As George Orwell said, if you control the language, you can control the mind, and that is certainly how it all played out. Using carefully crafted lines like “the team of 5 million”, Jacinda Ardern was able to persuade the nation that she was saving lives – and deserved to be re-elected

Official information revealed that by the end of May 2020, the cost of the PM’s public relations campaign – which had built a formidable propaganda machine involving 28 advertising, marketing and communications contractors – was a staggering $16 million dollars:


"The majority was to two firms who are listed as communications directors by the Department of the Prime Minister and Cabinet.

Clemenger BBDO was paid $3m for its role, which involved the clear and concise messaging such as ‘stay home, save lives’.

But the biggest earner OMD, a multinational advertising firm… was paid $12m for its role in the response.”

It turns out that everything from “go hard, go early” to the “be kind to each other” messaging was carefully planned, tested, and executed by experts.

At the time, Newstalk ZB’s Mike Hosking was scathing that so much money was being spent on ‘spin’:

“Extraordinary, isn’t it? It shows just how much we got played by a government that was as desperate to score points as it was to actually address a health crisis.




Is the Next Step For Cancel Culture To Drive Certain People From All Society?







Related:
Cancel Culture: Its Origins and Implications




Is communication important? Of course. But do you need to pay $16 million for it?

No. This wasn’t simple instruction that any government can come up with, this was clearly a highly planned, seriously worked over piece of strategy designed for maximum political impact.

And the irony is, from the advertising agencies point of view, it worked. We got sucked in, followed orders and came out hailing the Prime Minister with a 59 percent share in a poll. Value for money then?

Or a master piece of fantastically expensive spin? Again, we were played like a fiddle.

Stuff’s Political Editor Luke Malpass agreed:


"The Ardern Government has been delivering a masterclass in propaganda since Covid began.

It has presented the plan that it formulated as the only feasible option, set up rules and language to prosecute that agenda and rhetorically crushed all opposition.

That was buttressed over the months by the fact that the Government’s plan was sound, effectively carried out and delivered comparatively very good results. Labour won a crushing election victory off the back of it.”

Indeed, the $16 million of taxpayers’ money bought Labour a masterly election campaign – by keeping the country’s focus on the virus, and constantly repeating the mantra that it was our team of 5 million that defeated it, they communicated a powerful party line: by sticking together we won the Covid battle and by staying with Labour we will win the battle to rebuild our nation.

Labour’s regular election year focus group polling would have told them that to win over ‘soft’ National voters they needed to shift into the political centre ground and temper their socialist ambitions.



Related: It's time to declare "D-Day" against the evil tech monopolists and their war against human rights

As a result, Labour based their election manifesto on their 2017 agenda, and used conservative slogans such as a ‘strong and stable’ government and a ‘steady pair of hands’.

Their PR machine was evident on the campaign trail as political commentator Richard Harman explained at the time:


"On the road with Ardern, they had a much more experienced and substantial team. They had two press secretaries with the Prime Minister; National had one.

Labour had a professional video crew for social media; National had a staffer with an iPhone. Labour had its former party president and Minister, Ruth Dyson, as its advance person carefully setting up events that Ardern was going to and checking them out to avoid pitfalls.

There was little evidence of any advance work [by National].”

After the election, Jacinda Ardern acknowledged that her support had come from across the political spectrum,


"To those amongst you who may not have supported Labour before… I say thank you. We will not take your support for granted. And I can promise you, we will be a party that governs for every New Zealander.”

In a media conference the next day, she specifically reassured New Zealanders about the agenda she intended to roll out, saying, “None of it will be new, because we laid the foundations for these next three years in the previous three years.”

But the truth is that much of what Jacinda Ardern has done since the election is new to the public.



Related: What The New Acceptability Of The Lab Leak Origin Tells Us About Media Outlets & COVID-19 – The Real Truth

Not only was her He Puapua report – which provides a blueprint for Maori sovereignty over New Zealand by 2040 – not disclosed to the voters during the campaign, but it’s public release was deliberately delayed until after the election.

It is in this politically-charged environment, that this week’s NZCPR Guest Commentator, journalist Graham Adams outlines the difficulties in holding a Prime Minister to account, who is PR-driven and, it seems, is prepared to ‘bend the truth beyond breaking point’:


"Jacinda Ardern has offered herself as a hostage to fortune by repeatedly denying that the doctrine of ‘white privilege’ is being taught in schools, or that the teaching curriculum mentions it anywhere, or that it is part of her ‘government’s agenda’.

“She has conceded that white privilege… might have been taught by a teacher somewhere at some time in some school but insists it isn’t official policy.

In denying that discussing white privilege is an approved part of teaching in schools, evidence shows she may have been bending the truth beyond breaking point.

The official education document Te Hurihanganui mentions ‘white privilege’ in its opening paragraphs. The government has funded the programme to the tune of $42 million.

Launched in October 2020, it has now been established in numerous schools in Nelson, Te Puke, Porirua and Southland, with more to come.”

Graham points out:


"For someone who prides herself on mastering the details of her government’s policies, it’s impossible to believe Ardern is simply ill informed or forgetful about Te Hurihanganui’s existence or what it recommends.”

He wonders whether the motivation for the PM’s repeated denials – that leave her open to charges of lying – could be that Labour’s polling is showing a high degree of public disquiet over anti-racism programmes in schools and the imposition of the He Puapua plan for tribal rule.

Perhaps this means the Ardern Government’s “artfully-crafted mirage” that Andrea Vance so eloquently describes, is finally starting to fracture.



Related: The Historical & Current Situations In Aotearoa New Zealand

Certainly, the fact that the Government is rolling out the radical He Puapua in secret, instead of openly, indicates that even Labour supporters are becoming concerned.

If they really understood the truth – the serious threat to democracy that the PM’s separatist agenda represents and the deeply divided society it would create – their opposition and sense of betrayal would intensify.

On this issue, we the majority have the mandate – Jacinda Ardern does not.


Related Articles:

Local Fox News Reporter Says Network Is ‘Muzzling’ Her Live on the Air, Will Go to Project Veritas

The Manipulated Human Being Is Capable of Anything, Except Saying NO

Truthful Accounts: A View from Nicaragua on Propaganda and Corporate Media Journalists

The dangers of putting media on the government’s payroll

What If The Mainstream Media Had Told The Truth?


Globalist Revolution

Redacted - how information the public should know about disappears from view

Tucker Carlson Says Show Is Being Targeted for Cancelation

What REALLY Got Gina Carano Cancelled

Facebook’s Australia News Ban Hits State Governments, Health Departments, and Weather Services

Poland Proposes $13.5 Million Fines for Tech Giants Engaging in Ideological Censorship

Opinion: An Amazon Book Burning

Facebook Unfriends Australia: The Triumph of Epistemic Chaos

On the Efforts to Silence Tucker Carlson, Sean Hannity

Russia’s President Putin Warns That Censorship Is Killing American Democracy

Governor: Big Fines Coming Against Big Tech Censorship | Facts Matter

Senator Questions Mark Zuckerberg On Censorship After Facebook Whistleblower Comes Forward

Two Young BBC Journalists Dead From Mysterious “Short Illness” After AstraZeneca CoviShield Vaccine

Cyber strike against America’s power grid and energy infrastructure seeks to take down the nation and sow chaos so that bad actors can cover their tracks



Transgressing The Logic Of The New Tyrannical Normal

An Essay on the Struggle for Reason and Freedom.



Scholars have speculated that Shirley Jackson’s timeless story The Lottery (1948) was a contemplation of and attempt to make sense of the ghastly forms of rationalization at work in Nazi death camps uncovered during the postwar Nuremberg trials.


Related: The Truth About The Great Reset

While the major theme of Jackson’s story, man’s general inhumanity toward humankind, continues to reverberate, the development of a certain character within the tale speaks even more profoundly to the present.

Old Man Warner and his unblinking obedience to strange abstractions embody a banality of evil that appears in many of his fellow townsfolk and the codes of behavior and speech they are goaded by bizarre norms to embrace.

Questioning these abstractions and the traditions that animate them comes at a substantial price, however.

“Every man has his price” (Walpole, 1734) - an utterance on the lips of both despots and saints, past and present, eager to embrace or repel tyranny. The observation has the ring both of a universal truth and a hasty generalization.

In Jackson’s story, the price for the old man, intent to guard the prevailing socioeconomic order, was his own humanity.

In the present, the saying resonates with those whose minds have been effectively dazzled by the global Pavlovian project observable in state-corporate propaganda which claims that a virus with a 99.8% survival rate spells certain doom for the world.



Related: The ‘Great Reset’: A Technocratic Agenda That Waited Years For A Global Crisis To Exploit & Globalists Will Need Another Crisis As Their Reset Agenda Fails

They who demand that every living creature obey, without question, the unscientific irrational contradictory plans of the unfolding state-corporate global medical hegemony.

The competitively compliant masses, armed with faculties of reason effectively effaced, are all too happy to publicly signal their subservience and submit their civil and human rights to a technocratic global lordship consolidating the kind of control and power that will remain, forevermore, impervious to any challenge.

How observable facts such as these elude the notice of so many people today is covered, most notably, in a popular university course in propaganda at New York University.

Mark Crispin Miller, world-renowned professor of media, culture and communication, has given Mass Persuasion and Propaganda for decades.

In these times, however, of state-sanctioned “woke totalitarianism” enforced by its global big tech guardians, the course and its most famous professor was bound to become a target for cancellation.

The operation against Professor Miller began in earnest last year when a disgruntled student falsely claimed that her teacher was nurturing a student-led mutiny against the NYU administration for its masking policies.

The latest and most baffling attack on Miller has emerged, however, with the publication of a hit piece titled “The Professor of Paranoia” in the Chronicle of Higher Education - a rank illustration of the truths we might see in the aphorism that every man can be bought.



Related: The Wizard Of Oz: The Dark Reality That The Deep State Hides From The World

Inexplicably, its author Mark Dery marks out his territorial criticism of Miller by explicitly signaling his own ideological presuppositions - a liberal pose that can only pretend to be progressive, open-minded, balanced and enlightened by an unflagging pursuit of unvarnished truth.

What profits the man who gives up his intellectual integrity for an ideology demanding all empirical knowledge pass through the politically correct filters set by the Federal Ministry of Truth

Dery muses over decades past, reading Miller’s classic 1988 volume, Boxed In: The Culture of TV and cites our mutually favorite chapter, “Big Brother Is You, Watching.”

He references a salient passage that (in his mind apparently) should serve to chasten Miller for his contemporary transgressions:


"TV ‘reduces all of its proponents to blind spectators of their own annihilation’”

- Boxed In: The Culture of TV, 1988, p. 331.

Dery proceeds to call up a host of Miller’s supposed offenses against all accepted expressions of scholarly integrity - uninvestigated 9/11 intrigue, stolen elections, CIA-backed psychological operations against domestic populations, and now the new social and economic “Normal” promulgated by a transnational network of elite Davos movers and shakers.



Related: Cycles Of History Ignored - Canceling History

Scoffing, as he does, at the very idea of addressing such pressing issues comes at the cost of one’s own intellect, a mental annihilation akin to that bizarre period of public discourse in the wake of 9/11 when FOX News was the unrivalled PR arm of the GOP.

The passage from Boxed In that Dery selected as a weapon against Miller serves as the most glaring example of irony.

The very examples Dery cites in his critique show that only those weaned on TV have not yet sampled the solid foods of scholarship - the disinterested science that political institutions have tried for years to marginalize, ignore, or erase.

What does Mark Dery receive beyond keeping up perverse social appearances like those erected in years past by likes of Bill O’Reilly and Sean Hannity - major cheerleaders for the annihilation of countless souls in the post-9/11 regime-change wars?

Today, is it any wonder to academics who steadfastly refuse to betray the call of their vocation, no matter the cost, that such a criticism of Miller would be featured in a journal advocating for higher education?

For anyone in the education field who has witnessed larger forces of the corporate-state complex prevail upon academe and reengineer institutions over the past number of decades, it is impossible not to see the sort of friendly fascism that Bertram Gross had warned about in 1980 when he saw an emerging new order in which:


"More concentrated, unscrupulous, repressive, and militaristic control by a Big Business-Big Government partnership preserve[s] the privileges of the ultra-rich, the corporate overseers, and the brass in the military and civilian order"

-
Friendly Fascism (Gross, 1980) p. 167).

Gross showed plainly how public discourse controlled by the gatekeepers helps centers of power frame the reengineering of the social world as “reasonable” and inexorable because it is overtly friendly - to business - and, thus, integral to the logic of an efficient and free market.

The problem for public intellectuals like Miller who work tirelessly to preserve natural and civil rights is disarming the dissemblers and blind servants of power who come with a wink and a smile trying to reassure the masses to trust the plan.



Related: Confronting A Tyrannical System Without Firing A Single Shot

Since 9/11, the ethos of business as usual has been focused on normalizing the tyrannical demands of security as asserted by the transnational partnerships among “the corporate overseers and the brass in the military and civilian order” (Gross, 1980, p. 167).

Old Man Warner would be proud to see so many of his heirs today maintaining the lottery and asserting the need to follow hideous traditions no matter where they lead. Dery notes that:


"Extreme disbelief - a skepticism so radical it dismisses nearly every official narrative as propaganda - can make for strange bedfellows.”

In a sane world, this could not be any truer.


Related Articles:

Hide and Seek: How politicians seek to hide your information away

‘Dangerous’ New Wave of Censorship Culminating in the US: Dershowitz

DeSantis Signs Bill to Stop Big Tech Censorship of Floridians

Woke-a-Cola: How To Destroy A World-Leading Brand In 60 Seconds

Texas Governor Backs Bill Prohibiting Social Media Censorship of Conservative Speech

Banned Dr. Seuss Books Already Selling For Hundreds Of Dollars On Ebay

Amazon Quietly Bans Books Containing Undefined ‘Hate Speech’

Banned Dr. Seuss Books Already Selling For Hundreds Of Dollars On Ebay

How to Survive “Cancel Culture” When You Have Unpopular Opinions

Ever Expanding Censorship in the “Land of the Free”

The Culture Curators Want to Think for You

The Authoritarian Noose Tightens

Films, Videos, and Publications Classification (Urgent Interim Classification of Publications and Prevention of Online Harm) Amendment Bill

Biden Administration Urges Supreme Court to Allow Schools to Censor Student Expression Online

Harry Potter quiz cancelled at festival delving into cancel culture

Technocratic-Corporate-Covitocracy

Constitutional Lawyer Reveals Trump’s Killshot to Defeat Voter Fraud

Situation Update, Dec. 10th – Texas lawsuit with SCOTUS reveals pathway to instant victory for Trump

Texas Files Lawsuit Asks SCOTUS To Block 4 States From Participating in Electoral College

YouTube Bans Creators From Questioning 2020 Presidential Election; Bans Investigating Possible Fraud

Pennsylvania House Leaders File Brief to Support Texas in Supreme Court Lawsuit Against Pennsylvania

39 States Pick Sides in Texas Supreme Court Election Challenge

Election Supervisor Shows on Video How Dominion Software Allows Changing, Adding Votes

YouTube Starts Removing Election Fraud Content; Experts Say It’s Unprecedented

Inauguration Committee Fails to Pass Resolution Acknowledging Biden as President-Elect

C. J. Hopkins Explains How the Western Presstitutes Demonized President Trump

CEO's GRILLED over Whistleblower Evidence of De-platforming Collusion Between Big Tech

Sen. Hawley Reveals Secret Info From FB Whistleblower That Leaves Zuckerberg SPEECHLESS

YouTube Suspends Pro-Trump News Network OANN, Completely Demonetizes Channel Over Unlisted Video

Edward Snowden On Big Tech Companies, Like Facebook, Censoring & Controlling Information

Facebook Fact-Checker Funded by Chinese Money Through TikTok


Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi

Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi

The Twenty One Goals Of The Illuminati And The Committee Of 300 + The Sides Are Being Drawn Up Now
July 4 2023 | From: EducateYourself / Farouk

From: 'Conspirators' Hierachy: The Story of The Committee of 300' [Historical but relevant articles]



By Dr. John Coleman.(Written circa 1993)

Related: Behold, A Pale Horse: Its Rider Is Named Neocon And Hell Follows Him

1. To establish a One World Government/New World Order with a unified church and monetary system under their direction. The One World Government began to set up its church in the 1920:s and 30:s, for they realized the need for a religious belief inherent in mankind must have an outlet and, therefore, set up a "church" body to channel that belief in the direction they desired.


2. To bring about the utter destruction of all national identity and national pride, which was a primary consideration if the concept of a One World Government was to work.


3. To engineer and bring about the destruction of religion, and more especially, the Christian Religion, with the one exception, their own creation, as mentioned above.



Related: The Vision Of Technocracy


4. To establish the ability to control of each and every person through means of mind control and what Zbignew Brzezinski called techonotronics, which would create human-like robots and a system of terror which would make Felix Dzerzinhski's Red Terror look like children at play.


5. To bring about the end to all industrialization and to end the production of nuclear generated electric power in what they call "the post-industrial zero-growth society". Excepted are the computer- and service industries. US industries that remain will be exported to countries such as Mexico where abundant slave labor is available.

As we saw in 1993, this has become a fact through the passage of the North American Free Trade Agreement, known as NAFTA.

Unemployables in the US, in the wake of industrial destruction, will either become opium-heroin and/or cocaine addicts, or become statistics in the elimination of the "excess population" process we know of today as Global 2000.


6. To encourage, and eventually legalize the use of drugs and make pornography an "art-form", which will be widely accepted and, eventually, become quite commonplace.



Related: CIA MKULTRA: Drugs To Take Down The Nation


7. To bring about depopulation of large cities according to the trial run carried out by the Pol Pot regime in Cambodia. It is interesting to note that Pol Pot's genocidal plans were drawn up in the US by one of the Club of Rome's research foundations, and overseen by Thomas Enders, a high-ranking State Department official. It is also interesting that the committee is currently seeking to reinstate the Pol Pot butchers in Cambodia.


8. To suppress all scientific development except for those deemed beneficial by the Illuminati. Especially targeted is nuclear energy for peaceful purposes. Particularly hated are the fusion experiments currently being scorned and ridiculed by the Illuminati and its jackals of the press.

Development of the fusion torch would blow the Illuminati's conception of "limited natural resources" right out of the window. A fusion torch, properly used, could create unlimited and as yet untapped natural resources, even from the most ordinary substances.



Related: Tesla’s Anti-Gravity Research In Use In Dozens Of Secretive Military Projects

Fusion torch uses are legion, and would benefit mankind in a manner which, as yet, is not even remotely comprehended by the public.


9. To cause. by means of A) limited wars in the advanced countries, B) by means of starvation and diseases in the Third World countries, the death of three billion people by the year 2050, people they call "useless eaters". The Committee of 300 (Illuminati) commissioned Cyrus Vance to write a paper on this subject of how to bring about such genocide.

The paper was produced under the title "Global 2000 Report" and was accepted and approved for action by former President James Earl Carter, and Edwin Muskie, then Secretary of States, for and on behalf of the US Government. Under the terms of the Global 2000 Report, the population of the US is to be reduced by 100 million by the year of 2050.



Related:
Sinister Sites: The Georgia Guidestones


10. To weaken the moral fiber of the nation and to demoralize workers in the labor class by creating mass unemployment. As jobs dwindle due to the post industrial zero growth policies introduced by the Club of Rome, the report envisages demoralized and discouraged workers resorting to alcohol and drugs.

The youth of the land will be encouraged by means of rock music and drugs to rebel against the status quo, thus undermining and eventually destroying the family unit. In this regard, the Committee commissioned Tavistock Institute to prepare a blueprint as to how this could be achieved.

Tavistock directed Stanford Research to undertake the work under the direction of Professor Willis Harmon. This work later became known as the "Aquarian Conspiracy".


11. To keep people everywhere from deciding their own destinies by means of one created crisis after another and then "managing" such crises.



Related: 1924 Newspaper Article Outlines Six Goals Of The Illuminati

This will confuse and demoralize the population to the extent where faced with too many choices, apathy on a massive scale will result. In the case of the US, an agency for Crisis Management is already in place. It is called the Federal Emergency Management Agency (FEMA), whose existence I first enclosed in 1980.


12. To introduce new cults and continue to boost those already functioning which include rock music gangsters such as the Rolling Stones (a gangster group much favored by European Black Nobility), and all of the Tavistock-created rock groups which began with the Beatles.


13. To continue to build up the cult of Christian Fundamentalism begun by the British East India Company's servant Darby, which will be misused to strengthen the Zionist State of Israel by identifying with the Jews through the myth of "God's chosen people", and by donating very substantial amounts of money to what they mistakenly believe is a religious cause in the furtherance of Christianity.


14. To press for the spread of religious cults such as the Moslem Brotherhood, Moslem Fundamentalism, the Sikhs, and to carry out mind control experiments of the Jim Jones and "Son of Sam" type.



Related: The Committee of 300 | The Conspiracy to Rule the World

It is worth noting that the late Khomeini was a creation of British Military Intelligence Div. 6, MI6. This detailed work spelled out the step-by-step process which the US Government implemented to put Khomeini in power.


15. To export "religious liberation" ideas around the world so as to undermine all existing religions, but more especially the Christian religion. This began with the "Jesuit Liberation Theology", that brought an end to the Somoza Family rule in Nicaragua, and which today is destroying El Salvador, now 25 years into a "civil war".

Costa Rica and Honduras are also embroiled in revolutionary activities, instigated by the Jesuits. One very active entity engaged in the so-called liberation theology, is the Communist-oriented Mary Knoll Mission. This accounts for the extensive media attention to the murder of four of Mary Knoll's so-called nuns in El Salvador a few years ago.

The four nuns were Communist subversive agents and their activities were widely documented by the Government of El Salvador. The US press and the new media refused to give any space or coverage to the mass of documentation possessed by the Salvadorian Government, which proved what the Mary Knoll Mission nuns were doing in the country.

Mary Knoll is in service in many countries, and placed a leading role in bringing Communism to Rhodesia, Moçambique, Angola and South Africa.


16. To cause a total collapse of the world's economies and engender total political chaos.




Related: More Confessions Of An Economic Hit Man: "This Time, They’re Coming For Your Democracy"


17. To take control of all foreign and domestic policies of the US.


18. To give the fullest support to supranational institutions such as the United Nations, the International Monetary Fund (IMF), the Bank of International Settlements, the World Court and, as far as possible, make local institutions less effective, by gradually phasing them out or bringing them under the mantle of the UN.


19. To penetrate and subvert all governments, and work from within them to destroy the sovereign integrity of the nations represented by them.



Related: Anonymous: De-Mystifying The Concept Of The Deep State + Doctor Explains Why The Public Is So Stupid - Trusting The Government & Fake News


20. To organize a world-wide terrorist apparatus [Al-queda, ISIS, ISIL, etc.] and to negotiate with terrorists whenever terrorist activities take place. It will be recalled that it was Bettino Craxi, who persuaded the Italian and US Governments to negotiate with the Red Brigades kidnapers of Prime Minister Moro and General Dozier.

As an aside, Dozier was placed under strict orders not to talk what happened to him. Should he ever break that silence, he will no doubt be made "a horrible example of", in the manner in which Henry Kissinger dealt with Aldo Moro, Ali Bhutto and General Zia ul Haq.


21. To take control of education in America with the intent and purpose of utterly and completely destroying it.



Related: Unschooling: Radical Education That Produces Free Human Beings Instead Of Slaves

By 1993, the full force effect of this policy is becoming apparent, and will be even more destructive as primary and secondary schools begin to teach "Outcome Based Education" (OBE).




The Sides Are Being Drawn Up Now

Team A has USA-Trump, Russia-Putin and China-Xi (plus the Golden Dragons). Team B consists of the Poop (Pope), Committee of 300 Gang and the old Fiat Wealth held by Rothschilds’ Banksters and European old Royalty (?) Families.



Team A has the winning game plans as they have the largest global economies and the BIGGEST ARMIES.

Related: Footsteps of the Amanah

The 2017 G20 Meeting cleared the air on these sides. The Putin-Trump meeting sealed it. Eye contact and handshakes cemented relationships.



Related:
Trump, Putin Up Against The US Deep State + Report: DNC Files Copied Locally - Not Hacked By Russia

Much more to come. There are earthquakes all over the Western financial world as a result. It is now G3 plus 17 wannabe’s who had better get their acts together.

Of course the head Fraudster, the Pontiff, immediately called for a “One World Government” that must rope in The United States as “America has a distorted vision of the World” and that Americans must be ruled by a world government, as soon as possible, “for their own good”.

And so Yellin’ Yellen immediately comes out stating that the FED is going to continue raising rates and removing Dollar liquidity from the global markets (a stooge move “for America’s own good”?).



Related: Vatican Police 'Break Up Gay Orgy' At Home Of One Of Pope Francis' Advisors & Germany Dismantles Huge Ring Of 87,000 Members Involved In Child Abuse

Of course the Poop’s vision of the World is for him (not HIM) and his (NOT HIS) Church to be the defacto ruler of the whole World through the fraudulent and fallacious enslavement of all mankind through limited liability corporations and their minions controlling fiat financial institutions, governments and all major industries.

The “Trifuckya” of the US, Russia and China clearly derails this old philosophy and control system and all that cling to it. This Old Guard has been exposed and much, much more is to come.

So what is going to happen next?

I anticipate that there will be more financial turmoil. The Europeans see the writing on the wall concerning the EU and EURO and the immigration mess disrupting their economies.



Related: Exposed: The Nazi Roots Of The European Union

All of that is coming “un-done”. Pumping more fiat Euros to plug the dikes will not work as liberal socialism has already proven. Germany cannot hold it all together any more.

The Swiss and City of London banks have no more gold. And anyone with any sense (cents) is packing their bugout bags for their new homes in South America or New Zealand and moving their money to Dubai.

Financially the fiat money system is faced with an inevitable “re-valuation”. The question is whether this will be a “free fall disaster”, a “one off adjustment” or a “soft landing”?

Then there is the REAL option of the United States returning to its dejure “united States Republic” which is under genuine legal reaffirmations NOW and will redefine global finances and expose the frauds that have been perpetrated.

My feeling is that there will be an abrupt change as orchestrated by the US, Russia and China most likely through the AIIB and CHIPS system. This will be done in a series of steps.



Related: BRICS Bank, AIIB To Strengthen Global Financial System - Putin

Trump will have to close the FED, foreclose on the bankrupt United States of America, Inc. and USA, Inc. which in turn will re-establish the Republic while at the same time cause the shut down the IMF, World Bank, UN and BIS (all of which will have to undergo serious restructuring if they are to survive).

The gold and silver backed US Treasury Dollar, the Remimbi and Ruble will be the defacto global currencies. Every other country will then peg their currencies to these reserve currencies. The Yen, Euro and Pound will no longer be reserve currencies.

To cut the Poop’s umbilical cord of global slavery will require countries to pass legislation that removes the “limited liability” of corporations, trusts, LLC’s and all such derivations. Without “limited liability immunity” everyone in a company (and incorporated country, state, county or city) will be fully liable and accountable and responsible.



Related: Lawful And Legal: Why You Need To Know What They Mean + It Is All A Word Game: Why “Persons” Are Not Real

No more hiding behind the “corporate veil” and the fraud that it permits.

Shifting from the “SEA” to “LAND” jurisdiction is what IS HAPPENING. This process is speeding up and will have profound impact on all global societies.

Educate yourself in this transitioning as you will be moving out of “strawman slavery” to your real freeman freedom and liberty (in every country!).

This transitioning will not be easy as unraveling centuries of fraud is a complex task. Re-educating whole populations that have been brainwashed and dumbed-down by repeated lies and battered by enforcement officers, will take time and patience. The Creator has willed it. So be it.


Related Articles:

The Strawman Is The Ego: The Parasite Cleanse Begins At Home

The ‘Great Reset’: A Technocratic Agenda That Waited Years For A Global Crisis To Exploit & Globalists Will Need Another Crisis As Their Reset Agenda Fails

The Fraudulent Monetary System & The Occult Meanings Of Mortgage: Why A Mortgage Is A Pledge To The Dead

Financial Fraud: Easy Money Corrupts The Monetary System

May 1st: The Day Slavery System Transferred From Monarchies To The Corporations

A Quick Review Of Fake Medical Diagnostic Tests + Author Exposes The “Vaccine Deep State”- A Massive Criminal Fraud And Embezzlement Ring Inside The CDC

How The Deep State ‘Justifies’ Itself In America

Changes That Are Coming: The Deep State’s Control Is Fast Coming To An End

A Textbook Case Of Treason + Trump: A Threat To The Deep State


How To Stop The Media From Controlling Your Mind + Why The ‘Red Pill’ Has Become So Big


Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi

Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi

Overcoming The Fear Of Intimacy: Helpful Advice For The Wounded Heart
July 3 2023 | From: TheUnboundedSpirit / Various

What we all deep down long for is a sense of connection with our fellow human beings. We need to feel that we belong to a greater whole - a community.



Whether consciously or unconsciously, we deeply desire to love and to be loved. We crave to share our being with one another - to give and receive from the heart.

Related: Scientists: Earth’s Magnetic Fields Carry Biologically Relevant Information That ‘Connects All Living Systems’

It is connection that truly makes us feel fulfilled and content. Yet, in our world connection is almost nowhere to be found. It has been lost, and people have forgotten all about it. They don’t feel part of a community - rather, they feel separated and alienated.

They feel alone in a crowd that is indifferent and cold towards them. They don’t feel that they belong to the world - they just happened to be placed there but it doesn’t feel like home at all.

It’s not surprising that most of us feel this way, considering the world we’ve been brought up into. Our world is full of competition, with everyone fighting against everyone else, each for their own individual interest.



Related: Toxic Relationship Habits Most People Think Are Normal

They all try their best to maximize their personal gain at the expense of others.

Naturally, when you’re living in a world that is inimical to you, how can you feel at home with it? And how can you open up your heart and share your being with those around you, if you sense that their intentions are negative towards you?

It’s extremely difficult, and so you choose to close yourself off to them. You retreat, you become distant, you build walls around your heart, so thick and tall that nobody can penetrate them. By doing so, you feel protected, safe, secure, but at the same time you’re throwing your very happiness away.


Intimacy and Vulnerability

Look around you and you’ll see almost everywhere people wearing social masks to hide their psyche from others, because that’s the best way to not allow another person to come close to themselves.

When you pretend to be someone you are not, others cannot understand who you truly are, and you can’t understand them. This way any possibility of genuine communication between you and them is lost. And when there’s lack of understanding between people, how can there be connection? It’s impossible.



Related: New Research Shocks Scientists: Human Emotion Physically Shapes Reality

Connection needs intimacy, and intimacy needs openness, honesty. Therefore, in order to be intimate with another, you need to tear off your worn-out masks and expose your naked self under the sun.

Then people will be able to look at you in the eye and experience the depths of your being.

To be open and honest, however, means to put yourself in a state of vulnerability. In that state, you can be easily wounded (the word vulnerability is derived from the Latin vulnerare, which means “to wound”, so vulnerability is our susceptibility to be wounded) and this is what most people are afraid of. Having been wounded time and time again in the past, they don’t want to be wounded again, so they avoid opening up their hearts and exposing themselves.


Love and Intimacy

Even partners who claim to be deeply in love aren’t that intimate. They deceive one another with all sorts of tricks so as not to risk experiencing emotional vulnerability.

But when there’s no intimacy, there can’t be love. When you are afraid to open up yourself to another, how can you allow yourself to be loved by another? And how can you love another, if you don’t feel at ease with him or her?

Love is the most intimate connection, yet the most dreaded one. But I am asking you: what’s the point of living without love? There’s none. Without love, life becomes meaningless and utterly empty. Without love, there can’t be any true sense of fulfillment.



Related: The Trap Of Romantic Love

So if we’d like to find meaning and fulfillment, we need to realize that the walls between us humans have to be broken down - with our very hands. And instead of building walls that separate us, we need to build bridges that bring us together, help us to overcome our fear of intimacy and re-connect with one another.

Of course, to the separate ego, this might look like a very risky thing to do, considering the emotional vulnerability that goes hand-in-hand with close, intimate relationships.

The ego will resist and do anything it can to cling to the old known past, but we shouldn’t pay attention to it - instead, we should work on what we know in our hearts to be good and act from that loving space for the benefit of ourselves and all humankind.


Related Articles:

The Quantum Theory On Mind-Body Connection + Morphic Resonance: The Science Of Interconnectedness

Fear: False Evidence Appearing Real

Ecology And The Human Heart

In Harmony With All Life: The Open Source Way + Lifting The Veil: Merging Science And Spirituality

Research Shocks Scientists: Human Emotion Physically Shapes Reality

How Thoughts Create Atoms And Emotions Formulate Time

Emotional Intelligence: The Social Skills You Weren't Taught In School



Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi

Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi

Everything Is Fake: Top 40 Pieces Of Fakery In Our World
July 2 2023 | From: WakeUpWorld / Various

Everything is fake in our society today – or at least a great many things are. Our world is filled with an extraordinary amount of lies, deception, disinformation, misinformation, fakery, fraud, facades, mirages, propaganda and brainwashing.



The good thing though is that once you awaken to the deception, you can use it as a tool for raising your consciousness. The idea that virtually everything is fake can be empowering rather than depressing.

Related: Exposing The Mainstream Consensus Reality Complex

Sure, we’ve all felt overwhelmed, sad, angry and impotent at times when we’ve seen just how easily our (mis)leaders can fool the masses with sophistry and empty rhetoric, but they’ve all been placed there to challenge us to wake up more quickly and fully, and reclaim our world.

Here’s my list of the top 40 pieces of fakery in our world today:


1. Fake News

Let’s begin with the MSM (Mainstream Media), better called the lamestream media, and their “news”, which is essentially corporate infotainment. The MSM waters down the news and makes it entertaining to further distract people from things of real significance.

There is nothing balanced, impartial or fair about MSM news. In the US, Australia and many other Western nations, the news is dominated by a handful of for-profit corporations who are legally bound to provide a return on investment to their shareholders.



Related: Soros Alliance Of Tech Giants Join PornHub To Create “Day Of Action” Protest & “Aren’t You Embarrassed?”: Conway Takes On CNN’s Fake News In Marathon Interview

This means running “news” pieces which either promote the agenda of the corporate owners (especially the military agenda) or censoring stories which would hurt political allies and advertisers (like Big Pharma, who is the biggest contributor of funds for advertising on MSM according to former US Senator Robert Kennedy Jr.).

Additionally, the news is literally fake – remember the CNN green screen stunt where they pretended they were being bombed in Saudi Arabia but were really in a studio? What about lying news anchos like Brian Williams and Bill O’Reilly (Bill O’Leilly)?


2. Fake Journalism

Alongside fake news, of course, comes equally fake journalism. MSM journalists today are not the true investigative reporters of yore.

There are exceptions such as journalists who used to work for the MSM Big 6 and are now working independently (either leaving of their own volition or having been fired) such as Ben Swann and Sharyl Attkisson.

However, they are few and far between. Most journalists function as little more than parrots repeating the corporate party line, and are too scared to rock the boat for fear of losing their jobs.



Related: Mainstream Media Insults The Public's Intelligence On Vaccines & Vaccinated Vs. Unvaccinated Pilot Study: Early Vaccination Sees Exponential Increase In Chronic Disorders + Lies, Vaccines And The New Zealand Media

The White House strictly controls who has “access” to the President and other officials. In general, if you want more access, you have to toe the line and ask easy, softball questions that make politicians look good.

Additionally, the Government admitted it made video news releases or prepackaged news for the MSM, which then broadcast these releases as “news” without disclosing to its viewers that the pieces were premade by the Government!


3. Fake Entertainment

On the topic of media, let’s turn our attention to Hollywood and the entertainment industry.

If you’re looking for fakery and superficiality, look no further, because Hollywood and certain parts of southern California are about as shallow as it gets.



Related: The Secret Meaning of April Fool’s Day - Including: Bread And Circus, Medication And Conditioning, Omission And Denial

The dominating culture there dictates that it’s more important what you look like than who you are; more important who you hang out with (and are seen with) than what you know; and more important how big your Botox lips or silicone breasts are than how big your heart is; and more important what you own and what’s in your bank account than what gifts you’ve given to the world.

Hollywood’s film and music industries are imbued with Satanism. This is easily seen with its influence on heavy metal, rock, hip hop and these days even pop (take a look at the Illuminati symbology in the music and videos of Madonna or Katy Perry).

Actresses such as Rosanne Barr and many other Hollywood insiders have exposed how mind control, prostitution (turning up-and-coming stars into prostitutes or forcing them to have sex to “make” it) and pedophilia are rife throughout Hollywood.



Related: Paris Jackson Interview: Michael Jackson Was “Absolutely” Murdered

Michael Jackson suffered from mind control and attempted to tell the world before he was killed. Many others such as Mariah Carey and Britney Spears show obvious signs of mind control.


4. Fake Corporate PR and Advertising

Another aspect of visual media (TV) that makes you sick are these generic “we care” fake feel-good commercials made by slick marketing departments of the corporatocracy, trying to get you to associate them with happiness, caring, giving, equality or any other value they choose from a list. They use marketing as a kind of weaponized psychology.

Did you ever wonder why Big Pharma always shows beautiful models, happy retired people, bouncing dogs or smiling babies to peddle its poisonous, side-effect laden drugs?



Related: Is Subliminal Advertising Legit?

Corporations are soulless entities and legal persons – the epitome of fakery in many ways since they are fake persons with the rights of people and the responsibilities of none.


5. Fake Medicine

Big Pharma is the force behind Western Medicine, and Rockefeller is the force behind both of them.

With its smorgasbord of synthetic drugs, vaccines, surgery, chemotherapy and radiation, Western medicine or allopathy has earned the dubious honor of killing hundreds of thousands of people every year.

A 2000 study by Dr. Barbara Starfield, MD, found that allopathy kills 225,000 per year in the US, while a 2003 study by Dr. Gary Null, MD and others, found that allopathy kills 783,000 per year in the US.


Starfield concluded that Western Medicine in America causes:

12,000 deaths from unnecessary surgeries;

7,000 deaths from medication errors in hospitals;

20,000 deaths from other errors in hospitals;

80,000 deaths from infections acquired in hospitals; and

106,000 deaths from FDA-approved correctly prescribed medicines.




Related: Faking Medical Reality


Null et al concluded that Western Medicine causes:

37,136 deaths from unnecessary procedures;

32,000 deaths related to surgery;

98,000 deaths from medical error;

115,000 deaths from bedsores;

88,000 deaths from infection;

108,800 deaths from malnutrition;

199,000 deaths related to outpatients; and

106,000 deaths from adverse drug reactions.


Now, with its antibiotic drugs becoming more useless in the face of rising super bugs, you have to really question whether an entire medical system that is based on masking symptoms, “managing” illness, and getting patients on a hamster wheel of pill after pill after pill, can really constitute true healing – or whether it’s just more fakery.


6. Fake Scientific Research

Backing the Rockefeller’s Western medical Big Pharma cartel is a massive pile of fake scientific research.

Like anything fake, the veneer looks shiny and leads you to believe what lies inside is trustworthy and reputable, when in reality it’s reams of biased and concocted research with a peer-reviewed stamp on it.



Related: Peer Reviewed 'Science' Losing Credibility Due To Fraudulent Research & Manufacturing Consent In Science: The Diabolical Twist

Former Big Pharma reps, esteemed medical journal editors and even insider governmental scientists have all confessed the shocking truth that a large amount of the published scientific data out there is fraudulent and simply can’t be trusted. Check out the top 10 tricks used by corporate junk science.


7. Fake Acquired Immunity

Another piece of fakery is the idea that vaccine-induced immunity or acquired immunity could possibly be identical to natural immunity, which one receives after having successfully warded off a disease (e.g. like chickenpox).

Vaccine proponents even go so far as to insist that the unvaccinated are endangering the vaccinated by not getting their shots (the herd immunity argument) – which defies logic, since if vaccines really worked, there would be no need for the vaccinated to worry about catching anything from the unvaccinated.

In my article Herd Immunity vs. Viral Shedding: Who’s Infecting Whom? I discuss how the human immune system is vastly more complex and sophisticated than we understand, and is made up of specific and non-specific parts.



Related: A Quick Review Of Fake Medical Diagnostic Tests + Author Exposes The “Vaccine Deep State”- A Massive Criminal Fraud And Embezzlement Ring Inside The CDC

A vaccine does not closely resemble natural immunity in many ways, including only engendering a specific response, having a completely different point of entry, not conferring lifelong immunity, etc.

Besides, vaccines are full of toxins and carcinogens, including fetal tissue. The elite have admitted vaccines are being used for depopulation.

Related: Bill Gates Admits Vaccines Are Used for Human Depopulation

The real issue is not herd immunity but rather viral shedding, whereby the vaccinated are infecting the unvaccinated. Vaccines are yet another example of supreme fakery in today’s fake world.


8. Fake Food

True immunity is derived from lifestyle and diet, including what quality of exercise, sleep and nutrition you get.

This brings us to the topic of food. Our food today has become so processed and packaged, so full of preservatives and plastics, that it has become fake food. It gets churned out of a factory rather than grown on a farm or field.



Click on the image above to view a larger version in a new window

Related: An Invisible Form Of Oppression: Our Food System

It’s full of artificial flavors and synthetic tastes – some of them even derived from aborted fetal tissue as Pepsi was forced to admit. Some of it is so refined and over-cooked it barely has more nutrition inside of it than a piece of cardboard.

When you add the monstrosity of GMOs (Genetically Modified Organisms) into the mix, you get a final product that Dr. Rima Laibow calls “phude” rather than “food”, because the final engineered, processed product is so far removed from what our ancestors knew as real food.

By the way, GMOs, in case you hadn’t heard, can lead to organ failure, infertility and cancer, and are genetically modifying you as GM proteins bypass digestion and go directly into your blood (as is theirultimate purpose).



Related: GE Food Venture: Chronically Dependent On Deception

GMOs by their very nature are engineered to withstand massive doses of chemical and hazardous pesticides. GMOs are basically a way for chemical companies like Monsanto and Dow to sell more chemicals, because people need them to grow Big Biotech’s fake food. The WHO recently declared Monsanto’s glyphosate and Dow’s 2-4,D pesticides as probably and possibly carcinogenic, respectively.


9. Fake Water

Just as we have fake food, we also have fake water. Real water is flowing and alive, as you can find in a river or mountain stream.

Unfortunately, most of our drinking water today is dead, having passed through 90° right angles in a pipe, having been treated with chlorine and fluoride (both toxins), and containing remnants of antibiotics, glyphosate and Big Pharma drugs. It may do just enough to keep us alive, but it’s not allowing us to thrive.

Water has memory and carries past information, as the pioneering research of Masaru Emoto showed. It absorbs what you are thinking and feeling, and changes its structure accordingly.



Related: Lawsuit Could End Water Fluoridation Once And For All By Demonstrating Its Neurotoxicity

If we as a society keep using synthetic drugs and flushing them down the waterways, the water will remember that, and future drinkers of it will get the “memory information” of drugs in their system, regardless of whether they actually take pharmaceuticals or not.

Not all water is equal. How beneficial it is depends on how it is structured. It is heartening to see people promoting structured water, which returns the buoyancy to the hydrogen and oxygen atoms making up the water molecule. We are water.

Whatever we do to our water we do to ourselves. One way out of the deception and conspiracy is to take control of your water, and find a pure source, or ensure you both filter and structure your water to make it as life-giving as possible.

Related: Experiment Proves That Thoughts & Intentions Can Alter Physical Reality


10. Fake Choice

The US (and other Western nations) like to pride themselves on being free, open and offering so much choice to the average citizen. But do they really?

What kind of choice is it when you can choose from over 1000 channels on cable TV and 25 flavors of frozen yoghurt, but when it comes to running society, all the major candidates for political office have identical policies on the things that count?



All the western countries have a red party and a blue party, the illusion of choice

Related: Ardern Intent On Smashing Free Speech

Is there any real choice when one US politician is slightly tougher on immigration, but both support the current parasitic monetary system (privately owned Rothschild central banks like the Federal Reserve), the continuation and expansion of the US Empire through constant war and military base acquisition, and crony capitalism where politicians reward corporations at the expense of ordinary people?

Real choice is the power to have a say in the direction of society, not what material variety you have as a consumer.


11. Fake Money

A nation can never truly prosper as a free, fair and egalitarian society as long as it has a rigged monetary system. Today’s money is a privately-controlled creation.

The controllers, who own a government-sanctioned central bank in almost every country on earth, long ago convinced the government to adopt their funny money and rule that it be made legal tender.

This funny money is fake money, because it carries no intrinsic value. It’s just pieces of paper with ink – and now, increasingly, just digits typed into a computer. It’s fiat currency.

The word fiat means “by Government decree”, so funny money gets its value just because the Government says it does!

The founder of the Rothschild empire, Mayer Amschel Rothschild, once said:


“Give me control of a nation’s money and I care not who makes its laws”.

His son, Nathan Rothschild, said:



Related: The Rothschild’s Global Crime Syndicate And How It Works


“I care not what puppet is placed on the throne of England to rule the Empire. The man who controls Britain’s money supply controls the British Empire and I control the British money supply.”

Our world is unlikely to change until people realize the power of money creation, and demand to have it restored to public control, either under the Government or in another more decentralized way. The first step in all of this is for people to realize how fake our money is.


12. Fake Economy

Don’t you love the way political leaders get up in their public addresses and claim with a straight face that the state of the union and the economy are strong?

Anyone who has looked at the rapid and almost hyperbolic rise of governmental debt and borrowing in the last 10 years knows the west is in deep trouble.



Related: The World’s Best Economist

The USG owes a staggering $18 trillion, and many other nations worldwide (like the UK, Spain, Italy) are also in debt to the international banking cartel. What kind of economy relies on constantly borrowing money from tomorrow just to stay afloat today?

I’ll tell you – a completely fake economy that is bound to crash sooner or later when the debt gets called in.


13. Fake Free Markets

The NWO elite love to talk about the importance of free markets – when it suits them, of course.

By free markets they actually mean markets where they are unfettered by governmental regulation to exploit whomever and whatever they want, or conversely where they rely upon the Government to enforce something that ordinarily people would not choose.

Take for example California’s recent ruling of mandatory vaccinations, and the US Federal Government’s refusal to restrict GMOs or even allow GMO labeling.

The Government willingly destroys free markets around healthcare (Obamacare) and vaccines to benefit its Big Pharma masters, while simultaneously refusing to protect the public against the dangers it was created to guard against. We have convenient and fake free markets, not true ones.


14. Fake Free Trade Agreements

Another aspect of fake free markets is the spate of “free trade” agreements which is more Orwellian doublespeak for restricted trade agreements – that is, restricted to anyone except giant corporations.

Just look at the fallout from NAFTA, CAFTA and other free trade agreements which outsourced middle class jobs to China, India mad other developing nations and destroyed many American jobs. The latest round of secret treaties (the TPP, TTIP and TISA) will be more of the same.

As I documented in “How the TPP is Going to Affect You“, the TPP, if passed, will result in consequences like the weakening of the minimum wage, more censorship, more copyright, less freedom of expression, private corporate courts like the ISDS which supplant national sovereignty, stronger patents, more control for Big Pharma and less environmental protection.


15. Fake Accounting

Underpinning the fake economy is fake accounting. Remember on September 10th, 2001, when then Secretary of Defense Donald Rumsfeld (the same guy who gave the sweet killer aspartame to the world) announced that $2.3 trillion was missing and unaccounted for.

That’s right – he couldn’t find $2.3 trillion! The public has a short memory, and the very next day (conveniently) we were hit with the mass ritual and false flag attack of 9/11, so it all got swept under the carpet.

Even that figure, as preposterously large as it is, doesn’t compare to the $9 trillion allegedly “missing”, as explored here by Alan Grayson, one of the few US Congressmen with any principle or backbone.

Of course, the digitalization of money allows for every greater amounts of fakery than just fiat paper currency … and massive amounts of money are being siphoned off for black military operations (black ops) and the Secret Space Program.


16. Fake Welfare

The elite owners of multinational corporations, many of whom are millionaires if not billionaires, like to complain about the US welfare system and programs like SNAP or food stamps as it is colloquially called.

Meanwhile, corporate welfare is rakes in billions of dollars in governmental contracts, subsidies and tax cuts due to the corrupt and indue influence they wield (chiefly through lobbying). The point of welfare is to help the poorest and neediest – not the wealthiest.

The preponderance of corporate welfare and the power of corporatocracy is another sign that the US is a fascist society – fascist in Mussolini’s sense that the ruling class control affairs through the merging of State and Corporate power.


17. Fake Government

The figurehead of all this fakery is Government, so it’s no surprise that Government itself is also an entirely fake creation.

In the US, many legal documents such as the State Constitution of Arizona state that Government only exists ”… to protect the rights of the governed”, while documents such as the Declaration of Independence affirm that a Government only derives its powers with the consent of the governed.



Related: A Constitutional Timebomb: Is New Zealand’s Government And Court System Unlawful?

Current Governments around the world are fake – they exist to exploit rather than protect the public. Governments are not de jure entities but are rather de facto. They secretly incorporated (such as the US Government incorporating itself in 1871) and are now, legally, corporations whose sole purpose is to maximize profit.

Appropriately, the fake Government is headed by fake leaders or rather misleaders, who with the exception of a rare few, are puppets whose souls have been bought and paid for by the true ruling force behind the scenes.


18. Fake Republic

The US was set up to be a Republic, not a Democracy. What’s the difference?

The difference is that a republic contains protections of individual and minority rights, so that no mater who is in power, these basic rights can never be infringed, while a democracy runs on majority opinion, so that if a majority (whose emotions can easily be swayed by controllers who own the media and understand psychology) votes to impose its rule on the minority, that’s how it goes.

The US has been deliberately turned from a constitutional republic into a corporate democracy. It is a fake republic now.


19. Fake Democracy

The above points about republics and democracies was talking about the technical or legal definition of those terms.

In the broader sense, however, people use the word “democracy” to mean a system where the common people have a fair say in public affairs.

The US loves to boast how it is delivering democracy to the world, but most invaded countries see – and it’s a long list of aggression from the end of World War 2 until today, from Iran to Guatemala to Cuba to Chile to Panama to Kuwait to Libya to Iraq and many more – is not democracy but rather tanks, fighter jets, missiles and bombs.



Related: Republic Or Democracy And Self-Governance

True democracy has nothing to do with invading other sovereign nations and stealing their resources to please corporate puppeteers.


20. Fake Elections

Elections in many societies have become a farce with the introduction of rigged electronic voting machines that leave no paper trail.

If you can’t trust that your vote will be counted properly, how can you possibly think an average person could have any say at all in public affairs?



Related: DHS Sting Operation Rumors Of Massive Voting Fraud + Intelligence Expert Steve Pieczenik Claims 2020 Election Was A “Sophisticated Sting Operation” That Has Trapped The Democrats In The Most Massive Criminal Election Fraud In History

Stalin is rumored to have said that:


“The people who cast the votes decide nothing. The people who count the votes decide everything.”

The situation has become so absurd that in the 2012 US presidential race, it was candidate Mitt Romney’s company who actually purchased voting machines!

The film Uncounted did a great job exposing how rigged and dysfunctional the Diebold voting machines are.

In addition to rigged voting machines, consider how the fake debates we get shown on MSM TV, where elite-favored candidates are fed softball questions while anyone challenging the establishment is sidelined, given less air time and hit with personal attacks, unfounded accusations or hard questions.


21. Fake National Security

National security is the favorite justificatory term invoked by the elite to hide their documents and actions under the cloak of secrecy, while invading other sovereign nations abroad and taking away people’s rights domestically.

However, national security has nothing to do with making you more secure; it’s about making the elite more secure (by entrenching military secrecy and contracts) and you more insecure (by taking  your rights and liberties away).

Think of the immense amount of information kept classified and under lock and key – everything from UFOs to ETs to cancer cures to free energy devices – which the public deserves to know and has the right to know, yet fake national security is preventing them from accessing it.


22. Fake Defense

In the US and Australia it’s the Department of Defense/Defence. In NZ and the UK it’s the Ministry of Defence. In Canada it’s the Department of National Defence. Israel has its IDF (Israeli Defense Force).

Pick your country, it doesn’t matter: the war departments always adopt the PR language of defense, since it’s so much easier to justify than attack. Yet take a close look at what these nations do. They routinely attack other nations on the flimiest of pretexts to gain more geopolitical influence, install puppet dictators, steal land and pillage natural resources.

Israel loves to talk about its right to defend itself, but when has Israel ever been under a real threat of attack – apart from in their own imagination? Perhaps they were worried that a few Palestinians with rocks and sticks might be able to penetrate their billion-dollar defenses, generously donated by US taxpayers.

When has the US ever been in real danger of being attacked? Never. Pearl Harbor was an inside job– they knew it was coming. It was an excuse to get the US into WW2.

Since then (and even before then too), the US military has always been about unbridled aggression, preemptive strikes and attack, thanks to the out-of-control military-industrial-intelligence complex. There’s nothing defensive about it.

Since then (and even before then too), the US military has always been about unbridled aggression, preemptive strikes and attack, thanks to the out-of-control military-industrial-intelligence complex. There’s nothing defensive about it.


23. Fake Education

True education is the drawing out of the inherent beauty and talent inside of us.

This makes sense, since etymologically, it is derived from the Latin words “e” or “ex” meaning “out of”, and “ducare” meaning to lead or draw. True education stands in stark contrast to indoctrination, which as the word suggests is all about putting dogma, belief systems or doctrines into someone’s mind.

Unfortunately, our education system today is one of fake education or indoctrination, having been set up the elite in the early 20th century.



Related: Unschooling: Radical Education That Produces Free Human Beings Instead Of Slaves

They in turn based it on the earlier Prussian industrial school model which was designed to produce obedient citizens, workers and soldiers – not creative free thinkers who would challenge the system.

Many people such as Norman Dodd have exposed how powerful tax-exempt organizations, such as the Rockefeller, Carnegie and Ford Foundations, have hijacked the US Republic.

They especially focused their efforts on influencing the curriculum and using it to mold the minds of the impressionable young. John D. Rockefeller is widely quoted as saying, “I don’t want a nation of thinkers, I want a nation of workers.”


24. Fake Law

Just like many other aspects of our society, we are also surrounded by an entire system of fake law. Our legal system has been overtaken by admiralty jurisdiction or maritime jurisdiction, which was formerly used as the main commercial jurisdiction to adjudicate disputes among merchants sailing with goods on the seas between ports and countries.

However, the average man or woman is at a big disadvantage walking into commercial jurisdiction (rather than common law jurisdiction) where many rights don’t apply, because things are run on contract.



Related: Lawful And Legal: Why You Need To Know What They Mean & It Is All A Word Game: Why “Persons” Are Not Real

Much of today’s “law” is not true law but fake law: statutes, regulations, rules, policy, by-laws and codes. These are all commercial terms which only apply to commercial entities – such as your legal person or strawman, the capital letters name/version of yourself, which functions as the joinder or bridge to cross over from common law into commercial law.

The Government and Law Society rely upon deception to trick you into accepting their presumptions of law as facts of law. These presumptions become unrebutted facts unless you challenge them.

The truth is that all of these statutes do not apply to you unless you agree to be part of some society or organization, and this includes unwittingly admitting you are a citizen or resident of a country, which legally means you are a member / employee / franchisee of the United States Inc. or any other privately-incorporated Government.



The same goes when you admit you a “taxpayer” to the IRS.

You can learn more about how to escape all of this trickery by educating yourself with sovereignty resources.


25. Fake Rights

We are all born free. We are all born with real, natural, unalienable, God-given, inherent human rights – choose whatever word you want to describe them – regardless of where you were born geographically.

Yet instead of honoring these inherent rights, governments like to give us fake rights instead, which are really just privileges in disguise.

The thing about privileges, of course, is that they can be revoked at any time by the governing authority. As I discussed in the article “We All Have Inherent Rights – Regardless of Whether a Nation’s “Authority” Recognizes It“, we have been given “civil rights” and UN “human rights” which are not the same thing as stand alone, inherent rights.

These fake rights have the effect of making us more like servant-slave, rather than master-creator, in relation to Government.


26. Fake Consent

Just as we have been tricked with fake law and fake rights, we have also been tricked with fake consent.

Many of the contracts we sign with Government or the big corporations are adhesion contracts, meaning a contract where one side is heavily favored by the terms and where the other party is severely restricted.

These include but are not limited to contracts with the DMV (driver’s licenses), IRS and SSA, as well as those concerning voter registration, bank accounts and credit cards.

By law, to have a valid contract, all parties must enter knowingly, willfully, and voluntarily, with full disclosure of all of the terms; if not, then the contract is considered unconscionable and an act of fraud.

There are ways of revoking adhesion contracts, but most people don’t even realize they unwittingly gave consent in the first place.


27. Fake Morality

I have already covered how utterly fake the MSM is. Yet, for all their fakery, they love to claim the high moral ground and pretend they are being ethical and proper, all the while deliberately deceiving you and lying to your face.

The MSM will happily condone the bombing of 3rd world countries and paint war in a good light at the behest of its military-corpoate owners, but will act all outraged because someone walked around naked or said the word “f*ck”.

It then goes to great lengths to censor certain words like this – f*ck – while going on it merry way, e.g. supporting the Zionist Israeli destruction of Palestine by pretending that Israel is not the aggressor or is in serious danger.


28. Fake Spirituality

True spirituality, which is the awareness of one’s own divine nature and one’s own connection to the Infinite, has been usurped by organized religion, which has inserted its own set of middlemen (priests, pastors, rabbis, imams, etc.) between you and the Infinite, and started to charge you a fee for “divine translation services”.



Related: The Opiate Of The Masses: When Religion Becomes An Addiction

From one perspective you can say that all religions contain a kernel of truth, and that is true; however, from another perspective, you can say that all religions have become bogged down in dogma, doctrine, fantasy and ridiculous belief, are recycled Sun and Saturn worship, and are selling people down the garden path with a mixture of disempowering beliefs and Satanic elements.

David Icke, Jordan Maxwell and others have highlighted how religions have borrowed and stolen elements from previous versions, how the Middle East is a religion factory (see embedded video above) and how religion has ultimately been given to us to deceive us.


29. Fake Clouds

As the geoengineering agenda races onward unabated, people are still in denial about the existence of chemtrails, preferring instead to believe the fake argument that they are contrails – despite the fact that experienced pilots have confirmed that contrails disappear in 10-12 seconds, while chemtrails linger for hours.

These days geoengineering has changed its name multiple times (including SRM [Solar Radiation Management] and Climate Remediation), probably in an attempt to confuse people and cover up the horrific reality of its activities.

Sadly, today as you gaze up into the sky, there is no guarantee any more that you are seeing real clouds. With the intense amount of aerosol spraying and cloud seeding going on, there is always a good chance you are seeing the fake clouds of geoengineering, which continues to spray toxic sulfates and iodides of barium, strontium, aluminum, iron and silver.

Geoengineeing has been implicated in the decline of the bee population. Meanwhile, Big Biotech owns the patents on aluminum-resistant GMO crops – which I’m sure is just a coincidence. Nothing to worry about; move along please!

Related: The United Nations Exposes Chemtrails 100% Proof We Are Being Poisoned 


30. Fake War on Terror

When it comes to fakery, the utterly fake War on Terror is close to the top of the list. As Aussie comedian Steve Hughes says, how can you have a war on something which is the consequence of war?

Terror is a consequence of war. Terrorism is one of the most deceptive and effective tools of the NWO (New World Order) to trick people into allowing centralization of control, and allowing Government to pass laws, encroach upon rights and grab power when it otherwise would not have been able to do so.



Related: Israeli Defense Minister Confirms Israel Backing Of ISIS In Syria

Look at the Patriot Act another horrendous pieces of legislation which gutted the Bill of Rights, passed in haste because scared politicians wouldn’t stop to read it, and a scared population went along with it.

However, we were warned about fake terrorism. Recall Aaron Russo’s account of his meeting with Nick Rockefeller, who was trying to bring him in to the inner folds of the NWO, and revealed to him that the elite were planning false flag attacks and a global war on terror way before 9/11 occurred.

Recall also Carol Rosin’s account, who learnt from Nazi/NASA insider Werner von Braun who predicted that the game plan was to fool people with fake communism, fake terrorism, fake asteroids and a fake alien invasion.


31. Fake Lone Nutter Killers

This is another favorite tactic of the elite – kill game-changing activists and public figures who have the power to change the world (JFK, Bobby Kennedy, MLK, John Lennon, etc.) with mind-controlled patsies.



Related: False Flag Terrorism: Murdering The Innocent In Order To Support The Lie + 15 Ways To Detect A False Flag Operation

Then, control the MSM so that you can paint a false narrative about a random, unconnected, lone nutter who just happened to have a personal vengeance against the victim or was out of his mind. Lee Harvey Oswald, Sirhan Sirhan, James Earl Ray and Mark Chapman have all been exposed as innocent patsies and expendable victims who were unwittingly part of a grander conspiracy.


32. Fake Boogeymen

Finally, on a similar note to above, just as the elite controllers give us fake lone nutters to take the fall, they also provide us with fake boogeymen to scare us.

Some of these boogeymen have really scary beards and turbans, and are able to overcome the most advanced air defense (NORAD) of the most militarily sophisticated nation on Earth (the USA) from a cave in Afghanistan.



Related: Reflecting On The Truth Of 9/11 - What Will Be The Straw That Breaks The Camel's Back?

Cue Osama Bin Laden, close friend of the Bushes, one of America’s grandest criminal families.

Thanks to Prescott Bush (who traded with the Nazis), George Bush Sr. (former CIA head and US President involved in JFK’s death, serial rapist and pedophile, member of the Carlyle Group), George Bush Jr. (mentally impaired US President who presided over 9/11 and the fake War on Terror) and now candidate Jeb Bush, CIA-trained and funded Osama is in great company.

I suppose it’s just a coincidence that the Bin Ladens were having lunch with the Bushes the day before 9/11 occurred:


“According to the Washington Post, the Carlyle Group met at the Ritz Carlton Hotel in NYC one day before 9/11. In attendance at this meeting were former president George H. W. Bush and  Shafiq bin Laden, the brother of Osama …”


33. Fake False Flag Events

The rate of staged false flag operations, whether they be false flag shootings or false flag bombings, has been increasing. It almost seems like there’s one that goes by somewhere every month.

It’s Another Day, Another False Flag. Maybe this is due to how effectively the elite can fool the general population, and scare them into giving up their rights and supporting the centralization of power.



It was clearly a missile that hit the Pentagon on 9/11 and not an airliner...

Related: JFK To 911: Everything Is A Rich Man's Trick

Yet, at the same time, there is also a growing awareness of a critical mass of people who see right through these events. After all, we have been exposed to a lot of them.


In the last 15 years, here is a brief and incomplete list of 21st century false flag ops:

9/11 of 2001

The Bali bombings in Indonesia of 2002

7/7 of 2005

The Norway shooting of 2011

The fake Sandy Hook (Sandy Hoax) shooting of 2012

The Boston Marathon bombing of 2013

The LAX shooting of 2013

The Santa Barbara shooting of 2014

The Malaysian Flight 17 of 2014 (falsely blamed on Russia)

The “Sydney Siege” in Australia of 2014

The French Charlie Hebdo shooting of 2015

The Tunisia shooting of 2015

The Charleston shooing of 2015

and so on. There are many more that didn’t make that list. Paul Watson of InfoWars pointed out a few years ago how even the military term false flag had begun to permeate in the mass consciousness and had cropped up way more as a search term online.

Remember how InfoWars reporter Dan Bidondi asked a Boston official, on live TV just as it was unfolding, whether the Boston Marathon bombing was a false flag event?

It would appear with the rising consciousness that the elite are going to be hard pressed to keep using false flag operations – unless they take it to a whole new level with perfect, undetectable holograms.

You can read concrete evidence about False Flags by following this link.


34. Fake Crisis Actors

Related to the fakery of false flag operations are the fake crisis actors used by the MSM to attempt to deceive you.



Related: People Are Finally Learning About False Flag Terror

The alternative media has done a great job exposing the extent of fakery here, including exposing crisis actors at Sandy Hook, the Boston Marathon, the Charleston shooting and many other events.

On several occasions, the lying MSM even used the same crisis actors (see here and here) for different false flag events!


35. Fake Pandemics

While the threat of bioweapons, including those that are constructed to target certain ethnicities, races or segments of society, is quite appealing to an elite cabal bent on depopulation, the fact remains that the recent pandemics we have witnessed, especially the ebola pandemic, are exaggerated and fake.

Kudos to Len Horowitz for his years of research in documenting the rise of bioweapons and fake pandemics, and also to Jon Rappoport who kept a cool head and questioned every aspect of the ebola psy-op, while many others were taken in by the propaganda.





Related:
Deconstructing The Ebola Agenda & Is the Bilderberg Group Behind Ebola? + The Effective Treatment For The Bioweapon That Is Ebola

Wasn’t it telling and almost surreal the way the ebola phenomenon just suddenly dropped off the map, after the US Government allegedly gave the order to the MSM to stop reporting on it?


36. Fake Moon Landing

The moon landing is another stunning piece of fakery that has gone down in the official history books as fact. Perhaps the best pieces on the issue are Jay Weinder’s analysis, Secrets of The Shining: Or How Faking the Moon Landings Nearly Cost Stanley Kubrick his Marriage and his Life and also in this interview.

Weidner presents a compelling argument that the elite convinced Stanley Kubrick to fake the moon landing in exchange for secrecy and future film budgeting.

Kubrick himself was very well acquainted with the Satanic underbelly of the New World Order, and produced one of the most striking films which ever exposed it (Eyes Wide Shut), with its famous scene of a Satanic ritual orgy and sacrifice in a mansion of the elite.



A consensus seems to now indicate that in fact some of the moon landings were real, and some were faked

Related: Secret Space Program Disclosure: Founders Of Solar Warden SSP With William Tompkins

Kubrick died from a heart attack before the release of the film despite being reported to have been in good health with a strong heart – just another coincidence, I’m sure.

It is quite possible we went to the moon – just not in the way we were told. If you study the origins of NASA, you will realize it came out of the JPL (Jet Propulsion Laboratory) of Jack Parson, black magician and follower of Aleister Crowley.

Later, Nazi scientists joined NASA who were smuggled into the US under Operation Paperclip. Additionally, there are many Freemasons at NASA, including many of the astronauts on the 1960s and 1970s missions.


37. Fake International Space Station and Fake Space Walks

The fakery about space is not limited to the moon landing. There are numerous videos regarding the ISS (International Space Station) which look obviously faked, including one where one of the astronaut Chris Cassidy slips up and admits they are shooting the video in a US town on the ground.

The Chinese also released a very suspect “space walk” where a bubble can be seen going past the astronauts’s head! There is another video showing someone with scuba gear aboard a supposed space craft. So what’s really going on in space? It’s hard to know, but these examples of fakery are easy to spot.


38. Fake History

It has been said many times that history is written by the victors. If these victors have an agenda to dominate or set up a system of control with their newly won power to ensure they remain at the helm for many years to come, they can easily rewrite history or give us fake history in order to legitimize themselves.

George Orwell wisely observed that:



Related: Houston Anthropologist Reveals Irrefutable Proof That Recorded History Is Wrong


“Who controls the present controls the past; who controls the past controls the future.”

What he meant by that is that if you are currently in power, you have the means to censor information (e.g. internet firewalls, data deletion, book burning, etc.), and then, by controlling what people thought happened, you can shape the past in a favorable way so as to ensure you remain in power for the future.

An obvious example is the way the Zionist-dominated press reported on World War 2 and the events leading up to it.

This is why revisionist history is so important; we need people to actively reexamine our past and work out what happened, so we can see the patterns and learn from our mistakes. As George Santayana said, “those who cannot learn from history are doomed to repeat it”.


39. Fake Authority

An overarching theme of all the fakery I have listed is that humanity has given it power all to fake authority. We have been tricked into giving over unquestioning obedience to authority, without stopping to think critically, question sources and biases, and make decisions for ourselves.

It’s all too easy for someone to don a black robe, white jacket or shiny badge and appear to be somehow above you.



Related: Governments: The Enemy Of Freedom & Globalists Interviewed: They Admitted They Controlled The Government

Yes, some people have gone through a lot of hard work and training to become a judge, priest, scientist, doctor or cop, but they are still human. They still don’t know everything.

What if they just memorized a lot of facts and procedures themselves without ever truly questioning it or understanding it, then just repeated and parroted it over to you?


40. Fake Universe

Finally, it seems the very universe in which we live is, also, not exactly “real”. The recent upsurge and popularity of the flat earth movement (who have highlighted many interesting anomalies that can’t be explained by the globe earth model) shows that we still have some investigation to do in determining exactly what kind of place we live on.

On a more fundamental level, however, we live in a fake universe in the sense that it’s a giant hologram or simulated reality.

People from all walks of life have hinted at this deep truth, whether it be ancient Hindu teachings that the world is maya (illusion), researchers such as the late Michael Talbot who wrote the great book The Holographic Universe, or cutting edge scientific studies trying to prove that the holographic model of reality fits the data better than the standard models of physics.



Related:
Let There Be Light: First Individual Particle Of Light Ever Seen + The Birth Of Quantum Holography - Making Holograms Of Single Light Particles

These days there are many Western scientists putting their energy into cracking the code of our holographic reality. Mainstream media outlets are exploring the fake universe topic too. Take a look at the following:

A study by Nick Bostrom in 2003 which proposed “at least one of the following propositions is true: (1) the human species is very likely to go extinct before reaching a “posthuman” stage; (2) any posthuman civilization is extremely unlikely to run a significant number of simulations of their evolutionary history (or variations thereof); (3) we are almost certainly living in a computer simulation.

It follows that the belief that there is a significant chance that we will one day become posthumans who run ancestor-simulations is false, unless we are currently living in a simulation.”

A study by theoretical physicist Juan Maldacena in 1997 proposed that “an audacious model of the Universe in which gravity arises from infinitesimally thin, vibrating strings could be reinterpreted in terms of well-established physics.

The mathematically intricate world of strings, which exist in nine dimensions of space plus one of time, would be merely a hologram: the real action would play out in a simpler, flatter cosmos where there is no gravity.”

A study by Daniel Grumiller et al in 2014 proposing the holographic model of the Universe: “These field theories are the putative holographic duals to theories of gravity in three-dimensional asymptotically flat space times”


Everything is Fake!

Everything is fake! The sooner you wake up to the deception, the better.

Above all, remember that you can be real and true in the midst of all this. Don’t let it get you down; let it be a challenge to help you rise to your potential.

Related: Anonymous: De-Mystifying The Concept Of The Deep State + Doctor Explains Why The Public Is So Stupid - Trusting The Government & Fake News


Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi

Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi

The Fraudulent Monetary System & The Occult Meanings Of Mortgage: Why A Mortgage Is A Pledge To The Dead
July 1 2023 | From: FinalWakeupCall / Omnithought / Various

Real money limits the ability of governments to tax, borrow, and spend, which also limits the size of the inevitable debt problem.



Fake money is easier for governments to get their hands on, and easier to promise; especially if you can “print” it yourself.

Related: The Gold Industry is in a Deep State of Dysfunction, Delusion and Denial

That’s why national governments can dig themselves into much deeper debt holes, and it is also why, it can never be a model of financial integrity. Anything short of genuine major reform won’t help, the world needs an authentic transformational reform.

The problems are not taxes, not Russia, not ISIS; the problem is real money, because the average citizen has too little of it, while, The Deep State insiders have too much of it. Today’s money is a fraud, make money honest and allow the free market to set the interest rate.

Link gold to money at today’s free market price. Fire all Central Banksters. Open a gold window at the Treasury department, and exchange gold for the local paper currency at a pre-set fixed rate.

Bring the military home, stop all wars, and ban budget deficits. Every government should be expected to live within their means, without any exception. The result: No debt.



Related: The Real Reason Your Rural Banks Are Closing Kiwis – It’s Not Lack Of Funds

Expect that it will be like the dawn of a dead country when easy money falls away. The cronies and zombies will rise up. It would be preferable to eliminate these beforehand through the Shoot To Kill practice by the freedom alliance fighters.

To better understand the financial troubles the world is in, read on to learn who has created this mess in the first place.


Perpetual Debt Spiral:

The Illuminati invented and implemented the perpetually growing debt spiral, but now something has changed. A big change of this sort is enormous as it signals the trend to get out of debt. Deleveraging by paying down debt. That is, of course, a contraction. Contraction means depression.

The world is going into a depression and it’s going to get very nastyThe end result will be; nations’ governments are going to have to revalue gold because that is the only thing they will have left.

They will have to resort to that to keep trade going. No country is completely independent economically. All nations need things that others produce. In order to keep the world trade going, there is no other solution than going back to gold.

For at least one hundred years the financial system has been manipulated to the hilt, bringing the world to its knees through the financial engineering of the elite, which should have been alarming enough for every well-educated expert.



Related: Democracy Is A Front For Central Bank Rule & Financial Starvation In A Fiat Debt Slavery Financial System

But the majority has been masterfully kept in the dark about the hidden agenda, not taking heed of the bells ringing loud and clear. In-depth analyses reveal that the whole monetary system is – unintentionally – in its final stage of self-destruction.

The excessive currency printing of debt-money has arrived in its final ‘reflation’ stage of self-destruction. Because the debt in the world has grown so excessively, the credit-system has gone into reverse mode, as result of the invention of the perpetual debt spiral.

By not issuing the money for interest payment, an absurd situation occurs in that not enough liquidity is created to repay all debt. And even more ludicrous, when all debt is paid there is no currency left in circulation.

Reflation is no longer possible anymore and the deflationists are being proven to have been correct all along. They are correct in regards to a credit system working in reverse with a negative feedback loop stoking a deflationary death spiral.


Debt Reflation in Reverse is Like Shooting Without Ammunition:

Reflation is a fiscal or monetary policy, designed to expand a country’s output and curb the effects of deflation. This now is going in reverse, changing in the opposite direction. In fact, debt reflation is deflation of debt, making the economic situation worse, leading to contraction, propelling the economy into a collapse.



Related: The Federal Reserve And The Bank Of England Financed The 3rd Reich + International Red Cross Report Confirms The Holocaust Of Six Million Jews Is A Hoax

Clearly the Khazarian mafia is getting scared and running out of ammunition. The fact that the Khazarian mob controlled Bank of Japan, like the ECB in Europe was forced to resort to negative interest rates, proves their fake fiat monies are worth less than nothing. The US Federal Reserve Board will be forced to do the same thing.

The more people put money in their banks, the more that money is vanishing.

It’s a remarkable time right now. This is all taking place before we are able to identify what the world is going through or where it is headed. People who are AWAKE have long seen this coming, and now we’re in the middle of it.

There are really two converging worlds – the vibrational changes from beyond are attacking the Khazarian Mafia-controllers that block these positive energies, and jam the beneficial signals bestowed on the people by instilling fear and insecurity, meanwhile bombarding us with a toxic cocktail of electromagnetic, chemical, genetic, nuclear and techno-trans humanist influences.

There is just one small problem, what will happen to the currencies of these central bank issuers including and especially those of The Fed, who also are caught up in the negative feedback loop?



Related: $2.3M For A Banker’s Advice On Selling State Houses? See What Else Your Government (Corporation) Has Spent Your Tax Money On Kiwis

These will vanish as result of their own intentional mistake of not putting enough money into circulation to pay back all the outstanding loans plus interest payments.
Currency survival:

This is the main and most pressing financial question people ever have faced in their lifetimes. Will the currencies survive and thrive in the deflation period or will they be seen for what they are, IOU’s of bankrupt issuers at the very centre of the credit crisis quagmire? If you answer this question incorrectly, you have finished your own financial life.

The key question is, against what assets will the currencies “deflate”? The answer of course is as it has always has been, “gold”.

While the pundits will have you believegold was devalued against the dollar in 1934", this for sure was quite the opposite. And while certain experts now will have you believe the “dollar” was the best investment in the 1930’s, for sure they are wrong!


The Importance of Gold:

Dollars then were “derivatives” – derived from – of gold. At that time, dollars were freely interchangeable at banks until 1933, then the dollar was devalued from $20.67 to $35 dollars that was necessary to purchase one ounce of gold.

In other words, it took nearly 75% more dollars to purchase an ounce of gold – end of story, gold was King during the last and only deflation since then, dollars and all other currencies now will be devalued versus gold again.

The two most important aspects of gold are; it cannot go “bankrupt” nor can it be freely “printed”. Those who say the U.S. can never “go bankrupt” because the debt is in dollars and they will just print more, are 100% correct but horribly wrong!



Related: India Removes 220 Tons of Physical Gold

Correct, the U.S. can print any amount of dollars necessary to pay off debt. This still doesn’t mean they do not “default”. In other words:

If McDonalds fails to give you a promised hamburger next Tuesday but instead promises you a hamburger every Tuesday for the rest of your life, where’s the beef? It never ever comes, just as there will be zero value to any dollar bill should the U.S. or any other central banker decide to print the Zillions needed to avoid default.

This falls under the category SUPPLY versus DEMAND! In case you don’t understand what is said, “old” dollars will become worthless as they become over-printed to avoid “default” – but devaluation is default in its own right.


Hyperinflation:

In the meantime, wait for the currency event termed “hyperinflation” that is bound to happen; as debtors must navigate a deflationary environment where credit is drying up everywhere they look.

It should amaze everyonethat the world is facing a liquidity crisis after all the trillions of digital currency units added to the system since 2008 – it seems almost impossible to have a lack of liquidity doesn’t it?

As explained above, under debt reflation in reverse; this is the fact debtors face globally and that threatens to shut the system down, because of no liquidity!

Taking this two steps further than the deflationists, what exactly will happen once credit does collapse and the spigot gets shut off? In the case of the U.S., they most likely will “print” to the point of full – rather than the current partial monetization of all the debt.



Related: The Secretive Bank Of England - Controlling The World's Money Supply + Banking Data Dump

This printing will be done by a bankrupt entity with more IOU’s around the globe than humanity can count. How will the massive supply of dollars issued by a bankrupt and fraudulent issuer possibly be a “good thing” for the value of dollars? There is none!

This process, no matter how simple it seems to be, is two-steps too far for the deflationists! The real result of credit freezing up will amount to a national and probably a global famine. It is incredible that the aspect of credit is almost never connected to “distribution”. Forget about actual farming or production needing credit to function, how will products make it to store shelves without credit even if it does “grow”?


Fight The New World Order with Global Non Compliance:

Understand your enemy, and understand the weapons they use. Then use those same weapons against them. The money system is the head of the snake. Cut the head off the snake and the rest of it will whither and die.

There need be No violence, no guns, no banners, no slogans, no group think, just a united act of global non compliance.

Remember, that it is much easier to fight for principles than to live up to them and it takes a far braver man to stand up for what is right and spit in the face of authority than it does to blindly follow orders due to fear of the consequences. Understand that we are all one and the key to real change and unity in this world lies with love.



Related: Spain Sets Massive Precedent - Charges Its Central Bankers In Court

It is time for the people of the world to stop and realise that the divisions that supposedly exist amongst us are an illusion. There is no division and its time for everyone to understand the truth of this.

It is through the constantly promoted illusion of division that the system is able to function but in order for it to do so, it needs public compliance.

Its time for us all to collectively stand together and address the root cause of the problems, which lies in the fraudulent monetary system.

Stop complying with it, and you will shut down the monetary system.

Fight The New World Order with Global Non Compliance








The Occult Meanings Of Mortgage: Why A Mortgage Is A Pledge To The Dead

Owning a nice home is a dream that most people have. Deep down, nearly everyone wants to live in a nice home. One of the main obstacles that prevents most people from owning a home of their dream is the high cost.



Depending where people live today, a regular house can cost a few hundred thousand dollars. Because houses are so expensive, most people need to get a specific type of loan from a bank to pay for the house they want to live in. This type of loan is called a mortgage.

Related: Confirmed - Loans & Mortgages Are Created Out Of Thin Air By The Banks

What most people do not know about a mortgage is that it is designed to enslave them with fictitious debt, allowing the banksters to collect money from them and give it to their masters (the Dark Magicians). The main purpose of this deception is to trick people to give some of their life force energy to the Dark Magicians through the magical medium called paper currency.

To learn how the Dark Magicians and their minions are able to trick you to give some of your life force energy to them, you need to find the occult (hidden) meaning of the words mortgage and currency and study them until you innerstand what they mean on a deeper level.

Once you really innerstand the hidden meaning of the words mortgage and currency, you should know that a mortgage is a pledge to the DEAD.



The Occult Meaning of Mortgage

One of the overt definitions of the word mortgage is “a conveyance of an interest in property as security for the repayment of money borrowed.”

OxfordDictionaries.com
defines the word mortgage using these exact words: “A legal agreement by which a bank or other creditor lends money at interest in exchange for taking title of the debtor's property, with the condition that the conveyance of title becomes void upon the payment of the debt.”



Related: Why The Whole Banking System Is A Scam - Godfrey Bloom MEP

Black's Law Dictionary 6th edition defines the word mortgage using these exact words: "A mortgage is an interest in land created by a written instrument providing security for the performance of a duty or the payment of a debt."

The three definitions of the word mortgage in the previous paragraph only define what a mortgage is at the surface level. To find the occult (hidden) meaning of the word mortgage, you need to use an etymology dictionary to help you find the origins of the word mortgage. You also need to split the word mortgage into two words, transforming it into the term "mort-gage".

The word mortgage/mort-gage originated from two Old French words, which are mort and gage. In Old French, mort means dead and gage means pledge. The word pledge comes from Old French plegier, meaning “to promise” or “to solemnly promise or guarantee”.

Dictionary.com defines pledge as “a solemn promise or agreement to do or refrain from doing something”.

Webster's Complete Dictionary of the English Language (1886) defines the word pledge using these exact words: "Any thing given or considered as a security for the performance of an act; as, a man gives his word or makes a promise to another, which is received as a pledge for fulfillment; the mutual affection of husband and wife is a pledge for the faithful performance of the marriage covenant; mutual interest is the best pledge for the performance of treaties.



Related: Switzerland Follows Iceland In Declaring War Against The Banksters

"Their liveliest pledge of hope."" It also defines the word pledge using these exact words: "A surety; a hostage." Merriam-Webster.com defines the word hostage as "a person held by one party in a conflict as a pledge pending the fulfillment of an agreement" or "a person taken by force to secure the taker's demands".

To connect the dots, when you take out a mortgage, you unknowingly make a pledge (promise) to the dead, and therefore you agree to be a hostage of the dead. This is one of the occult definitions of the word mortgage. So, what is the dead?

The dead represents the Dark Forces (groups of demons) and their corporations (corpses or dead bodies).

As described in my book titled Word Magic: The Powers & Occult Definitions of Words:


“A corporation is a “corp-o-ration” or “corpse-o-ration”. The plural form of the word corporation can be written as corps. Phonetically, the word corps sounds similar to the word corpse, which is defined as “a dead body, usually of a human being”.

The legal system sees you as a corpse to be used as a ration to feed the Matrix of the Dark Forces. Hence, the word corporation/corp-o-ration/corpse-o-ration.

Do you remember what I said in Chapter 2 about why the government sees you as a legally dead person, because you are considered lost at sea or dead at sea?

The word mortgage also has a strong connection to the words morgue and mortuary. This is why the place where dead bodies are stored is called a morgue. Mortgages are created in a way that makes them hard to pay off, so that when people get a mortgage (a pledge to the dead), they have to work most of their lives to pay it off.

This allows the debt-based monetary system to drain their energy to charge the dead with currency; the currency that people make from many hours of working at a corporation (dead body).



Related: All Wars Are Bankers' Wars

The word currency and the medium currency are two of the most effective things that the Dark Forces like to use to drain your life force energy.

Below is another excerpt from my book titled Word Magic: The Powers & Occult Definitions of Words. This excerpt reveals how currency is used to trick you to allow the Dark Forces to drain your life force energy.


“As for the word currency, its hidden definition is the “flow of energy”. This is why the stored energy in a battery is called electric current or the currency of electricity. The word currency originated from the Latin word currens, the present participle of currere, which means “to run”.

Now, why would they based the word currency on a Latin word that does not have much to do with paper money or coin? Because it is not really about the paper money or coin. Instead, it is about harnessing the energy of humanity!

To innerstand why currency has a strong relation to energy, you need to find the occult meaning of the word currency. To do this, you need to use phonetics and separate the word currency into two words. When spoken out loud, the word currency sounds similar to the term “current-sea”.

What does a current do in a river? It flows or runs to the sea! Keep in mind that the Latin word currens means “to run”.

The word current can also mean “a flowing; flow, as of a river” or “something that flows, as a stream”. The flowing movement of currents is what causes the freshwater in the river to flow to the sea. Once the freshwater is in the sea, its current is now part of the “current-sea” or the “current of the sea”. Hence, the word currency/current-sea. ...

The word currency also sounds similar to the term “current chi”. In Chinese, the word chi (also known as qi) means natural energy, “life force”, or “energy flow”. Be aware that the Chinese word chi is pronounced somewhat similar to the English word sea. Based on these occult definitions, currency means the “flow of life force energy”.

When you really think about it, currency is a medium for exchanging or transferring life force energy, which is why the Dark Forces are obsessed with using currency to drain your life force energy.”

At the deeper level, when people get a mortgage, they basically agree to sign their life away to the dead. They also agree to make a promise to the dead to charge it with their energy, so that the dead can stay alive. In other words, they agree to make a solemn pledge to the dead to ensure that the dead will be paid and charged with life force energy.

Phonetically, the word dead sounds similar to the word debt. A word that has a strong connection to the words dead and debt is mortgage.

When you pay a mortgage/debt/dead, you basically commit sin. If you want evidence of this, go to Merriam-Webster.com and search for the definition of debt and you should see the word sin as one of its definitions.

The word sin originated from Old English synn, meaning “moral wrongdoing, injury, mischief, enmity, feud, guilt, crime, offense against God, misdeed”.

The reason why you commit sin when you pay a debt is because you basically help the Dark Forces to enslave the human race. The debt system is controlled by the Dark Forces and they are using it to drain the energy of humanity and harm nature.

Using the debt system to harm living beings and nature is against Natural Law (God’s Law)
.



Related: Warning: New Zealand Government And Big Banks In Collusion For Farm Land Grab: The Same Scam As Run In The United States And Australia

Maybe this is why the Bible verse Romans 6:23 says, “For the wages of sin is death”. Sin is debt/dead/death.

By now you should know how the words mortgage, debt, dead, currency, corporation and battery are all related to the process of harnessing the energy of humanity.

This drama is all about tricking humanity to consent to be a “battery“, so that the Dark Forces and their minions can use our life force energy to charge their dead matrix system.

To learn what this matrix is, read my empowering article titled The Artificial Matrix and the Hidden Agenda of Cryptocurrency and study the information in my sixth seminar titled The Matrix Decoded: Decoding the Occult Messages in The Matrix.



What Can You Do to Free Yourself From a Mortgage

By now you should know why you should never get a mortgage. Taking out a mortgage is like asking for a death sentence. If you have a mortgage and want to know how to free yourself from it, you need to first know how to defend your natural rights.

You also need to learn how the legal system really works. My book Word Magic: The Powers & Occult Definitions of Words is a great source of knowledge that teaches you how the legal system works from behind the scenes.


Related Articles:


Bankers Beware: The First Of Many Salvos

Anna von Reitz: The Banking System Including Specifics On The World Bank And Karen Hudes

A Discourse On The Little-Known History Of The Global Banking System

Central Banking Exposed: Central Banks Only Care About Debt, Profit And Control

Governments Are Corporations & The Gold Standard Will Break Up The Banking Cartel

Hell's Top Banker Explains "How To Destroy The Global Economy"

The Money Changers

The Three Varieties Of Money

The Truth About Money Is Out & Austerity In 8 Minutes: Why It Does Not Work, Why It Is Still Practised



Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi

Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi

Former Satanic Priest Exposes The Four Main Tenets Of Satanic Ideology & Are You A Satanist? You Could Be And Not Even Know It + Ask An Ex-Satanist Anything - Katy Perry Super Bowl Ritual
June 30 2023 | From: Sitshow / MarkPassio / Various

In January of 2015, Mark Passio, former Satanic priest, gave a clear and on point, explanation of the ideology of the church of Satan. His knowledge comes from his experience as a former priest in the church of Satan, a branch of the Dark Occult.



Now Passio has changed his personal ideology 180 degrees and helps to expose the insidious precepts of Satanism. Earlier this year, Mark Passio joined Lee Ann McAdoo from Alex Jones' InfoWars for an online interview wherein he discussed the "4 main tenets of Satanism."

Related: How The Term “Satan” Originated And How Satanism Controls Entities & The Djinn (Jinn) And Their
Connection To The Shadow People


Mark's website, is www.whatonearthishappening.com. He was a speaker at a conference in Philadelphia, PA on April 10-12, 2015, advertised on his website, which sought to establish a much more inclusive and caring world view than what he previously believed in.

As Passio explains he was dissatisfied with religion and over time became angry and and gravitated towards the branch of Satanism called the Dark Occult.

His writing and music was recognized by a Satanic church figure, the late Anton LaVey and LaVey asked him to become a priest in the church and to take on the role of converting others to the Satanic counter-religion.

While he does not explain why he left the church of Satan, Passio does explain that his associates within the group were completely unconcerned with him leaving, as they felt confident that nothing he could do could affect them or their power.



Related:
Occult Holidays And Sabbats: Why Holidays Are Satanic Rituals

Is it harmful for society to associate the word Satanism solely with human and animal sacrifices and sexual crimes? Could it be that such a definition allows the more sensitive and insidious aspects of the ideology to continue on and become accepted or institutionalized?

What is very interesting about the "Satanic ideology" that Mark Passio describes is that the precepts are not specifically racism or bigotry, the kinds of hatred we frequently associate with criminal acts.


The "4 main tenets of Satanism" as he explains are:

1. Self Preservation

2. Moral Relativism

3. Social Darwinism

4. Eugenics



These concepts [detailed further below] exist on a sliding scale and it is not clear to what degree they are actually practiced by Satanists.

The individuals who practice such a selfish philosophy unbalanced by love or compassion for others would seem like sociopaths among us, perhaps free of criminal records, but who take no risk or responsibility to improve the lives of less fortunate people in society.

As Passio explains, Self Preservation is among the highest Satanic principles, and not in the acceptable sense of being defensive.



Related: The Fight to Save America From Satan's Subliminal Rock Messages

We may know many people in our lives who we consider harmless individuals, without criminal records, who indeed show philosophical traits in common with Satanism, however we would never think of calling them Satanic because we associate that offensive word with human and animal sacrifices, which is a deception that conceals the nature of Satanism as the inverse of Christianity.

For example where Christianity might practice forgiveness and freedom from dogma, Satanism prefers the tools of mercilessness and oppression.

If more corporate businesses than not identify with the ideology of Satanism in their business practices, then are we living in a pre-dominantly Satanic world?


If so, then it is only individuals, practicing self preservation balanced with Jesus' fruits of the Spirit such as compassion to other human beings, that make the world unevil. 

Today Passio  is using his knowledge not to create converts but to expose the Satanic ideology in an effort to reveal how harmful it is.



If it goes un-identified, then it will continue to overwhelm our technological society, in the businesses and sciences, and allow the elite to be dangerously misguided.

We make the world how we create it to be. We are free to create new and better systems of business based on morally objective ideology to overcome old and inferior systems of enslavement.

Despite the aesthetic symbols seen in the background of his recording location, Passio speaks powerfully and knowledgeably against Satanic tools used to oppress massive numbers of people.

He shows that he has re-wired himself in favor of love. On his website the footer reads: All is Love. Which is clearly not the belief of a Satanist.



Former Satanist Exposes Occult Secrets

De-mystifying the occult with Mark Passio. Passio, an independent researcher, public speaker, radio talk show host, conference organizer and freedom activist from Philadelphia, PA., has undertaken the task of assembling vast amounts of research in the areas of metaphysics, occultism, spirituality, symbology and consciousness studies.






Partial Transcript from "Former Satanist Exposes Occult Secrets"

7:41 -


“It has nothing to do with the Christian notion of the devil. Satanism has 4 main tenets or overarching principles of belief.

And that is that self-preservation is the highest goal. And you should do whatever you can to advance your personal power and influence in the world no matter who you really have to walk all over, step on, or hurt to get what you want.

That's really the number one tenet and if you look at society most of society is stuck in that cut-throat, dog-eat-dog, mentality."

...

"Moral relativism is the second major tenet which is that there is really no such thing as objective standards of right and wrong behavior. That we as human beings can get to decide upon our whims what right and wrong are and base our actions accordingly.

And if you look at most of society I would say more people than not are moral relativists than moral objectivists who think that there is an objective standard of right and wrong behavior. So that's also very pervasive in society."

8:02 -


"The Third major tenet is social darwinism, the idea that the most ruthless in society have some sort of a predetermined idea or pre-destined right to basically rule over everybody else in society because their genetics got them there, and made them fit for rulership.

And many people will actually think like that and think that that's ok, that that's just the natural order or the way things are. You know, and so that's also very pervasive in our society."

8:33 -


"And finally the 4th main pillar of Satanism is eugenics, the idea that those who are socially fit to rule, and they're the fittest in society and therefore they've come out on top and they're ruling the roost, well they can get to decide who basically propagates their genes and who does not, or in other words, who gets to live and who dies.

Who must die."


Related Articles:

Retired Head Of Los Angeles FBI Tells All: Illuminati, Satanism, Pedophile Rings

The Occult Origins Of Christmas

18 Reasons Why I Don’t Celebrate Halloween

Pizzagate: Melania Trump Puts Elite Pedo Ring On Notice During Easter Visit

Why You Need To Understand the Occult -Seminar: The Nature of Sacred Symbolism and Hidden Knowledge





Are You A Satanist? You Could Be And Not Even Know It + Ask Ex-Satanist Anything - Katy Perry Super Bowl Ritual

This is an interview with a former priest of the Church of Satan, Mark Passio, discussing how the Satanism normally thought of in the world today (the Worship of a "devil" by confused and misguided people) is far more insidious than we could have possibly imagined. 

Instead of small gatherings, acting as individuals (usually we think of satanists as crazy unbalanced teens or psychopaths), Passio describes Satanism is actually a recruiting mechanism for a far darker agenda. Lawyers, Doctors and nearly every other high ranking figure in society was in attendance during his time with them.

Related: Satanic Pedophilia Network Exposed In Australia - It Starts At The TOP, Just Like In The USA And UK

They revealed to him that their efforts are global in scale and have been operating for thousands of years in a cohesive unified effort under the banner of Christianity, Islam, Judaism and nearly every other major institution of thought including Science, Law and Government.

Satanism is not wholly what the official Church of Satan offers in it's writings, it is actually an organization which incorporates organize crime, and fits the profile described by Gordon Duff in his work on the OCC (Organized Crime Cabal); the "illuminati" as they are popularly known.


Goal of Occulted Satanism


Their aim is simple: to push Satanic belief systems on to the masses causing self destructive tendencies; divide and conquer.

People spend most of their lives trying to fight for their egocentric desires, destroying themselves and society in the process, "requiring authorities" at all levels to keep the ignorant masses under control.

The Cabal, or Dark Occultists, position themselves in power to be that controlling force - bringing "order to chaos".



Related: John Kerry Admits They're Making 'Order Out Of Chaos' For 'World Order'

Occulted Satanism is more a philosophy, a set of beliefs and ideas, pushed on the masses under many guises; nearly all of which are accepted unconsciously.

Materialism, Corporatism, Narcissism, Atheism and nearly all world religions (as they are practiced) - can be thought of as Satanic in this context. (read this wikipedia article on Satanism to provide a context for the popularly known version vs the Occulted version discussed by Passio).

One shocking revelation offered by Passio, and confirmed for oneself by honest investigation, is that the world at large is in a state of consciousness which could be thought of as Satanic.



Related: Vladimir Putin: The New World Order Worships Satan

Stated more simply, humanity is being indoctrinated into Satanic belief systems, modes of thought, and do not realize it because they have a false version of Satanism pushed by the media.

We think Satanism involves "the devil" and sacrificing animals by a few 'bad apples' that are not connected in anyway, but in truth this is not actually the case.

Within the definitions of Satanism provided by Mark, we have the following Tenants (I drafted these in my own words listening to the show):

1. Narcissism

"Me and my needs are the only thing that matters, even at the cost of everyone else". Survival of the self, is most important. "No one else and their personal suffering, matters unless I am affected."

Compassion for others is weakness. (Narcissistic personality disorder, also known as NPD, is a disorder in which the individual has a distorted self image, unstable and intense emotions, is overly preoccupied with vanity, prestige, power and personal adequacy, lacks empathy, and has an exaggerated sense of superiority; balancing their low self image.

NPD is closely associated with egocentrism - a personality characteristic in which people see themselves and their interests and opinions as the only ones that really matter).

2. Moral Relativism

"There is no such thing as truth, I make up what right and wrong are based on what I want. If I can get away with it, then it's "right" and I should; its only wrong, if I get caught."

The belief that objective morality doesn't exist and neither does Truth. This is Solipsism, the belief that there is no truth because we can not know it with absolute certainty; "the view or theory that the self is all that can be known to exist" - Wikipedia.

As such, "what I believe is the only thing that matters, and if I don't believe it - it doesn't exist." New Age Doctrine of - "Ignore the negative, and it will magically go away."




Related: Lucis Trust, Alice Bailey, World Goodwill And Lucifer - The False Light Of The World

3. Social Darwinism

"I focus on my survival and personal needs only; by any means necessary. What gets the job done, whatever I need to do to survive, is the only thing that matters. If someone else can't do the same, they are weak and deserve what they get."

4. Eugenics

"I get to decide who lives and dies, what their value is only in relation to my own self interest. If your not with me your against me. I am superior you are inferior."


Here the aim is to cull the masses, keep the population at a 'workable level'. In the past this was done more directly (i.e. the Holocaust) but today Eugenics is unfolding in an Epi-eugenic way. People, by their own beliefs and actions, eat food that kills them off, and kill each other off in unnecessary conflicts.




Related: Eugenics and the Depopulation Agenda


Other Points

"Humans are just animals - morality, compassion and empathy are just human inventions - only might is right."

There is no God, no organizing force in the Universe; only Entropy - Scientific Atheism is Satanic within this context.


Are you a Satanist?

That question usually offends us so much we never ask ourselves honestly. Let me cast the limelight on myself for the moment. 



The 'Cremation of Care' ritual cermony held annually by the elite in the US at Bohemian Grove, CA.

During my late teens and early 20's, I was a major drug addict. I stole from my family, friends and stores regularly to sustain my addiction.

Doing anything I could to stave off the dope sickness, I always felt the moral wrongness of my actions.

Eventually I made the choice to get clean and moved away from the situations that tempted me. Finally I healed the true cause of the addiction within myself, and now even if I had heroin within my grasp I wouldn't find value in the experience of taking it.

The point is, that I justified my actions, despite having a conscious awareness of how wrong they are, and as such, I was acting as a Satanist.

All my justifications and rationalizing won't change my Satanic behavior, because at the end of the day what I chose to do, was in harmony with the plans of the Dark Occultists.



Related: The Peace Sign And Satanism

Anyone who acts in this way is for all intents and purposes an Agent of the Cabal.

Using this very strict definition, we can easily see that nearly everyone in our modern world is acting out the plans of the Cabal unconsciously.


I know this can be a sobering realization, but can be empowering once we accept it, because we realize that we can personally take action to change.



Why is This Important?

Once we begin to realize that our world views, beliefs and ideals are indoctrinated into us subliminally, we can begin to empower ourselves to take our lives back by reviewing it consciously.

The PRIMARY reason why most people are not Moral, and adhere to passivity in their lives is because of a low self image, which was developed early on in life, and supported by many hidden belief systems pushed by our modern world.

This realization, coupled with a deep drive to rediscover who we really are and undo the years of unconscious programming, slowly heals us.



Related: Pope Francis Declares Lucifer As God?

Eventually we not only feel better on a daily basis, but we begin to realize that only through ourselves, the personal work of gaining true knowledge and acting in that knowledge, will undo the horrors of this world. 

Humanity as a whole has been conditioned to be dark and materialistic, doomed to self destruction, unless we look in the mirror and realize it is all our collective behaviors and beliefs which maintain the status quo.

Ultimately, we can acknowledge this is happening "to us" and realize only we can do something about it.

Authorities can not 'save us' because blind faith in authorities are the root of the problem. We must become our own guru's and rediscover who we really are, which will naturally undo the years of Satanic programing, and embolden us to act morally in the future. 



Related Articles:

Lucifer Revisited: The Testimony Of Eracidni Murev Te & Christopher Lee Describes The Power Of Satanic Rituals In 1975 Video

Satanists Are Gaslighting Us

The Top 10 Most Evil, Demonic But True Events Of 2019 That Indicate The Rise Of Satanism

Jeffrey Epstein "Commits Suicide" & Epstein Arrest Supports Q Anon Claims Of Global Satanic Cult Blackmailing Political Elites

It’s Time To Tell The Truth About The Global War On Christianity (And The Rise Of Satanism)

The Reality Of War: Memorial Day Normalizes Satanic Human Sacrifice

The New York Times Makes Another Attempt To Normalize Pedophilia & Hollywood Is A Satanic Cesspool



Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi

Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi

The Violence-Inducing Effects Of Psychiatric Medication & The Psychiatric Agenda Destroys Creative Children
June 29 2023 | From: KellyBroganMD / JonRappoport / Various

On May 17, 2017, we learned that Chris Cornell of Soundgarden had reportedly committed suicide by hanging.



His family reports knowing a different Chris than one who would make this fatal decision, and suspect his anti-anxiety prescription in the altered state he was witnessed to be in the night he died.

Related:
Is Psychiatry Bullshit? Some Psychiatrists View The Chemical-Imbalance Theory As A Well-Meaning Lie + Psychotropic Drugs, Are They Safe? Fourteen Lies That Our Psychiatry Professors Taught Us In Medical School

Perhaps an “addict turned psychiatric patient”, like so many, Chris Cornell seemed to have left the frying pan of substance abuse for the fire of psychiatric medication risks.

For reasons that remain mysterious, those under the influence of psychiatric medication often specifically choose to hang themselves in their moment of peak impulsivity.

Some, like Kim’s husband Woody who was never depressed a day in his life but prescribed Zoloft by his internist, even verbalize a felt experience of his head coming apart from his body in the days before he was found hanged in his garage.



Related: Dr. Kelly Brogan's Takedown Of Big Pharma's SSRI Anti-Depressant Drug Lies Hits Bestseller Lists

Then there’s 14 year old Naika, a foster child in Florida who hanged herself on a FB livestream after being treated with 50mg of Vyvanse, a drug treatment for ADHD that leads to a domino effect of diagnoses and psychiatric meds including a 13 fold increase in likelihood of being prescribed an antipsychotic medication and 4 fold increase in antidepressant medications than controls.

Are these just rare anecdotes? Is this just the cost of treatment that is helpful for most? Are we blaming medication for what might have been severe mental illness that was undertreated and/or undiagnosed?


Informed Consent: the Premise of Ethical Medicine

I believe first and foremost in informed consent. If you are informed of the risks, benefits, and alternatives to a given treatment, you will be empowered to make the best decision for yourself based on your personal, family, philosophical, and religious life context.

But the truth is that prescribers are not in a position to share the known risks of medications because we learn only of their purported benefits with a short-tagline of dismissively rare risks that are thought to be invariably outweighed by the presenting clinical concern.



Related: Kids Meditate Instead Of Taking ADHD Medications, See Amazing Resuts + Elementary School Sends Kids To Meditation Instead Of Detention And The Results Are Astounding

But what about serious risks – including impulsive suicide and homicide – surely we are informing patients of that possibility, right?

Wrong.

In fact, the FDA and the pharmaceutical industry have gone to great lengths to conceal multiple signals of harm so we certainly can’t expect your average prescriber to have done the investigative work required to get at the truth.

In fact, from 1999-2013, US psychiatric medication prescriptions have increased by a whopping 117% concurrent with a 240% increase in death rates from these medications.



Related: Nutrition And Mental Health + ADHD Is A Fabricated Disease, Says Reputed Neurologist

So let’s review some of the evidence that suggests that it may not be in your best interest or the best interest of those around you for you to travel the path of medication-based psychiatry.

Because, after all, if we don’t screen for risk factors – if we don’t know who will become the next victim of psych-med-induced violence – then how can we justify a single prescription?

Are we at a point in the history of medicine where random acts of personal and public violence are defensible risks of treatment for stress, anxiety, depression, inattention, psychosocial distress, irritable bowel syndrome, chronic fatigue, and even stress incontinence?



Let the Science Speak

Suicide

Prescribed specifically to “prevent” suicide, antidepressants now come with a black box warning label of suicide risk since 2010.

Multi-billion dollar lawsuits like the settlement of Study 329 have been necessary to unlock the cabinet drawers of an industry that cares more about profit than human lives.

A reanalysis of study 329 which initially served as a landmark study in 2001 supporting the prescription of antidepressants to children, has now demonstrated that these medications are ineffective in this population and play a causal role in suicidal behavior.

Concealing and manipulating data that shows this signal of harm, including a doubling of risk of suicide with antidepressant treatment, has generated seeming confusion around this incomprehensibly unacceptable risk profile.

In fact, a reanalysis of an influential US National Institute of Mental Health 2007 study, revealed a four-fold increase in suicide despite the fact that the initial publication claimed no increased risk relative to placebo.



Related: 10 Monumentally False Claims Made By Conventional Medicine About Health + How Far Has The Medical Profession Fallen From The Hippocratic Oath?

According to available data – 3 large meta-analyses – more psychiatric treatment means more suicide. Well, that might seem a hazard of the field, right? Where blaming medications for suicide would be like saying that umbrellas cause the rain.

That’s why studies in non-suicidal subjects and even healthy volunteers who went on to experience suicidality after taking antidepressants are so compelling.

Benzodiazepines (like what Cornell was taking) and hypnotics (sleep and anxiety medications) also have a documented potential to increase risk of completed and attempted suicide and have been implicated in impulsive self-harm including self-inflicted stab wounds during changes to dosage.

We also find the documented possibility that suicidality could emerge in patients who are treated with this class of medications even when they are not suicidal with recent research stating:


“Benzodiazepine receptor agonist hypnotics can cause parasomnias, which in rare cases may lead to suicidal ideation or suicidal behavior in persons who were not known to be suicidal”.

And, of course, these medications themselves provide the means and the method with a known lethal poisoning profile.


Homicide

Clearly murderers are mentally ill, right? What if I told you that the science supports the concern that we are medicating innocent civilians into states of murderous impulsivity?

When Andrew Thibault began to research the safety of a stimulant drug recommended to his son, he entered a rabbit hole he has yet to emerge from.

After literally teaching himself code to decrypt the data on the FDA Adverse Event Reporting System website, he was able to cull 2,000 pediatric fatalities from psychotropic medications, and 700 homicides.



Related: The Drugs May Be The Problem – Inconvenient Truths About Big Pharma And The Psychiatric Industry + Psychologist Speaks Out: Psychiatry Is Misleading Public About Mental Disorders

A Freedom of Information Act and a lawsuit later, he continues to struggle with redacted and suppressed information around 24 homicides directly connected to the use of psychotropics including the homicide by a 10 year old treated with Vyvanse of an infant.

Another case, ultimately recovered, involved statements from a 35 year old perpetrator / patient, who murdered her own daughter, as directly implicating as:


“When I took nortriptyline, I immediately wanted to kill myself. I’d never had thoughts like that before”.

To begin to scientifically explore the risk of violence induced by psychotropic medication, a study sample needs to be representative, the reason for taking the drug needs to be taken into consideration, the effect needs to be controlled for, as do any other intoxicants.

Professor Jari Tiihonen’s research group analysed the use of prescription drugs of 959 persons convicted of a homicide in Finland and found that pre-crime prescription of benzodiazepines and opiates resulted in the highest risk (223% increase) of committing homicide.

Relatedly, eleven antidepressants, six sedative/hypnotics and three drugs for attention deficit hyperactivity disorder represented the bulk of 31 medications associated with violence reported to the FDA.



Related: 4 Facts About ADHD That Teachers & Doctors Never Tell Parents

Now an international problem, a Swedish registry study identified a statistically significant increase in violence in males and females under 25 years old prescribed antidepressants.

Implicated in school shootings, stabbings, and even the Germanwings flight crash, prescribing of psychotropics prior to these incidences has been catalogued on ssristories.org leading me to suspect psychiatric prescribing as the most likely cause in any and all reports of unusually violent behavior in the public sphere.


Is Association Really Causation?

Beyond the cases where violence to self or others was induced in a non-violent, non-depressed, non-psychotic individual, what other evidence is there that speaks to how this could possibly be happening?

The most seminal paper in this regard, in my opinion, was published in 2011 by Lucire and Crotty. Ten cases of extreme violence were committed by patients who were prescribed antidepressants – not for major mental illness or even for depression – but for psychosocial distress (i.e. work stress, dog died, divorce).



Related: The Shocking Truth About Antidepressant Drug Studies + Peter Breggin MD: How Do Psychiatric Drugs Really Work?

What these authors identified was that these ten subjects had variants to liver enzymes responsible for drug metabolism exacerbated by co-administration of other drugs and substances including herbs. All returned to their baseline personalities when the antidepressant was discontinued.

Now referred to as akathisia-induced impulsivity, the genetic risk factors for this Russian Roulette of violence are not screened for prior to psychotropic prescribing.

Akathisia is a state of severe restlessness associated with thoughts of suicide and homicide.

Many patients describe it as a feeling-less state of apathy – and what I would describe as a disconnection from their own souls, their own experience of human connection, and any measure of self-reflection.



Related: Key Factors To Overcoming Depression Without Drugs

The genetic underpinnings of this kind of medication-induced vulnerability are just beginning to be explored with identification of precursor symptoms to violence including severe agitation.

In a randomized, placebo-controlled trial, healthy volunteers exhibited an almost 2 fold increased risk of symptoms that can lead to violence.

A 4-5 fold increased risk was noted in patients prescribed a generic version of the antidepressant Cymbalta, off-label, for stress urinary incontinence (a non-psychiatric indication).


There is Another Way

Perhaps it’s as if we are offering the blade edge of a knife to those falling off the cliff of struggle and suffering. Because the idea of managing a chemical imbalance with chemicals seems to make sense.

But at what cost?


The laundry list of acute and chronic adverse effects is growing, and the unpredictable risk of medication-induced violence should lead to an urgent cessation of all psychotropics.

Because it takes 17 years for physician practice to reflect published science, we need grassroots level information sharing. We need to inform ourselves before we consent to engage a system that regards you as an impersonal statistic.

We live in a cultural context that makes no room for the relevance, meaning, and significance of symptoms – symptoms are simply bad and scary and they must be managed. We don’t make room for patients to ask why they are not ok.



Related: 7 Facts About Depression That Will Blow You Away

If you knew that your symptoms were reversible, healable, transformable, you might consider walking that path instead of assuming this level of risk for placebo-level efficacy of psychotropic medication. We would only euthanize a “mental patient” if we felt their condition was lifelong and unremitting.

In fact, every woman I have ever tapered off of psychiatric drugs into experiences of total vitality once believed that she would be a medicated psychiatric patient for life.

If you knew that radical self-healing potential lies within each and every one of us, if you only knew that was possible, you might start that journey today. It’s side effect free…




The Psychiatric Agenda Destroys Creative Children

“Take a child who wants to invent something out of thin air, and instead of saying no, tell him he has a problem with his brain, and then stand back and watch what happens. In particular, watch what happens when you give him a toxic drug to fix his brain. You have to be a certain kind of person to do that to a child. You have to be, for various reasons, crazy and a career criminal.” - The Underground, Jon Rappoport

First, here are a few facts that should give you pause:

Related: When your child is a psychopath

According to NAMI (National Alliance on Mental Illness);


“More than 25 percent of [US] college students have been diagnosed or treated by a professional for a mental health condition within the past year.”

NAMI: “One in four young adults between the ages of 18 and 24 have [we claim] a diagnosable mental illness.”

According to healthline.com, 6.4 million American children between the ages of 4 and 17 have been diagnosed with ADHD. The average age for the child’s diagnosis is 7.

BMJ 2016;352:i1457: “The number of UK children and adolescents treated with antidepressants rose by over 50% from 2005 to 2012, a study of five Western countries published in European Neuropsychopharmacology has found.”

Getting the picture?



Related: Harvard Research Finds Link Between Fluoridated Water, ADHD & Mental Disorders

Children are being diagnosed and dosed with toxic drugs at a staggering rate. But, as I have shown in many past articles, NO so-called mental disorder is based on a lab test.

No blood, saliva, genetic, brain test. ALL 300 or so official mental disorders are defined by menus of behaviors concocted by committees of psychiatrists.

On that foundation, the diagnoses and the drugs are handed out.

Let’s look at just one of the drugs: Ritalin (or any similar ADHD medicine). After a creative child is seen fidgeting in class, looking bored, studying what he wants to study, ignoring classroom assignments, focusing on what interests him, he is diagnosed with ADHD. Then comes the drug.

In 1986, The International Journal of the Addictions published an important literature review by Richard Scarnati. It was called “An Outline of Hazardous Side Effects of Ritalin (Methylphenidate)” [v.21, pp. 837-841].



Related: Before His Death, Father Of ADHD Admitted It Was A Fictitious Disease

Scarnati listed a large number of adverse effects of Ritalin and cited published journal articles which reported each of these symptoms.

For every one of the following (selected and quoted verbatim) Ritalin effects, there is at least one confirming source in the medical literature:

Paranoid delusions

Paranoid psychosis

Hypomanic and manic symptoms, amphetamine-like psychosis

Activation of psychotic symptoms

Toxic psychosis

Visual hallucinations

Auditory hallucinations

Can surpass LSD in producing bizarre experiences

Effects pathological thought processes

Extreme withdrawal

Terrified affect

Started screaming

Aggressiveness

Insomnia

Since Ritalin is considered an amphetamine-type drug, expect amphetamine-like effects

Psychic dependence

High-abuse potential DEA Schedule II Drug

Decreased REM sleep

When used with antidepressants one may see dangerous reactions including hypertension, seizures and hypothermia

Convulsions

Brain damage may be seen with amphetamine abuse.


Under this chemical assault on the brain, what are the chances that a creative child will go on in life to become an innovator, rather than a victim of psychiatric drugging?

Make a list of your favorite innovators. Imagine them as bored distracted children sitting in classrooms… and then diagnosed, and then hammered with drugs prescribed by a doctor.

This is happening now. The institution of psychiatry is making it happen. What about the consequences of diagnosing clinical depression in larger numbers of young children? What about the antidepressant drugs?



Related: The Science And Pseudoscience Of Children’s Mental Health + Creating ADHD Is The New Education

Here is just a sprinkling of information about antidepressants, from a huge body of literature:

Psychiatrist Peter Breggin: February 1990 American Journal of Psychiatry (Teicher et al, v.147:207-210) reports on:


“Six depressed patients, previously free of recent suicidal ideation, who developed `intense, violent suicidal preoccupations after 2-7 weeks of fluoxetine [Prozac] treatment.'

The suicidal preoccupations lasted from three days to three months after termination of the treatment. The report estimates that 3.5 percent of Prozac users were at risk.

While denying the validity of the study, Dista Products, a division of Eli Lilly, put out a brochure for doctors dated August 31, 1990, stating that it was adding `suicidal ideation’ to the adverse events section of its Prozac product information.”

An earlier study, from the September 1989 Journal of Clinical Psychiatry, by Joseph Lipiniski, Jr., indicates that in five examined cases people on Prozac developed what is called akathesia.

Symptoms include intense anxiety, inability to sleep, the “jerking of extremities,” and “bicycling in bed or just turning around and around.”



Related: The Roots Of Mental Health - Maybe They’re Not In Our Heads + Rising Rates Of Suicide: Are Pills The Problem?

Dr. Peter Breggin comments that akathesia:


"May also contribute to the drug’s tendency to cause self-destructive or violent tendencies … Akathesia can become the equivalent of biochemical torture and could possibly tip someone over the edge into self-destructive or violent behavior.

The June 1990 Health Newsletter, produced by the Public Citizen Research Group, reports, ‘Akathesia, or symptoms of restlessness, constant pacing, and purposeless movements of the feet and legs,
may occur in 10-25 percent of patients on Prozac.’”

The well-known publication, California Lawyer, in a December 1998 article called “Protecting Prozac,” details some of the suspect maneuvers of Eli Lilly in its handling of suits against Prozac.

California Lawyer also mentions other highly qualified critics of the drug:


"David Healy, MD, an internationally renowned psychopharmacologist, has stated in sworn deposition that `contrary to Lilly’s view, there is a plausible cause-and-effect relationship between Prozac’ and suicidal-homicidal events.

An epidemiological study published in 1995 by the British Medical Journal also links Prozac to increased suicide risk.”

When pressed, proponents of these SSRI antidepressant drugs (Prozac, Zoloft, Paxil, etc.) sometimes say, “Well, the benefits for the general population far outweigh the risk.”

But the issue of benefits will not go away on that basis.



Related: Why Nutritional Psychiatry Is The Future Of Mental Health Treatment + Depression Is A Symptom Of Nutrient Deficiency; Treating It With Drugs Is Not Only Ineffective But Dangerous

A shocking review-study published in The Journal of Nervous and Mental Diseases (1996, v.184, no.2), written by Rhoda L. Fisher and Seymour Fisher, called “Antidepressants for Children,” concludes:


“Despite unanimous literature of double-blind studies indicating that antidepressants are no more effective than placebos in treating depression in children and adolescents, such medications continue to be in wide use.”

In wide use. This despite such contrary information and the negative, dangerous effects of these drugs.

There are other studies: “Emergence of self-destructive phenomena in children and adolescents during fluoxetine treatment,” published in the Journal of the American Academy of Child and Adolescent Psychiatry (1991, vol.30), written by RA King, RA Riddle, et al.

It reports self-destructive phenomena in 14% (6/42) of children and adolescents (10-17 years old) who had treatment with fluoxetine (Prozac) for obsessive-compulsive disorder.

July, 1991. Journal of Child and Adolescent Psychiatry. Hisako Koizumi, MD, describes a thirteen-year-old boy who was on Prozac: “full of energy,” “hyperactive,” “clown-like.”

All this devolved into sudden violent actions which were “totally unlike him.”



Related: Evidence Points To Ft. Lauderdale Shooter Being “Jason Bourned” With Mind Altering Psychiatric Drugs And ISIS Video Indoctrination By U.S. Intelligence Operatives

September, 1991. The Journal of the American Academy of Child and Adolescent Psychiatry. Author Laurence Jerome reports the case of a ten-year old who moves with his family to a new location. Becoming depressed, the boy is put on Prozac by a doctor.

The boy is then “hyperactive, agitated … irritable.” He makes a “somewhat grandiose assessment of his own abilities.”

Then he calls a stranger on the phone and says he is going to kill him. The Prozac is stopped, and the symptoms disappear.

For money, for profit, for status, for control, there exists a professional class called psychiatrists. They approach children - particularly creative children who refuse to fall into lock-step with a regimented program of learning - as outliers, as ill, as strange, as maladjusted, as threats to the system.



Related: The Cult Of 'Scientism' Explained: How Scientific Claims Behind Cancer, Vaccines, Psychiatric Drugs And GMOs Are Nothing More Than Corporate-Funded Science Fraud

And this professional class takes action. Diagnose the children, drug them, bring them back into line, make them “normal,” reduce their curiosity and independence and drive and will power.

Instead of using overt physical force, they use relatively invisible chemical force.

Under the banner of caring, they perform, on the young, a scientific ritual of sacrifice, a rite of passage into the dead world where they, the elite rulers, exist.


Related Articles:


Nature’s Prozac: Nutrition For Mental Health


These Five Traits Can Only Be Found In Genuine Empaths & Psychic Abilities Everyone Can Unlock

Cover Stories Are Used To Control Explanations & Medical Propaganda Headlines For Gullible Minds

The Study Of Fundamental Consciousness Entering The Mainstream

How Facebook Has Become The Strategic Media Mouthpiece For The Global Elite & The Impact Of Social Media On Young People's Mental Health

Having Depression And Anxiety Means Having A Brain Constantly At War With Itself

Digital Addiction Increases Loneliness, Anxiety And Depression

New Study Finds Antidepressants To Be “Largely Ineffective And Potentially Dangerous”

Researcher Uncovers What May Be The Real Cause Of Depression

Another Natural Remedy For Alcoholism And Depression? South American Psychedelic Herb Promotes Feelings Of Well-Being, According To New Study



Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi

Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi

The Truth About Electro Magnetic Frequencies - What The Authorities Don't Tell You
June 28 2023 | From: StillnessInTheStorm / Various

A Clinical Trial: In early 1934, Johnson rented premises in San Diego for Royal Rife to begin clinical treatments.



Under his instructions, the University of Southern California arranged formal clinical trials of the Rife Beam Ray device.

Related: Royal Rife’s Energy Machine: Why It Was Really Silenced

They appointed a special committee of top doctors to oversee the project including, apart from Johnson and Kendall:

Dr Rufus Klein-Schmidt (President, University of Southern California)
Dr Edward Kopps (Metabolic Clinic, La Jolla, California)
Dr George Fisher (Children's Hospital, NY)
Dr Kad Meyer (Hooper Foundation, San Francisco, California)
Dr Whalen Morrison (Chief Surgeon, Santa Fe Railway)
Dr George Dock
Dr Alvin G. Foard, a pathologist

Sixteen cancer patients from the Pasadena County Hospital volunteered to be treated with the machine. The brief was for the patients to be treated at Rife's clinic in San Diego and after three months the doctors would perform an in-depth examination of any of the surviving patients at that time.

Rife reportedly treated the patients with three minute exposures to the beam ray device at file career frequencies once every three days.



Related: Data Indicates Cell Phones Expose Consumers To Radiation Levels Higher Than Manufacturers Claim, Says The French Government

Initial daily treatments were suspended due to extreme Jansch-Herxreimer reactions. At the end of three months, however, all the patients were still alive and were examined.

The doctors were amazed to pronounce that 14 of the 16 showed no signs of cancer and were pronounced clinically cured. The remaining two went for further treatments.



Related: The mere presence of your smartphone reduces brain power, study shows

Rife reasoned that maybe they were infected with a mutated form of the cancer virus and made some slight frequency adjustments. Four weeks later the remaining two patients were examined and also pronounced clinically cured The results were stunning, it was a major breakthrough

There is some discrepancy in the accounts of what happened next, but the most likely explanation is that the members agreed to do further work before publicizing the results.



Conflict Begins

Johnson then introduced Rife to Dr Mildred Schram of the International Cancer Foundation in Philadelphia.

However, on hearing of the work Schram allegedly made demands for experiments that Rife insisted would not and could not work Following much argument; he eventually refused to have anything further to do with the foundation Schram supposedly admitted years later that Rife had been right.

In the meantime (1935) Johnson had set up a clinic in Los Angeles to beat people using the beam ray device and Kendall and others were continuing experiments and treating people with it.



Related: Microwave frequency electromagnetic fields (EMFs) produce widespread neuropsychiatric effects including depression

In 1937, the medical committee who oversaw the clinical trials ended up arguing over when and how they should release the results with no actual decision ever being reacted.

By now they had plenty of evidence to support Rife's claims but they found themselves pressured by the medical authorities and feared that they would not be believed

A press release went ahead however, and on Friday 6 May 1938, the San Diego Evening Tribune published a front page article entitled "Dread Disease Germs Destroyed by Rays, Claim of S.D. Scientist".

However, the clinical trials were rot mentioned and Rife was cautious not to claim that the device represented an absolute cure for cancer.



Many Electromagnetic Hyper Sensitivity conditions develop slowly and silently over many years while the person is not presenting with any symptoms or complaints:

"People suffering from Electromagnetic Hyper Sensitivity (EHS) should not be treated as simply unfortunate individuals who cannot enjoy the benefits of wireless technology and electrical power like the rest. They should be treated as the "canary in the coal mine" serving as an early warning for the rest of humanity.

For those not familiar with the term "canary in the coal mine" - it originated when miners used to take caged canaries down to the coal mine with them. They positioned the cages on the ground. If dangerous gases (e.g. methane or carbon monoxide) leaked into the mine tunnels, these gases would cause the death of the canaries serving as a warning signal to exit the mine tunnels immediately.

The morbid bio-effects of EMF described in the 2012 Bio-initiative Report may trigger a range of disorders including neurological conditions, infertility, birth defects and cancer. Many of the conditions develop slowly and silently over many years while the person is not presenting with any symptoms or complaints.

And that is why we should treat the Electro-Hyper Sensitivity (EHS) syndrome and EHS sufferers - as a stark warning, alarm bells and sirens going off, that we should all heed to even if we still cannot see or feel the fire (YET)". 

- Dr. Jonathan Halpern, PhD | Electromagnetic Survival Radiation Guide


Related: Electromagnetic Hypersensitivity From Microwave Technology Finally Medically Proven


Conspiracy Theory

During fids time, a new player emerged. Dr Morris Fishbein was editor of the Journal of the American Medical Association between 1924 and 1949.

However, Fishbein was a very rich and powerful man who by that time owned all the stock of the AMA and had extremely powerful political connections. Fishbein approached Rife with an offer to buy the exclusive rights to the beam ray technology.

Rife refused. The details of the offer are unknown but Fishbein had made similar offers to other inventors of medical technologies claimed to cure cancer.

In ore case Fishbein made an offer to the creator of a herbal cancer cure called Harry Hoxey in which Fishbein would receive all profits from the invention for nine years and thereafter, at Fishbein's discretion, he would pay 10 per cent of future profits to Hoxey.



Related: AMI Smart Meters Are The Number One Health Hazard; Next Is Cell Phones, Per Medical Research Science

When Hoxey refused, Fishbein effectively destroyed him Hoxey was allegedly arrested 125 times in 16 months at Fishbein's instigation The charges never stuck but Hoxey was ruined

Fishbein then did the same to Rife. AMA officials started visiting doctors who were using Rife's machines and informed them they would be struck from the medical register if they did not stop immediately.

Many gave in and surrendered the machines to AMA investigators or allowed the machines to be destroyed. Others held out aid refused Marty were arrested or had equipment and notes seized and destroyed by FDA (Federal Food and Drug Administration) agents.

Fishbein refused to allow publication of any reference to Rife's work in the AMA journals and also supposedly pressured other medical journals insisting that they should not publish anything about Rife's work because it was all a fraud. A number of doctors actively opposed fids, including Johnson.



Related: Cell Phone Towers and What You Really Should Know About Them

But many of the doctors who had attended Johnson's banquet for Rife in 1931, fearing the loss of their medical licenses, started denying that they had ever heard of Rife, even though marry had been photographed with him at the banquet.



Today's Scientists on Dr Royal Rife


Another doctor and scientist, whose research has been buried for some time but has managed to resurface due to the work of avid supporters, is Dr Royal Raymond Rife M.D, who developed a frequency generator in the late 1920’s. In brief, Rife successfully treated 1,000 patients diagnosed with incurable cancer in the 1930’s. He was honoured with 14 awards and an honorary doctorate.

After the unsuccessful attempt by pharmaceutical companies to buy out his research and equipment, his office was ransacked, his research paperwork was stolen and the machine that healed all those 1,000 “incurable” cancer patients was destroyed.

In 1934, before this destruction occurred, the University of Southern California appointed a Special Medical Research Committee to bring terminal cancer patients from Pasadena County Hospital to Rife's San Diego Laboratory and clinic for treatment.

The team included doctors and pathologists assigned to examine the patients - if still alive - in 90 days. After the 90 days of treatment, the Committee concluded that 86.5% of the patients had been completely cured.

The treatment was then adjusted and the remaining 13.5% of the patients also responded within the next four weeks. The total recovery rate using Rife's technology was 100%.

What Rife had developed was a 100% effective cure for many forms of cancer. So why do we not know about this and why are there so many cancer research foundations in existence?

Put simply, it is due to the economic motives of the orthodox medical community, which relies on funding for cancer research - such funding often coming from pharmaceutical companies - and whose fortunes would be damaged if a cure for cancer was found. (That is, it’s OK to search for a cure but don’t really find one!)

This is a story that illustrates yet another grand attempt by the mainstream medical community to control the lives - and deaths - of so many millions of people today."

“In every culture and in every medical tradition before ours, healing was accomplished by moving energy."

- Albert Szent-Gyorgyi, Nobel Laureate in Medicine (1937) What Rife proved is that every health disorder has a frequency, which in turn responds (resonates) to a specific (optimal) frequency for its dissolving/healing in the body.



Related: Why Your Next Wi-Fi Setup Should Be a Mesh Network [Actually, why it should NOT]

Don't mistake Electro Magnetic Frequencies (EMF) as Pulsed Electro Magnetic Frequencies (PEMF). They are absolute opposites. One can kill you! The other can save you. Has anyone ever wondered why no one has ever had cancer of the heart?

I will tell you why. It is because the heart uses Pulsed Electro Magnetic Frequencies that oxygenate and keep a balanced PH. Electro Magnetic Frequencies are harmful and dangerous to every living organism! 

Pulsed Electro Magnetic Frequencies, however, are the counterbalance to this man-made scourge that has now created a prolific smog that covers the entire earth, from microwaves to electronic warfare that readily exists. 

We can't escape it.  



Related: Facts About Current Safety Standards For Cell Phone And Towers

The object you hold against your head every day is one of the worst offenders. It is called the mobile phone. Apart from aging you rapidly, it can kill you. 

Brain Cancer has increased 10 percent in the last ten years. Imagine 100 years from now! 

Dr Alan Back, a Naturopath from the USA who worked on electronic warfare for the US army, used his skills to invent a counter measure system to combat the Electro Magnetic Frequency problem that has now enveloped the earth.  

The worst part about it is that your own home is the very place that can make you sick.



Related:
Introduction / Overview: The ‘Healing Computer’ Technology

I have been a Naturopath for 36 years and every year - and particularly this last year - 83% of people presenting to me for medical scanning have chronic adrenal fatigue symptoms which relate to neurological physical.

Over 95% present with EMF symptoms and clumped Red Blood Cell symptoms, which affect the entire circulatory system as well as the immune system. 

This is happening right now and is certainly not a passing fad.



EMF Can Harm and Can Heal Using PEMF ( Pulsating Electromagnetic Field Therapy)




Related Articles:

Did you know about the CANCER ACT 1939?


Not So Smart Technology: Safety Inspector Blows The Whistle On Fire Hazards Of 'Smart' Electronics

5G Cell Phone Radiation: How The Telecom Companies Are Losing The Battle To Impose 5G Against The Will Of The People + French NGOs Demand Stop To ‘Out Of Control’ 5G Network

What Do Smart Meters And Vaccinations Have In Common? + Another Vaccine Dump

Can EMF Make Us More Susceptible To Coronavirus Infection? & FCC Chair Commits To Enhancing WiFi/5G During Pandemic Despite Warnings From Experts + The First Report Of 5G Injury & Health Advocate Urges Nelson City Council To Halt 5G Roll-Out

"Smart City" Is Really Government Spying On An Unimaginable Scale

5G And IoT: A Trojan Horse + Wifi Linked To Cancer And DNA Damage, Says New Report: Here’s What To Do

5G Network Uses Same EMF Waves As Pentagon Crowd Control System + NZ 5G Update: June 2018

What Parents Should Know About EMFs and WiFi & 5G Is An International Health Crisis In The Making

Microwave EMF Science: Deliberate Claptrap Misinformation? + ElectroSensitivity - A Case Study

The Gloves Come Off On EMF / Mobile / WiFi Radiation + Understanding The Dangers Of The “5G” Rollout

Electronic Torture + 21st-Century Bio-Hacking And Bio-Robotizing



Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi

Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi

World Of Naked Lies
June 27 2023 | From: DrSircus / AllGovernmentsLie / Various

Lying seems to be the foundation of human intelligence and civilization. Robert Fisk writes, “We do not live in a “post-truth” world, neither in the Middle East nor in the West – nor in Russia, for that matter. We live in a world of lies. And we always have lived in a world of lies.”



Anyone alive today that believes we are living in a world of truth, justice and love needs to have their heads examined.

Related: Why The Truth Is Vilified (And Lies Are Celebrated) Everyw here Across Our Twisted Society

We live in a world of lies and half-truths, which are really the same or worse than outright lies, because they confuse the human mind. Lies cause unmeasurable amounts of human suffering and lead people to early graves.

We lie and we never stop lying, even to ourselves. Governments lie and they want us to believe in their lies. The press lies pretending to represent the truth but that is understandable because they are wholly owned by elite masters who tell them what to publish. Historians lie but not all of them.

Egyptologists lie because they do not want to know anything besides what they have already thought of as the truth of Egypt’s ancient past.

Certainly, bankers lie about their honesty and doctor’s lie about the dangers of their drugs and surgery done without supplementing with magnesium.



Related: Dear Western Peoples; There Is No Freedom Without Truth

They even lie about heart attacks never saying people who go into cardiac arrest are actually dying of magnesium deficiencies. Dentists of course lie about fluoride and their use of the highly toxic neurological poison mercury.

Therefore, we lie and our institutions are built on pyramids of lies. So why do we trust liars? How can anyone be arrogant about realities of lies when there is no truth left? What is truth if we have nothing but lies?

What is amazing is that these past years they have even been lying about the weather. Imagine the weatherman telling people in New York that it is sunny and warm but when you step outside it is cold and raining. It is that bad.

I have written for nine years on global cooling probably publishing over 70 essays on the subject. Do a Google search on, Record high temperature and Record low temperature and see what comes up. I just got 9,460,000 results (0.55 seconds) for high temperatures and 78,100,000 results (0.58 seconds) for cold temperatures.

Not that the google search means much but it does suggest one start reading about what is going down on our planet if one is interested in surviving the future.



Record Cold USA During Summer in Dakotas & Great Lakes, Media Ignores




We have become accustomed to white lies in our everyday lives and have become accustomed to not believing everything we hear. Whether it is someone’s description on a dating app or a resume for work, we take what we listen to with a grain of salt.

Some people fiercely filter information for fabrications, exaggerations, plagiarism, white lies, and most of all: deception. However, as one study suggests, we are on average only able to catch 54% of lies.

Strikingly, in the same study, trained police officers, judges, and FBI agents were not that much better than the average person was.

All forms of information have lost their integrity. All institutions - from the academy to commerce to governance to non-profits - have lost their integrity.

Worse perhaps, than secret agencies telling lies with no evidence and the mainstream media telling lies on command from its financial masters, is an all-out war on truth.


Related: Fluoride Officially Classified As A Neurotoxin In World’s Top Medical Journals & Former EPA Senior Scientist Confirms Fluoride Lowers Children’s IQ

“There are facts, there are opinions, and there are lies,” says historian Deborah Lipstadt who encourages us all to go on the offensive against those who assault the truth and facts. “Truth is not relative,” she says. Therefore, we really have no choice but to question and challenge everything.

What is the truth of the liberal mind? What is their greatest wet dream? They want the whole world to be one big happy family, where borders are meaningless, people can freely move from one country to the next, and no society is inherently better than another is.

They preach diversity, but they want the world to be blended into one drab monoculture that falls in line with their beliefs and violently oppose others, who believe in quaint ideas of nationalism for example.

Today nationalists and patriots are evil people in the eyes of liberals and progressives who forget the truth of what these words mean. According to the Merriam-Webster dictionary, nationalism simply means “love for or devotion to one’s country.” According to thefreedictionary.com, a patriot is “a person who loves, supports, and defends his or her country and its interests.”



Related: Many Scientific “Truths” Are, In Fact, False + A Scientist Explains Why "Everything Is Fucked"

So for sure they lied about 9-11, what started the Second World War and about how the world is doing with global debt now hitting $217 trillion, which is 327% Of GDP. We could go on forever listing lies.

Religions lie. We know that because if that were not the truth then only one religion is a true one and the rest bull because they all contradict each other.

In a world of lies one has to wonder the truth about everything, even what happened in Germany during WWII?

Come on, they even lie about iodine in salt, as if it would do anyone any good because once put on the table the iodine evaporates quickly. Most people have no idea what truth is or the process of finding it.

The truth is as unpopular today as it has always been. If you are a person of truth and you hear the truth, it rather excites you. The truth, if we are not living it, is almost unbearable to hear.

The sounds of silence are the sounds of lies, omissions of fact and reality so large it is more than manipulation.

Did you know that one’s silence could be deadly? One can actually do mass murder with silence by deliberately holding back information that can be lifesaving.



Related: The Truth About Money Is Out & Austerity In 8 Minutes: Why It Does Not Work, Why It Is Still Practised

Tell that to your doctor for he is the one who most needs to know this. What is going on in Fukushima is perhaps the greatest silent lie. Things are so bad there we hear nothing about it.

Perhaps the most dangerous lies today center around Russia. Sick politicians in both American and Europe are risking all of our lives in a nuclear war with their lies. Crimea is Russian. All the people there speak Russian. Almost every one of them voted to rejoin Russia.

The West is completely irrational, not only about Islam but also about just about everything.

It is inviting its own destruction.

The West is completely separated from reality says Paul Craig Roberts.



Conclusion – A Little Bit of Truth

The heart can only stand the truth but our minds can wonder all over the universe of lies without problem.

We said in the beginning that lies hurt people. Powerful people everywhere routinely make decisions that hurt others. The old saying is right: Power really does corrupt.

No one is honest about their corruption so they have to lie. Therefore, the lies that permeate civilization start at the top among the most powerful.

Recent psychological research suggests that powerful people behave remarkably like traumatic brain injury victims. Controlled experiments show that, given power over others, people often become impulsive and less sensitive to risk.



Related: Ten Years On: Al Gore's 'Inconvenient Truth' Propaganda Film Turns Out To Be Total Bunk - How Is His Profit From Carbon Taxes Not Criminal Fraud?

Most important, test subjects often lose empathy, that is, the ability to understand and share the feelings of others. Said another way they lose their hearts, the intelligence of the heart, their own organs of truth so in a sense they become stupid.

Rich in money and possessions but without hearts leaves the most powerful without the kind of vulnerability that leads to love so actually they are poor in spirit, poor in their ability to feel but strong in their ability to abuse.

They also lose their capacity to mirror and listen to others.


All Governments Lie



Related Articles:

The Truth Is Possibly Out There

The Control-Matrix Is Crashing Because The Truth-Seekers Are Winning

Canada scandal: how does Minister of Defence still have a job?

Famous Medical-Journal Editor Torpedoes Medical Journal + Why Isn’t There A Medical Edward Snowden?

Mainstream Media Insults The Public's Intelligence On Vaccines & Vaccinated Vs. Unvaccinated Pilot Study: Early Vaccination Sees Exponential Increase In Chronic Disorders + Lies, Vaccines And The New Zealand Media

Lies, Damn Lies And Statistics

Pyramid Of Lies

Five Damaging Lies Advertisements Desperately Want You To Believe

The Mainstream Media Lies

Four Words: Weapons Of Media Lies & When Corporate Power Is Your Real Government, Corporate Media Is State Media

UN IPCC Scientist Blows Whistle On Lies About Climate, Sea Level

The Truth About MMS (Chlorine Dioxide) That They Don’t Want You To Know

The Global Accounts: The Truth, The Thieves, The Liars And The Con Artists

Ten Habits Of People Who Live Their Truth


Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi

Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi

Now That You’ve Awakened, How Do You Help Awaken Others?
June 26 2032 | From: WakeUpWorld / Various

So you see the ‘big picture.’ You’ve awakened to the realization that the planet has been hijacked - You know about their agenda - You know humanity can rise above it - You want to do something positive about it.



So, you start spreading the word to awaken others, telling them what’s really happening in the world.

Related: The Universe Played its Trump Card! But Is President Trump the Worst Curse or a Blessing in Disguise?

The greater the number of awakened individuals spreading the word, the quicker we as a race can reach that critical mass of consciously awakened individuals needed to prevent the doom and gloom and co-create a turnaround for planetary transformation.

And this change in mass consciousness for planetary transformation has to be done, especially with a sense of urgency - it’s a do-or-die-situation for humanity.

However, learning how to effectively spread the word to the un-awakened can be quite a difficult task at times, and is a subject, I feel, that is not addressed enough in the alternative media community. Over the years, I have learnt a number of effective ways to do it that avoid many pitfalls. Here are some of those ways to help spread the word and play your part in our mass awakening and planetary change:


Keep it Simple

Share your revelations on an increasingly steady gradient over time (don’t get heavy), so that people will grasp more easily where you’re coming from and be more accepting of what you say along the way.


Distinguish the Nay-Sayers

No matter how eloquent you may be, how knowledgeable, good at communication, dealing with people’s idiosyncrasies etc., there are some people who just won’t get it and I doubt if they ever will.



Related: Are You Awake? Or Just Informed

These people will invalidate you without ever investigating your claims.
The sooner you can distinguish these Nay-Sayers, limited by their self-imposed bubble of existence and belief, the sooner you can move on to spread the word to others who are more open-minded and receptive.


‘Gauge the Person’

If you want to make a difference then try to ‘gauge the person.’ That is, find out if they are open to what you have to say, and establish where they are at with their own awakening (if this is the case). Then you can speak to them on a level that they will gain further understanding.


Pick an Area

Many people began their awakening in a particular area of understanding. For example, my awakening began with health. If you can share a common ground with someone who somehow feels that things are not right in a particular subject area, then this indeed is the subject to discuss with them. 



Related: Twenty Vaccine Facts You Need To Know To Make An Informed Decision

Do you have a specialist area of knowledge you could share?



Set an Example

As the saying goes, be that change you want to see in the world. Express your individuality. Walk the walk, talk the talk. For instance, if you’re campaigning for health then practice what you preach by living healthily. Be authentic. Others will follow.


Be Courageous… But Do it Lovingly!

You may well have something worth saying. However, if you come across somewhat angrily or in a huff, then the person / persons listening may not hear what you’re saying, not matter how well you justified it. They will only get angry with your anger or huffy with your huffiness. So, basically, do indeed be courageous if needed, but try to spread the word lovingly.


Remember, You Haven’t Anything to Sell…

For me, the way I see it is like this. I haven’t got anything to sell: I’m not out to change the world. I couldn’t change one person if I tried. People don’t change people.



Related: The Masses Are Awakening

All we can ever do is present an opportunity to someone. It is up to that person to take and make something out of that opportunity and then change them self.

Sow a seed in their mind. Too much information for someone unprepared for it will only push them away and alienate you. Ask a question. Don't you find it strange that...


Questions Are Answers

One way of spreading the word, getting someone interested and aware is to give them questions. Giving someone questions not only encourages inquiry but also avoids confrontation. Instead of you being head-on confronted, the person is more likely to confront the question. Thus, questions indirectly serve as answers.


Know Thy Stuff!

Be prepared to give knowledgeable responses when challenged! A good knowledgeable response breeds confidence and courage. (Conversely, it can be counterproductive to talk about topics you don’t really understand. - Editor.)


Spread the Written Word

There are many free or cheap and easy-to-run blog sites you can use for spreading the word. There are also many excellent free article submission websites to get your voice heard.



Related: Manifesto Of The Awakened

Or how about creating an email list or setting up a social media page? Or you could give a slide-show presentation to your family and friends…  Can you think of other ways?



Final Thoughts…

That concludes some of the many ways we can help to awaken others. I hope that this has encouraged and inspired you!

And remember: Know that you can make a difference. Insignificance is an illusion.


When You Realise "A Bugs Life" Was Trying to Tell You Something...





Related Articles:

The Importance Being Awake

Once We Awaken

Loneliness - The Dilemma Of The Awakening Mind

The Great Awakening Has Begun

Why Do We Condemn Others For Being ‘Less Awake’ Or ‘Less Conscious?’


How To Realise Your True Calling & The 5 Stages Of Awakening: Are Demons Walking Among Us?

Is The Pineal Gland The Gateway To A Spiritual Awakening?

So You’ve Woken Up… Now What?



Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi

Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi

Delusions About Private Property And The Fantasy Of Equality
June 25 2023 | From: JonRappoport / Various

“Once private property is abolished, the advocates for utopia win. They build their heaven on earth, which means they can take what they want and run civilization, top-down. They can keep saying nobody owns anything, but in fact they own it all. They execute this squeeze play as if they were messiahs eradicating the prime evil: private ownership. This is such a preposterous stage play that, in a sane society, it would close down after one night.” - The Underground, Jon Rappoport



Newsflash: There is a difference between an idea and the way that idea is applied in practice.

Related: The Crown Of England Is Owned And Operated By The Vatican

For example, certain groups will take the idea of freedom and interpret it to mean:


"We have the freedom to steal everything we can.”

Based on this practice, many people will claim freedom was always a failed and corrupt idea at the core. This is wrong, absurd, and dim. Very dim.

In the same way, the idea of private property can certainly be twisted to mean;


“I will steal what you have, make it my own, and then declare it is my property, over which I have control.”

But the idea of private property remains independent of what people will do to distort it. A child used to be able to see this.

Centuries of struggle resulted in a shift from monarchs and priest classes owning all available land, to individuals having the right to own land. Once that principle was firmly established, groups immediately tried to modify the principle to their advantage.



Related: 1924 Newspaper Article Outlines Six Goals Of The Illuminati

In 1776, a group called the Illuminati declared its existence in Bavaria. One of its guiding ideas was: the abolition of all private property. That concept traveled down to Karl Marx and the Communist agenda.

Private property was called an inherent crime. Instead, the people/everybody would own all property.

This garbled incoherent pronouncement would be backed up by the ruling government, who would act as stewards for the masses - meaning the government would take control of all property until such time as the people evolved to the point where the State was unnecessary.

As a straight con, it was very weak. A two-bit hustler on a street corner with a folding table and three cards could see through it in a second. The people evolving? The State withering away on its own? Equality defined as everybody owning everything?



Related: The Lies And Deception Known As The European Union + We Are All Greeks:
Understanding The Economic Collapse Of Greece And The Subsequent Impacts On The Global Economy

Of course, if people injected their own utopian fantasies into the mix, if people assumed the government was a beneficent force for good, if people assumed there was an “everybody” operating unanimously, if people fantasized about a history of tribes (who fought wars against each other) gracefully abdicating the whole notion of individual property…well then, yes, the abolition of private property became a marvelous proposition.

In the light of day, however, with a clear mind, the idea was terrible. It was quite insane. It signaled a transfer of property from the individual to power-mad lunatics. Needless to say, this idea of no-private-property is alive and well on planet Earth today. We are in another round of fantasy-drenched propaganda.

In a nutshell, the threat of pure private property is: it establishes individual rights that stand against the unchecked force of the government-corporate-banking nexus. It implies the individual is free, independent, and the ruler of what he owns.

To which the addled mind replies:


“But suppose a person is polluting his land and the poison is running beyond his borders and endangering others?”

Well, that is called a crime. It should be prosecuted. It should be stopped.

The fact that it is often ignored doesn’t negate the whole assumption of private property. It points to the corruption of public officials who refuse to prosecute the offender.

Here is utopia laid bare: the government and its partners, who are doing everything they can to limit, squash, and outlaw the individual right to own property, are the same force that is acting as the wondrous representative of all the people; surrender to this force; give it power to appropriate all property and hold it in trust, for that day when the population has risen to enlightenment, when the open sharing of “everything” is a natural impulse. Then victory will be ours.

Not the iron fist. The open helping hand. Not the hammer. The smiling guide. Not the monarch. The servant of humanity. If you buy that one, I have waterfront condos for sale on Jupiter’s four moons. No terms. Cash up front. Construction begins in 2058. Promise.



Related: Dying Of Thirst: Privatization Of Water As An Owned Commodity Rather Than A Universal Human Right

The Homeowners Association actually owns the condos and the land. They are a subsidiary of the Jupiter Government Authority. There are rules. No flags of any kind flying from porches. No privately owned electricity generators. No growing of vegetables or fruit on the land. No weapons.

Domiciles must be shared with migrants arriving from Earth. The migrants are given beds, meals, and clothing. Possessions are shared. The prime directive: everything belongs to everybody. Power to the people.


Related Articles:

The Real Green Glossary: FAQ & The Great “Global Warming / Climate Change” Alarm Is Part Of The WEF’s “Great Reset”

Ardern And The Necessity Of Kindness + Countering “The Great Reset”: “Exit Globalization”, Refuse “Digital Tyranny” And “Global Governance”

New Zealand Member Of Parliament Is Concerned The Reserve Bank Of New Zealand Is Overseas-Owned

Copyright, Intellectual Property And The Extradition Saga Of Kim Dotcom


The NWO Depopulation Agenda Is The Only Explanation Why Expensive Mainstream Medicine Is Lethal

NWO: Totalitarianism And The Five Stages Of Dehumanization + Why 2022 Is 1973: Klaus Schwab Is Zbigniew Brzezinski

NWO Control System Vs. The Awakening - Which Will Win?


Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi

Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi
The ‘Great Reset’: A Technocratic Agenda That Waited Years For A Global Crisis To Exploit & Globalists Will Need Another Crisis In As Their Reset Agenda Fails
June 24 2023 | From: Sociable / AltMarket / Various

How the ‘great reset’ ideology of un-elected bureaucrats would steer society towards massive surveillance & control.



In the face of a global pandemic, an un-elected body of global bureaucrats based in Davos, Switzerland has asked the world to trust its vision of a technocratic “great reset,” knowing full well the public would never go for such a request had it not been for the golden opportunity they’d all been waiting for.

Related: The "New Confederacy"? Yes, It's Time For Conservatives To Unite Against The Globalist Reset

When the head of the World Economic Forum (WEF), Klaus Schwab, announced in June that “Now is the time for a great reset,” it wasn’t the first time he called for it.

In fact, he called on the WEF to start the great reset over five years ago (see video below), but this year he’s saying that COVID-19 is the most urgent reason to restructure all of society and the global economy.


WEF Chairman Hopes Forum Will Help Push "Reset" Button on World Economy





Related: ID2020


The great reset agenda was already in place long before the coronavirus pandemic, and the WEF was just waiting for a crisis to exploit it.


Prior to this year, implementing worldwide lockdowns that destroy businesses, wreck the economy, and leave people destitute and stripped of their constitutional rights while trying to enact invasive contact tracing, immunity passports, and otherwise massive bio-electronic surveillance apparatuses would never have been accepted by the citizens of a free society.

The so-called great reset is an old ideology touted for decades by globalists like Henry Kissinger, who opined in 2014, “Never before has a new world order had to be assembled from so many different perceptions, or on so global a scale.”



Related: “What Is The Great Reset?”: A Blatant Propaganda Video By The World Economic Forum

The great reset is the proposed mechanism for setting in motion a new global order, but it wouldn’t be possible to bring forth such a bold plan without a global crisis, be it manufactured or of unfortunate happenstance, that shocks society to its core.


"The pandemic represents a rare but narrow window of opportunity to reflect, reimagine, and reset our world to create a healthier, more equitable, and more prosperous future.”

- Klaus Schwab, WEF

In this story, I will attempt to dissect:

What types of invasive surveillance technologies will be required by the great reset

Why the great reset is being re-branded and pushed in 2020

How the Davos crowd is trying to sell the great reset Utopia

Who will be asked to give up their privacy for the common good

When humans become hackable

Where you have the power to choose 

With the arrival of the coronavirus pandemic, the WEF has the perfect excuse to quickly enact its vision for steering society towards a more invasive and intrusive, technocratic future in the name of serving the common good.

The un-elected architects of the great reset envision a Utopian world of inclusivity, equality, and sustainability that will require trust in emerging technologies like AI, 5G, Blockchain, and robotics, in order to usher in their golden dawn.



Click on the image above to view a larger version in a new window

Related: The Global Takeover Is Underway & A Skeptical Look At The ‘Great Reset’: A Technocratic Agenda That Waited Years For A Global Crisis To Exploit


Great Reset Will Require Trust in Invasive Surveillance Tech: WEF Promotes Health Passports & Contact Tracing

In order to bring about the great reset, it will require trust in the technology, and to be more specific, the WEF would like to have greater trust in “crisis-relevant tech,” which includes developing digital health passports and contact tracing, under a new form of internet governance.


“The use of digital technology during the COVID-19 crisis offers clear lessons […] Target mistrust broadly to enable specific crisis-relevant tech”

- Daniel Dobrygowski, WEF

“The Great Reset will require new institutions and business models, and new digital technologies to build them,” wrote the WEF Head of Corporate Governance and Trust, Daniel Dobrygowski, in a blog post. “The necessary collaboration, however, is only possible if we solve the digital trust problem,” he added.

According to the Dobrygowski, “The use of digital technology during the COVID-19 crisis offers clear lessons,” one of those being, “Target mistrust broadly to enable specific crisis-relevant tech.”



Related: Microsoft President Warns 2024 Will Look Like Orwell's '1984' If We Don't Stop AI Police State

The WEF openly supports the development of so-called “crisis-relevant tech” as evidenced by its backing the development of health passports, which act as digital records of your health status to determine whether or not you are free to travel or even go outside.

Earlier this year the WEF announced it was supporting the development and launch of CommonPass - a platform whose mission is “to develop and launch a standard global model to enable people to securely document and present their COVID-19 status (either as test results or an eventual vaccination status) to facilitate international travel and border crossing while keeping their health information private.”


"Contact tracing apps can be powerful weapons against the virus – but they can also be tools for state surveillance."

- WEF report

The WEF also lent its support to another health passport initiative called CovidPass, which was built by one of the WEF’s own “Young Global Leaders,” Mustapha Mokass, who used to be an advisor at the World Bank.

CovidPass “uses blockchain technology to store encrypted data from individual blood tests, allowing users to prove that they have tested negative for COVID-19.”

In supporting both CommonPass and CovidPass, the Davos elite have made it clear they want “crisis-relevant tech” like health passports to be part of the great reset solution.

Ask yourself, would the idea of being forced to electronically prove your current health status in order to travel or even leave your own home have been acceptable 10 months ago?

Why is this happening now?

The die was cast years ago, but only now do the Davos elite see a shrinking, yet golden opportunity, to create a new world order out of the coronavirus chaos.



Related: H.G. Wells' Dystopic Vision Comes Alive With The Great Reset Agenda


COVID Presents a ‘Shrinking, Golden Opportunity’, Great Reset Is Not a Response to the Coronavirus

In June Prince Charles praised the great reset agenda for its potential to “make people more receptive to big visions of change” after having suffered through “unprecedented schockwaves.”

“We have a golden opportunity to seize something good from this crisis - its unprecedented shockwaves may well make people more receptive to big visions of change,” the prince told the WEF.


Would the idea of being forced to electronically prove your current health status in order to travel or even leave your own home have been acceptable 10 months ago?

Prince Charles may have let on more than he cared to share, or thought you would notice. Again, he’s telling you that the great reset was always the plan.

COVID-19 is the excuse.

In other words, the coronavirus crisis presents a golden opportunity for the global establishment to further its agenda upon a frightful and angry population that has been so beaten down by the pandemic and subsequent lockdowns that they will have become more susceptible to giving over their freedoms to the idea of greater centralized power and control.


Prince Charles Says Pandemic a Chance to 'Think Big and Act Now’





Related: ‘The Black Spider Memos': Prince Charles, Secrecy And The British Government

Prince Charles went on, “As we move from rescue to recovery, we have a unique but rapidly shrinking window of opportunity to learn lessons and reset ourselves on a more sustainable path. It is an opportunity we have never had before and may never have again.”


“We have a golden opportunity to seize something good from this crisis — its unprecedented shockwaves may well make people more receptive to big visions of change.”

- Prince Charles

The British royal’s words echo those of WEF Director Schwab, who said, “The pandemic represents a rare but narrow window of opportunity to reflect, reimagine, and reset our world to create a healthier, more equitable, and more prosperous future.”

Again, why is the window of opportunity so narrow? Could the seeds of their grand strategy only flower while the world was distracted and divided amidst the chaos?



Related: Interpretation and Investigation: The Conspiracy Theory Trap


The Lure of Utopia Has Many Hooks: Giving Up Privacy & Freedom for the Common Good

Prior to this year, implementing worldwide lockdowns that destroy businesses, wreck the economy, and leave people destitute and stripped of their constitutional rights while trying to enact invasive contact tracing, immunity passports, and otherwise massive bio-electronic surveillance apparatuses would never have been accepted by the citizens of a free society.

But the coronavirus pandemic has opened a “narrow window” for a “golden opportunity,” and once this crisis is over, the Davos club fears that the window may be shut forever.

The WEF admits in its own contact tracing governance framework that “Contact tracing apps can be powerful weapons against the virus – but they can also be tools for state surveillance.”

Yet, the WEF believes that people should balance certain freedoms to serve the common good. It is a global vision without a clear end, and it is one that flies in the face of constitutional republics that protect certain unalienable rights.


“This new mindset would balance concerns over privacy and other issues with the potential to create value and improve lives.”

- WEF report

According to the WEF framework, enacting contact tracing technology would “not be easy and will require a new social consensus that embraces the use of technology to resolve problems for the good of all.”

Additionally, “This new mindset would balance concerns over privacy and other issues with the potential to create value and improve lives.”



Related: How Our AI Computer Forecasts the Failure of Schwab & World Economic Forum

In order to enact invasive technologies upon the population, citizens of the world will have to realize that it’s for the greater good and that they should change their mindsets to be less concerned about “privacy and other issues” and more excited about “the potential to create value and improve lives.”


“The great reset “will require stronger and more effective governments […] and it will demand private-sector engagement every step of the way”

- Klaus Schwab, WEF

Just about every proponent of contact tracing and health passports, including the WEF, all declare that technology should be used and governed ethically, but you hardly see any mention of winning the consent of the people.

Instead, they lobby stakeholders and policymakers to carry the torch in imparting the global vision from the top of the capstone and on-down.


“As we move from rescue to recovery, we have a unique but rapidly shrinking window of opportunity to learn lessons and reset ourselves on a more sustainable path. It is an opportunity we have never had before and may never have again”

- Prince Charles

If the coronavirus were to disappear from the earth today, would the WEF have to wait for a new global crisis, or would it push-on with the same reset agenda, regardless?

According to the WEF director, the great reset “will require stronger and more effective governments […] and it will demand private-sector engagement every step of the way.”

“The world must act jointly and swiftly to revamp all aspects of our societies and economies, from education to social contracts and working conditions,” he added. “We must build entirely new foundations for our economic and social systems.”



Related: Resetting Politics And The Media

In creating order out of the coronavirus chaos, the great reset promises to bring about “a more secure, more equal, and more stable world.”

Is that how they plan to win our trust? By promising us a Utopia if we just go along with it?


Bio-Electronic Surveillance and Hackable Humans

We haven’t even gotten into how the great reset would affect the world’s money system and the role of blockchain and digital payments, but when you look at digital health passports and contact tracing apps, you are looking at sophisticated form of bio-electronic surveillance that the world has never been seen before.


“We are no longer mysterious souls; we are now hackable animals.”

- Yuval Harari, WEF

When you combine biological data with advanced computing power, what you get is the ability to hack humans.

Speaking in Davos over the past few years, historian Yuval Harari has stated that “organisms are algorithms” and that “new technologies will soon give some corporations and governments the ability to hack human beings.”


How to Survive the 21st Century




Related: You’ll Own Nothing and Be Happy!? - The Great Reset


“The power to hack human beings can of course be used for good purposes like provided much better healthcare,” said Harari, adding, “but if this power falls into the hands of a 21st Century Stalin, the result will be the worst totalitarian regime in human history, and we already have a number of applicants for the job of 21st Century Stalin.”

“In Stalin’s USSR the State monitored members of the Communist elite more than anyone else. The same will be true of future total surveillance regimes.”

The great reset calls to restructure every aspect of society, and it can only do so if people trust the increasingly invasive, bio-electronic surveillance technology they wish to deploy.


“In Stalin’s USSR the State monitored members of the Communist elite more than anyone else. The same will be true of future total surveillance regimes”

- Yuval Harari, WEF

The more people know that someone is watching them, the more they will change their behavior. Just being aware that someone is monitoring your every digital transaction, will cause you to conform to certain norms.

As a population grows-up under massive surveillance, it will adapt its behavior to appear normal to society but compliant to authority. Over time, the citizens will police themselves out of fear.

Take a look at Communist China’s surveillance state, and you will see what I mean.



Related: The World Economic Forum Talks About “Mind Control Using Sound Waves” & Total Individual Control Technology – Insider Exposes How You And Your DNA Are Being Targeted


The WEF Wants to Win Your Trust, You Have a Choice

Tyranny arrives in subtle stages. It’s slow at first, but before you realize it even exists, it has already won.

That is what I see happening with the unholy merger of “the great reset” with “the new normal.”

Those who pull the strings have been begging for a global crisis to unleash their worldwide restructuring of society and the economy.

This year, in the face of a global pandemic, an un-elected body of global lobbyists based in Davos, Switzerland has asked you to have faith in their vision of a technocratic Utopia, knowing full well they could never issue such a request had it not been for the golden opportunity they had all been waiting for.

And that is where your power lies, dear reader. It’s your choice.

You can believe the WEF vision shared by some of the world’s most influential bureaucrats, or you can be skeptical of the whole establishment agenda that asks you to just trust the plan.


Related Articles:

Our Elites Learned from Zionists How to Control Explanations to Benefit Their Power and Wealth

2020 ‘The Year Socialism Went Mainstream’: Nikki Haley

Bill Gates Buying Up Huge Amount of Farmland While ‘Great Reset’ Tells Americans Future is No Private Property

Who Controls the World?

The New Year’s Eve “Virtual Light Show” at the Seattle Space Needle Was Highly Symbolic

WHO IS WE - The Great Reset. Self-appointed world "leaders" - Did you vote them in?

NYT Column Suggests Biden Hire A ‘Reality Czar’ & Establish A ‘Truth Commission’

“What is the Great Reset?”: A Blatant Propaganda Video by the World Economic Forum

Calling for an “American Ministry of Truth”. The US Media’s Dystopian “2021”

Greta Thunberg Triggers Criminal Investigation In India After Twitter Debacle

Antifa’s True Goals and Tactics Exposed: Andy Ngo

The World is Ruled by the Luciferian Pharaonic Oligarchy

Robert F. Kennedy Jr. Pens Encyclopedic Account Of Bill Gates’ ‘Neo-Feudalism’

Johnny Vedmore Interview – The “Great” Reset & The Shrouded Family History Of Klaus Schwab

The Resurrection of the Third Reich in Amerika

Flying-Robo Harvester Picks Ripe Fruit, Set To Displace Humans

Opinion: An Amazon Book Burning

Loomer - Is the Next Step For Cancel Culture To Drive Certain People From All Society?

Was Texas a Planned Target?

The Infantilization of American Adults

Big Tech ‘Aiding’ Beijing in Its Push for Global Dominance, Sen. Blackburn Says

Massive New Report Exposes Bill Gates' Global Control Grid

Alan Dershowitz: All Americans Need to Fight Cancel Culture

Bill Gates Goes Full Captain Planet, Wants To Change 'Every Aspect Of Economy' While We Dine On Fake Meat



Globalists Will Need Another Crisis In As Their Reset Agenda Fails

It might sound like “US exceptionalism” to point this out (…and how very dare I), but even if the globalist Reset is successful in every other nation on Earth, the globalists are still failures if they can’t secure and subjugate the American people.



As I’ve noted many times in the past, most of the world has been sufficiently disarmed, and even though we are seeing resistance in multiple European nations against forced vaccination legislation and medical tyranny, it is unlikely that they will have the ability to actually repel a full on march into totalitarianism.

Related: A Timeline Of "The Great Reset" Agenda

Most of Asia, India, New Zealand and Australia are already well under control. Africa is almost an afterthought , considering Africa is where many suspect vaccines are tested.

America represents the only significant obstacle to the agenda.

Conservative Americans in particular have been a thorn in the side of the globalists for generations, and it really comes down to a simple matter of mutual exclusion:

You cannot have an openly globalist society and conservative ideals at the same time in the same place. It is impossible.

Conservatives believe in limited government, true free markets, individual liberty, the value of life, freedom of speech, private property rights, the right to self defense, the right to self determination, freedom of religion, and the non-aggression principle (we won’t harm you unless you try to harm us).

None of these ideals can exist in a globalist world because globalism is at its core the pursuit of a fully centralized tyranny.


There are people on this planet that are not satisfied to merely live their lives, take care of their families and make their mark peacefully.

They crave power over all else.



Related: Great Reset? Putin Says, "Not So Fast"

They desperately want control over you, over me, over everything, and they will use any means at their disposal to get it. I would compare it to a kind of drug addiction; globalists are like crack addicts, they can never get enough power, there is always something more to take.

They tell themselves and others that they are “philanthropists”, that “they know what is best” for the rest of us. They believe themselves superior and therefore it is their “destiny” to dictate and micro-manage society for the “greater good” of us all.

But really, when we witness their methods it becomes clear that they have no noble aspirations. They have no empathy or honor.

They don’t care about the average human being, or the environment, or the economy or society in general. They only care about themselves and their delusions of grandeur. These people are a cancer on the rest of civilization.

They seem to be particularly obsessed with deconstructing and sabotaging America in the pursuit of their global Reset. Real philanthropists would not have a problem if someone didn’t want to accept their “charity”, but psychopaths cannot abide a group of people rejecting them and their ideology.

You are not allowed to walk away from them. You are not allowed to do things your own way. You must be forced to comply. The agenda only works if EVERYONE submits.




EUROPA: The Last Battle





Related: Pope Francis Calls For “New World Order” As Fauci Pushes “Globalization”





Unfortunately for the globalists, the Reset is not working out for them everywhere. In the US, the agenda is failing miserably compared to Asia and parts of Europe.

As the head of the World Economic Forum, Klaus Schwab, is so fond of reminding us, the Covid pandemic is the “perfect opportunity” to push forward the globalist plans for a total Reset of human economy and society.

To the globalists, the crisis is a panacea, a doorway to their version of a better world. They love the pandemic, they are not distressed by it.

The problem is, it’s not doing enough damage or terrifying enough people.

Consider the Event 201 coronavirus pandemic simulation - It was held by the World Economic Forum and the Bill and Melinda Gates Foundation only two months before the real thing “coincidentally” happened in early 2020.

The pandemic war game was less about saving lives and more about how the elites planned to keep the public under control. The suppression of alternative media and censorship in social media was discussed at great length. Dissenting voices need to be silenced if the Reset is going to prevail.

One factor within the Event 201 simulation that never played out, though, was the WEF projections on deaths. The war game suggested at least 65 million initial deaths due to the pandemic.



Related: A Primer For The Propagandized: Fear Is The Mind-Killer & Whistleblower: Newspaper Industry Chiefs Criminally Negligent Over Covid Scaremongering

Early projections on the death rate suggested 2% to 3% of the population or more. The same projections were repeated by the UN’s World Health Organization when the real pandemic was first revealed to the public.

Instead, Covid-19 has been a letdown for the globalists, with a tiny death rate of around 0.26% outside of nursing homes. Meaning, 99.7% of the population has nothing to worry about from covid. Millions of Americans are becoming savvy to the situation and are refusing to comply with mandates over a virus that is a non-threat.

Instead of backing off of the Reset scheme, the globalists are continuing to double down. Why? Because they have no other choice. They let the cat out of the bag and bloviating big-mouths like Klaus Schwab told the world exactly what the plan is.

If they retreat now, they might NEVER get another chance to implement a world centralization plan; a massive grift which requires medical tyranny in order to prevent rebellion.

You see, if the death rate had been dramatically higher than 0.26% and covid represented a legitimate threat, then maybe a larger portion of the US population would have been on board with longer term restrictions and medical passports.

Maybe not. The fact remains that 40% of deaths have been in nursing homes among patients with preexisting illnesses, the death rate outside of these facilities is minimal, the mask mandates have been proven completely ineffective and the states that have remained open and removed mask mandates have FALLING death and infection rates when compared to states that are enforcing lockdowns.



Related: Schwab Family Values

The fear narrative is falling apart. States across the US are opening and are refusing to implement useless mandates. In my home state of Montana, legislators and the governor are passing laws that forbid the enforcement of medical passports. Even major corporations are not allowed to demand vaccine passports from customers or employees.

On top of that, 40% to 50% of the US population in polls are refusing to comply with the vaccine rollout or medical passports. Why take a vaccine for a virus that 99.7% of the population is unaffected by anyway?

The jig is up. The globalists are going to need another crisis if they hope to enforce further lockdowns in the US, along with medical passports and disarmament.

Do not be surprised if there is more engineered chaos going into the summer months. But what will the next crisis look like? I think we are already seeing the signs…


Covid Mutations

The mainstream media is pushing a non-stop narrative of covid mutation hype.

We hear about UK and Brazilian variants on a weekly basis, and the assertion has been that surely, these variants will be more infectious and more deadly that the original virus.

There is still no proof whatsoever to confirm this, but the globalists only care about planting the idea in people’s heads.

They only care about reigniting the fear.

My feeling is that this strategy is going to fail, at least in the US. Too many Americans [Westerners] are aware of the con game, and a new virus threat is not going to have the same effect as Covid-19 did in the early months of the pandemic.

None of us really knew what we were facing back then, and caution was a practical response.

Today, we know for a fact that covid is not a concern for the vast majority of the public. Media attempts to amp up the threat will be ineffective, but they will of course still try.



Related: Ardern Takes Swipe At David Seymour, Denies Cabinet ‘Have Made Decisions’


BLM Riots

This is the next obvious tactic on the part of the establishment. Numerous state officials are openly supporting renewed riots across the country due to a recent police shooting in Minnesota.

The shooting itself was accidental, with the suspect violently resisting arrest and leaping into his car. A female officer grabbed her pistol in a panic instead of her taser and fired.

This event had nothing to do with racism, and nothing to do with police brutality. But, that’s not stopping Marxist groups like BLM from taking advantage and making it all about “white supremacy”. The real danger of unrest, however, will arrive at the closing of the Derek Chauvin trial.

With the trial coming to an end, evidence has been revealed that George Floyd was involved in heavy drug use and the medical examiner indicated that this along with heart disease were contributing factors to Floyd’s death.

A “speed ball” containing Fentanyl was also discovered in the back of the police cruiser in which Floyd was originally restrained.



Related: The Top Four Reasons Why Many People, Doctors And Scientists Refuse To Take The COVID Vaccine & A New Zealand Doctor Speaks Out Against COVID Policies

So, even if Derek Chauvin’s knee to the neck tactic helped kill Floyd, it is unlikely that a jury will convict him of 1st or 2nd degree murder based on the evidence. Any lesser charges will undoubtedly trigger more BLM riots.

Conveniently, these powderkeg events are taking place at the onset of the warm spring and summer months, which is prime time for riots.

My concern is that civil unrest will be allowed to spread and fester in the US until regular citizens start taking matters into their own hands.

And, of course, any community that tries to defend itself against looting and destruction will be accused of “racist aggression” - At which time the Biden "Administration" will then try to assert the authority to institute martial law measures in various regions. This combined with renewed attempts at covid lockdowns is a highly likely scenario.


Cyber Polygon

Just as the Event 201 simulation of a coronavirus pandemic preceded the real thing by only two months, there are concerns that the next World Economic Forum simulation event will also be a precursor to another crisis.

Cyber Polygon is a war game being held by the WEF this July which is meant to simulate a major cyber attack on the global supply chain and the economic system. There has been endless discussion in the media the past year building up fears of cyber attacks by Russia, China, Iran and even North Korea.



Related: The Importance Being Awake

In terms of supply chain threats, I’m not sure exactly how a cyber attack could do much to disrupt global shipping, unless we are talking about another blockage in a major shipping route like the Suez Canal.

But, a successful attack on stock exchanges in places like Wall Street could be devastating. I suggest watching this event carefully as it may be designed to precede a real cyber attack sometime this year.


Global War Tensions

The media and the Biden Administration are very busy trying to create tensions with Russia over Ukraine. There are renewed tensions between Iran and Israel and continued destabilization by the West in Syria. And, a rising danger of confrontation with China over Taiwan.

War could be the goal, or, the goal could merely be economic conflict. After all, China has already been dumping dollars and US treasuries the past year, and it would not take much to cause damage to the dollar’s world reserve status if China and Russia both diversified into a basket of currencies for global trade.

Beyond that, there are many advantages for globalists in creating regional wars and drawing Americans into pointless conflicts. For example, the threat of war could be used to institute a new draft.

What better way to keep American men in particular busy and stop them from rebellion against the Reset than to draft them so they can die in a meaningless war overseas?

There is also a narrative advantage to global tensions; when presented with a foreign threat, are Americans more likely to reject notions of rebellion against government trespasses?



Related: Is The Globalist "Reset" Failing? The Elites May Have Overplayed Their Hand

I have no doubt that the establishment will try to claim the liberty movement is not a movement for freedom, but an “astro-turf” movement created by the Russians to destabilize America.

This has been the leftist media propaganda strategy for years now; so why would they stop?

The bottom line is this: America is the primary target of the globalists because we are one of the only countries with the means and the numbers to stop them and the Reset.

Until they are removed from the equation they will continue to throw crisis after crisis at us in order to wear us down and force us to accept totalitarianism.

Do not get too comfortable in the fact that the pandemic agenda is failing here; stay alert and continue to organize your communities.


Related Articles:

The New mRNA COVID Vaccines Inject An Operating System Into Your Body - Not A Conspiracy Theory, Moderna Admits It & Open Letter to NZ MPs - Lockdown Is A Disastrous Error

What Is The Real Purpose Of The Lockdowns? + How A False Hydroxychloroquine Narrative Was Created

Gaslighting, Unending Lockdowns and Climate Change

"We Don't Debate with Anti-Vaxxers Whether They're Right Or Wrong", Says BBC

Will covid-19 vaccines save lives? Current trials aren’t designed to tell us

Covid-19 Symposium 2021: Dr Simon Thornley, Epidemiologist University of Auckland

War Castles: Military Insider! Understanding the Deep State Shipping/Banking Wars & the Significance of Robert J Gould

Our Descent Into Collective Madness

Opinion: The Denial of Evil: The Case of Communism

A Small Number of Psychopaths Control Society

A Damned Murder Inc: Kennedy’s Battle Against the Leviathan

Woke-a-Cola: How To Destroy A World-Leading Brand In 60 Seconds

Pelosi Claims Capitol Is Under Threat From ‘All The President’s Men’

Tucker: ‘Troops Will Never Leave DC; They’re There To Prop Up The Regime’

Michael Burry Slams "Out Of Touch, Rich White Man" Bill Gates

Is Bill Gates Senile?

Sen. Scott: ‘Woke Supremacy’ is Just as Dangerous as White Supremacy

More Evidence the US Fought WWII Against Great Britain

Testosterone and exercise; veracity of people with mental health difficulties; and doctors' comments curtailed

Totalitarianism Is Entrenched In America

The Truth on Hidden Human History (3/3)

The Sequel To The Fall Of The Cabal

World Economic Forum Backpedals

The Great Reset is a ‘coup’ by the globalist elite

“The Great Reset” Is Here: Follow the Money. “Insane Lockdown” of the Global Economy, “The Green Agenda”

“The Sloppy Dossier”: Plagiarism and “Fake Intelligence” Used to Justify the 2003 War on Iraq: Copied and Pasted from the Internet into an “Official” British Intel Report

The New Order of the Barbarians

Zionist Global communist takeover wake up

Department of Defense Training Manual Defines Christians as Extremists

“The Great Reset” Is Here: Follow the Money. “Insane Lockdown” of the Global Economy, “The Green Agenda”

The Bilderberg Group is the Nazi connection

We Are Now Entering Full-Blown Tyranny In The Western World

The Super Rich To Escape To New Zealand For Safety

The Covid Vaccine Is an Integral Part of “The Great Reset”

Mass Awakening Required

The French Military Warns Macron of a Military Coup

Red States Are Fighting Back Against The Reset – What Does This Mean For The Future?

Dinesh D’Souza: Emerging Totalitarian Mindset Seen in People Reporting on Neighbors

Has The Mainstream Media Finally Turned Against Bill Gates?

A Mom’s Research (Part 4): Why Are Many Elites Leftists?

The Gestapo came again attacking the Church

William Shakespeare and the New World Order: “Hell is Empty and all the Devils are Here”

The War of Global Corporate Wealth against Life and Humanity

America Is Playing With Fire...

NY Professor Warns Basic Education Regarding America’s Founding Being Replaced With Globalist Indoctrination

Learn The Secrets of Bill And Melinda Gates’ Divorce From Alex Jones

How They Use Fear to Control You



Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi

Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi

Moving Beyond Concentrated State Power
June 23 2023 | From: Geopolitics / Various

Capitalism is at the precipice of what it is capable of, and what is possible with it. Nevertheless, its proponents are perpetually swearing that it spurred tremendous development, yet we also know that it is the cause of so much industrial waste, and environmental destruction.



We are also aware that so much wealth of scientific knowledge have been purposely suppressed with the cooperation of the government for the purpose of preserving the need to consume and produce more, just to sustain commerce and capitalism, and its compatible patronage politics.

Related: The Looting Machine Called Capitalism

Both share the same motivation to profit and rule. However, the people need not be ruled. What we all need is learn about deep thinking to make way for enlightenment, vision and wisdom. That’s the only way that the people will eventually learn to govern themselves.

In contrast, the present control system run by the State is grossly inefficient and spiritually destructive.

For how long should we allow the regressive system to continue?


The New Socialism: Moving Beyond Concentrated State Power

[Comment: Let it be clear that this article is shared here NOT in a pro-socialist effort, however it does raise some interesting ideas in how we can begin to fix our world moving forward.]

Capitalism as a system is now increasingly challenged. Critics proliferate and steadily deepen their opposition (alongside, of course, the persistence of capitalism’s defenders). Yet capitalism’s traditional “other” - namely, socialism - has also been widely devalued. It has lost its position as the goal (however variously interpreted) for anti-capitalist social movements.

When not simply ignored, socialism (and even more its derivative “communism”) is often treated as utterly passé. When taken seriously, it is mostly a vague rhetorical gesture expressing criticism of the capitalist status quo, not advocacy of a concrete alternative.

Socialist parties now mainly support capitalism but with a human face - i.e. with the social supports and safety nets that their “conservative” counterparts disdain.




Related: Changes That Are Coming: The Deep State’s Control Is Fast Coming To An End

Sometimes the advocacy of socialism expresses a systemic rejection of, or opposition to, capitalism.

But even then, the current use of the term “socialism” lacks a clear, concrete definition of what genuinely new economic system it entails. What exactly differentiates it from and renders it superior both to capitalism and to what “old” socialism used to mean?

To enrich and strengthen anti-capitalism by giving it such a new, definitive goal, we need to revision socialism. On the one hand that means shedding accumulated historical baggage that now undermines and prevents socialism from being a prominent goal of social change.

On the other hand, a revised socialism requires new content that can inspire and motivate. That is now available.

Old socialism’s drawn-out demise since the 1970's helped give birth to a new 21st century socialism whose basic contours we can now contrast with old socialism.




Related: The World Economy Explained With Just Two Cows

The old socialism that evolved across the 19th and 20th centuries eventually settled its many, rich debates by largely agreeing on two basic ways to distinguish itself from capitalism.


Capitalism entailed:

1. Private enterprises to produce goods and services

2. Markets as the means to distribute resources and products among enterprises and individuals (workers and consumers).



In contrast, socialism entailed government-owned-and-operated enterprises and government central planning as the distribution system. Both devotees of capitalism and socialism accepted this set of differentiating definitions.

Debates and struggles over capitalism versus socialism then swirled around the relative virtues and flaws of private versus state enterprises and of markets versus planning.

The practice of socialism combined criticism of private enterprise and markets with celebration of state enterprise and central planning.



Related: Republic Or Democracy And Self-Governance

Once socialists had captured state power in the USSR, the People’s Republic of China (PRC) and elsewhere, the demands of managing actual economies tilted socialism’s focus ever further toward state enterprises and central planning mechanisms.

In perfectly parallel fashion, attacks upon socialism from devotees of capitalism stressed the failures and excesses of state enterprises and planning.

Many of those debates and struggles seemed to be resolved by the collapse of the USSR in 1989 and subsequent changes in Eastern Europe, the PRC and elsewhere. History, the devotees of capitalism crowed, had “proven” the non-viability of socialism, the superiority of capitalism.

They rarely grasped that what had failed was one version of socialism, an early experiment in what it might mean to construct a system beyond capitalism.


Their eagerness to claim that “socialism/communism had failed” conveniently forgot the many similarly “failed” efforts, centuries earlier, to construct capitalism out of a declining European feudalism.


Only after many such failures did changed social conditions enable a general system change to modern capitalism. Why would the same not apply to socialism qua successor to capitalism?



Related: Monopolies and Accountability

A major task for socialists has been honestly to admit and contend with the limits and failures of the old 19th and 20th century socialism: chiefly, excesses of over-concentrated state power and inadequately transformed production systems.

Old socialism’s achievements - especially rapid industrial development and the remarkable provision of social safety nets - might be preserved and built upon if its limits and failures were also recognized and overcome.

One emerging and promising new socialism for the 21st century focuses on worker co-ops. Socialism becomes the campaign to establish and build a sizable worker co-op sector within contemporary capitalism. In worker co-op enterprises, all workers are equal members of a democratically run production operation.

They debate and decide what, how an